Home

NEC Express5800/320Lc User's Guide

Contents

1. Secondary LED Non RDR RDR Primary model model 1 BMC status LED Green 2 PCI module status LED1 3 PCI module status LED2 Amber Green Amber 4 DISK ACCESS LED Amber Green Amber DISK LED Amber Green Amber V After the completion of disk duplication and when the PCI modules are duplicated LED Secondary Primary 1 BMC status LED Green 2 PCI module status LED1 3 PCI module status LED2 Green Green 4 DISK ACCESS LED Green or off Green or off DISK LED Green Green Windows Setup and Operation 3 43 Evaluate Start and Stop of CPU Modules This section describes how to confirm the continuous system operation after stopping one of the CPU modules 1 Confirm that the CPU modules are duplicated To check if the CPU modules are duplicated see the status LEDs of the CPU modules Rack mount model Indications status LEDs when CPU modules are duplicated LED CPU module 1 CPU module 2 Operating Operating 1 CPU module status LED1 CPU module status LED2 Green Green 2 Use the ft server utility to stop the operation of a CPU module to remove From Start select All Programs NEC ESMPRO Agent then ft server utility to start the ft server utility Then from the ft server utility select CPU Module then the CPU module to stop from the FTSever tree on the left pane and click Down of Bring Up Bring
2. Change the setup of the preventive disk maintenance with the ft server utility in the following procedure NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot set the preventive disk maintenance 1 Select Disk Failure Prediction in the FTServer tree 2 Check the check box of Enable disk failure prediction SMART or cancel the check 3 Click the Apply button Sample screen of ft server utility I Crate gtk talon pedot MAA T Preventive Disk Maintenance Installing and Using Utilities 5 65 Setup of System Operation The following properties can be set as the operation setup of the whole system m Quick dump If this property is enabled by checking Enable on the setup screen the dump is acquired in parallel with the system startup if a fault occurs in the system If this property is disabled the dump is acquired by the dump function normally provided by OS The initial setup value is Enable Auto firmware update If anew CPU module containing BIOS different from that of the existing CPU module in version with this property being enabled by checking Enable on the setup screen the BIOS of the new CPU module is updated to the BIOS of the existing CPU module to match with each other If this property is disabled the BIOS of the new CPU module is not updated automatically The initial setup value is Enable Auto module start If this property is enabled by checking Enable on the setup screen the CPU or P
3. Team Configuration Advanced Network Driver E Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter Adapters In Team G4 Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter 2 penini Priorty Status B Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode Member Adapters lt Empty gt B E Team 2 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode Member Adapters lt Empty gt Add Adapter to Team gt Team Information Ethemet Address O0004C4FEAFE IP Address Not Assigned Team Type Fault Tolerance Ready Show the tray icon Cancel 4 Right click Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode and select Remove At that time the dialog box shown on the right is displayed This is a message for confirmation so click Yes button Remove all teams displayed on the Intel PRO Set IT dialog box in the same manner Intel R PROSet II Q You are about to remove the following network component Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode Are you sure you want to continue Windows Setup and Operation 3 39 5 Click the OK button on the Intel PROSet II dialog box close it and make a setup effective The dual LAN will be canceled Intel R PROSet II Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter 2 Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter 2 Stratus emb
4. In CPU Information of Data Viewer s system tree the external clock is listed as Unknown ft Server Tree Appears on Date Viewer in an Incorrect Manner Ifyou open a Data Viewer immediately after the system starts up the tree or the state of a Data Viewer may not be displayed correctly due to high load of the system In about 20 minutes after the system startup when a pop up message below which prompts you to reconstruct a Data Viewer appears click OK The Data Viewer will be reconstructed and the tree and the status will be displayed correctly Data Viewer The system configuration of the host may have been changed Do you wish to reconstruct the tree The incorrect information appears on floppy disk drive After unplugging and plugging the PCI module of the primary side the floppy disk drive name of I O Device on Data Viewer may be different from the name that is recognized by the OS Example drive name on Data Viewer A drive name recognized by the OS B Check the floppy disk drive name on Explorer Ifyou add or delete floppy disk drive connected with USB while the system is running the drive information under the I O Device in the data viewer will be updated at the next system startup The displayed BIOS data is incorrect BIOS additional data may not be displayed properly in BIOS Information of a CPU Module of the ft server utility or in Ft Server CPU Module Individual
5. Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Support Not support IT a Installing and Using Utilities 5 45 Start and Stop of Components To start or stop a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Maintenance tree of the component in the FTServer tree of the data viewer Open the tree of the component to be started or stopped and select the Maintenance tree To start or stop a component with the ft server utility use the utility screen of the component The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be started or stopped Compo Start Stop nent Remote Local Remote Local CPU When the cause of Whenthe cause of When system is When system is Module down is reviewed down is reviewed stopped forcibly stopped forcibly and the system is and the system is due to replacement due to replacement restarted in module restartedin module or malfunction of or malfunction of down state down state module module f i f Executable in the Executable in any of Executable in the Executable in the following module the following module following module following module state states this canbe state state this canbe Only the green viewed on manager e When the status viewed on manager LED is on and in screen LED 1isred and screen redundant e Removed the status LED 2 is
6. System Upgrade 8 51 Supplement Before using backup devices If any of following backup devices is used for internal SCSI connector of NEC Express5800 ft series you may need to update your firmware for backup devices If your backup device to be connected is any of the following models refer to the manual_E pdf in your attached NEC Express Builder CD ROM That file describes detailed procedures to update your firmware List of backup devices and firmware Model NEC Model Name Latest Firmware Revision N8151 29F Built In AIT Auto Loader Llinb N8151 34AF Built In AIT 07n6 N8151 36F Built In AIT Auto Loader L7n7 N8151 39F Built In DAT Auto Loader L2n4 N8151 45F Built In DAT 02n9 N8151 46F Built In AIT Olnm N8151 41AF Built In AIT Olnm All tape devices are needed to update the firmware if the firmware revision is older than above 8 52 System Upgrade This page is intentionally left blank Appendix A Specifications it NEC Express5800 320Lc NEC Express5800 320Lc R Sm N8800 063F N8800 064F CPU Type Intel Xeon Processor x 1 Clock second cache 2 8GHz 512KB Number of processors 1 processor the number of processors installed per module MAX Up to 2 processors the number of processors installed per module Chipset Server Works Server Set III GC LE Memory Standard 512MB 256MB x 2 Each module has two DIMMs in standard configu
7. Model Name Unknown Description Unknown Online CPU Priority Not Available Logic Revision o0 BIOS Information Version Unknown Additional Information Unknown EHI CPU Module CPU Module ID 0 General ECC Information Threshold Exceeded Within the limits of threshold o Eqintermittent Errors o EUnconectable Errors 0 Chipset Information Unknown Bus Information T Maintenance Bus Number S6MH2 Capability Bus cE cu Unknown came DIMM BI PCI Module e SCSI Enclosure O Staus M Empty 1 gt For Help press F1 EE Normal warning BE Abnormal 7 Example of new window co TUNE 3051 DataYiewer LIEL File Edit View Tools Help j CPU Module a S gt aa ea e Ne e o TUNE 3051 ESMPRO MIB 86 1 0 Device a Enclosure Model Name Unknown 1B Software Description Unknown m Network Online CPU Priority Not Available SA Expansion Bus Device Taio Renia Unknown BB Bos BIOS Information El He System ee aera J Additional Information Unknown INE 3051 FTServer fm ouma anes ECC Information of eerti Threshold Exceeded Within the limits of threshold IE Gener E i Correctable Errors 0 E Maintenance cep CPU a DIMM S E CPU Module ID 1 Elintermittent Errors 0 EqUncorectable Erors 0 Chipset Information Type Unknown E re n Bus Information E Maintenance Bus
8. Slot 3 E PCI module 2 E SCSI Enclost E Slot 1 Clear MTBF Resynchronize This Disk El Logical Disk Information RDR Virtual Disk 1 IMPORTANT When RDR is set to a disk containing the boot partition the following pop up message appears and clicking Yes reboots the system automatically in 2 minutes Follow the steps 5 and on after the restart 5 down x System Restart Warning x System Shutdowr L Zi To complete the RDR Virtual Disk configuration change restart Windows This system is shutting down Please save all Until you restart Windows the disk will not be usable work in progress and log off Any unsaved changes will be lost This shutdown was Do you want to restart Windows now initiated by NT AUTHORITYSSYSTEM Time before shutdown 00 01 57 Message This system will reboot in 2 minutes to complete the RDR Virtual Disk configuration change This action CANNOT be cancelled No further warning will be given Windows Setup and Operation 3 19 5 Insert a disk to set duplex configuration into the corresponding slot In this example a disk is inserted into the Slot 2 of the PCI module for Group2 6 On the left tree on RDR Utility right click the disk which was inserted in the previous step and click Add RDR Virtual Disk IMPORTANT If the inserted disk has not been initialized on Windows RDR is set and synchronization starts automatically so this step i
9. IMPORTANT Carefully handle the CPU module so that you will not drop it or strike it against other server internal devices Release lever Latch lever 6 Carefully place the CPU module on the flat and sturdy table Avoid the dusty or humid place 7 Remove the two setscrews on the front of the CPU module and one setscrew on the back 8 Slide the top cover a little to remove it This allows you to access the devices in the CPU module For more information on how to handle these devices see the associated sections 8 14 System Upgrade Installing CPU Module Follow the procedure below to install the CPU module IMPORTANT Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before starting installing or removing options 1 Install the top cover to the CPU module TIPS Check the left right and upper tabs on the top cover are certainly engaged with the CPU module Secure the top cover to the CPU module with the three setscrews 3 Firmly hold the CPU module with both hands and insert it into the server Hold the module in such a way that its back panel connector faces the back of the rack and engage the guides of the module and chassis to insert it slowly Release lever The hook is located before the frame The hook is located behind the frame 4 Hold the release lever to push the module as far as it goes System Upgrade 8 15 5 Close the re
10. Screen FAROR Utility E DI x File E Action amp Help H El PCI module 1 E SCSI Enclosure DevicePathID 10 40 2 1 Slot 1 Op State State Duplex Disk Hardelisk0 LUNI PLEx1 OP Stats Reason ue Slot 2 ProductID 5T318404LC BE ales GMa Sree SOE ProductRevisionLevel 0006 Slot 3 SerialNumber 3BT2B28V0000213693RT E PCI module 2 ObjectName Harddisk1 LUN2 PLEX1 SCSI Enclosure ConfigState Configured Active Imported Slot 1 MTBF Current Unknown Disk Harddisk0 LUN1 PLEX2 MTEF ThresholdStatus Normal Slot 2 Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 PLEX2 Slot 3 Logical Disk Information RDR Virtual Disk 1 RDR virtual Disk 2 Name Value Note In RDR Utility the PCI module names correspond to the following modules PCI module 1 PCI module for Group1 PCI module 2 PCI module for Group2 Left frame The tree shows disks inserted to the built in slots and virtual disks RDR Virtual Disks Windows Setup and Operation 3 17 created by RDR On the models supporting RDR right click a disk on the tree to display the menu for setting RDR By looking at the tree you can know which disk corresponds to which disk of the Windows Disk Management and whether RDR is set to the disk For example in the case of the disk highlighted in the figure above Disk Harddisk LUN2 PLEX1 1 2 6 1 Corresponds to the number of Windows Disk Management In this example
11. Use this device enable hesi IMPORTANT Hard disks are numbered from 0 at the OS startup according to the position they are inserted When you increase a hard disk while the system is running it will be given a number that is not used for any disks However when you restart the system the old disk numbers will not be retained and disks are re numbered according to the hard disk position Therefore you need to determine which disks are mirrored based on target IDs which are always fixed but not on disk numbers because disk numbers may change 11 Make a mirror setting of Disks 1 and 4 Right click volume E on the Disk 4 and select Add Mirror 12 When the Add mirror dialog box appears select Disk 1 and then click Add Mirror Fle action View window Hep je e ax ee oe i i olme tayout Type File System status New New Volume F Computer Management Local Ei System Tools aj Event Viewer Volume E E x Shared Folders SEM C Explore E Local Users and Groups bee i i Performance Logs and Alerts Eater yana Device Manager ij Storage Change Drive Letter and Paths Format 3 Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management R f Services and Applications Delete volume Properties BDisk 4 l a Dynamic New Yolume E i 34 18 GB 8 00 GB NTFS 26 18 GB Online Healthy 7 Unallocated le gt I Unallocated I S
12. Shahar emb EHG Coppe Gepatt Adip Stans emb BISLGC Coppa Gigab Adap Not Set Standby ERENER ees Pretered Primary 2 oom irtomaion Ethemet Address COOMCAFEAFE IP dupes Net izago Tamm Type Fad Tinon Nol Set Standby lt For on board gt Status emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Status emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter lt For option board gt Status AA U51500 10 100 Enet Adapter 1OOBASE TX Status AA U57000 Fiber Gigabit Adapter 1000 BASE SX NEC 8490 XT Copper Gigabit Adapter 1000 BASE T You will then see the dialog box on the right of this paragraph This is because one of two teamed adapters constituting dual configuration is removed Click Yes to remove the adapter from Team Intel R PROSet II id You are removing a teamed adapter and leaving the team with only one adapter be To take advantage of teaming Functions there should be at least two adapters in the team Are you sure you want to continue p No 3 38 Windows Setup and Operation Remove the other adapter in the same way lt For on board gt Status emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Status emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter lt For option board gt Status AA U51500 10 100 Enet Adapter 10OBASE TX Status AA U57000 Fiber Gigabit Adapter 1000 BASE SX NEC 8490 XT Copper Gigabit Adapter 1000 BASE T Intel R PROSet II Action Help Network Components f Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter
13. 4 Enter the name of the target archive log file in the File name box 5 Select the format of the target log file from the Save as type list box and click OK Troubleshooting 7 47 Collection of Configuration Information Collect information such as the hardware configuration and internal setting information of the NEC Express5800 ft series IMPORTANT If a STOP error or system error has occurred or the system has stalled restart the system and then start the work 1 Click Start gt All Programs Accessories System Tools System Information 2 Select the Save from the File menu x Eile Edit View Tools Help Open Ctrl O OS Name Microsoft R Windows R Server 2003 Enter Version 5 2 3790 Build 3790 OS Manufacturer Microsoft Corporation Activation Status Activation Pending 13 days remaining System Name SONIC W2K3US 2 System Manufacturer NEC System Model Express5800 330Mc R N8800 038 System Type 86 based PC Processor 86 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7 Genuinelnt Processor x86 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7 Genuinelnt Processor 96 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7 Genuinelnt Processor 86 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7 Genuinelnt BIOS Version Date Phoenix Technologies LTD 2 00 PB 4 0 rel SMBIOS Version 231 Windows Directory C AWINNT System Directory CAWINNT system32 Boot Device Device HarddiskDmVolumes S onic w2k3us Locale United States ts ardware
14. SI0EM C Mirror Dynamic NTFS Healthy System 6 01 GB 3 63 GB Disk 0 E 4 oe sich Dynamic OEM C e rat Derragmen iar 34 18 GB 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB Disk Management Online Healthy System Unallocated fa Services and Applications Disk 1 Dynamic OEM C 34 18 GB 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB Online Healthy System Unallocated 3icp romo CD ROM D No Media BB Unallocated Mirrored volume e Is the mirror configured on the disks of the proper position On the Disk Management window right click the mirrored disks and select Properties Click the General tab and check if the Target IDs are identical In the case below the Target ID is 0 Stratus Dual Initiated SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI Disk Devicemayka Stratus Dual Initiated SEAGATE T336607LC SCSI Disk Devid see Nd ES General Policies Volumes Driver Stratus Dual Initiated SEE General Policies Volumes Driver Stratus Dual Initiated SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI q Stratus Dual Initiated SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI SY disk Device SP disk Device Device type Disk drives Device type Disk drives Manufacturer Standard d Location Bus Numb 0 Target ID ORUN 0 If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter Manufacturer Standard qi Location Bus Numb 0 Target ID OUN 0 p Device status
15. oO on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER l NEC Express5800 Series Master Control Menu O setup ee O Quit O Quit coppice tc Comertn NEC Put the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu automatically appears on the screen If the Autorun feature is invalid in your system run the MC IST EXE file in the CD ROM directly Some items are grayed out when the logon user does not have the authority of the Administrator or the system does not meet the requirements to install the application To use Master Control Menu e Click Online Document Setup or Quit or e Right click Master Control Menu window Installing and Using Utilities 5 11 NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager NEC Express5800 ft series system management applications NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are bundled to accessory CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER This manual describes the functions and features provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent and the notes on their operations These applications are necessary for continuous operation of NEC Express5800 ft series Overview NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are the server management software provided for the stable operation of a server system and effective system operations They can manage the configuration information and operating status of server resources to prevent server faults from occurring If a server fault occurs they detect the fault to notify the system Administrator
16. 3 When a firmware updating dialog appears check Copy firmware from Online module to Offline one and execute it Firmware is updated by copying the firmware on the online side to the offline side 4 Start the stopped module 5 60 Installing and Using Utilities Dump Collection To collect the dump file with NEC ESMPRO Manager use CPU Module Maintenance tree in the data viewer To collect the dump with the ft server utility use the utility screen of the component IMPORTANT Acquire the dump only for the examination of a fault The dump can be collected in two ways In each way the dump file is collected with the same path and file name SystemDrive NECDump MEMORY DMP as the dump file of the OS standard m Collecting dump of inactive module The dump is acquired from the inactive CPU module due to the occurrence of a fault or forced stop Collecting dump under system operation Either of the CPU modules is entered into the offline state and the dump is collected during system operation After the acquisition the CPU module is returned to the online state again This can be done only in the duplex system The table below shows the potential cases in which the dump is acquired URTERA Saving dump of stopped module pl a of component under system Remote Local Remote Local CPU Module When a fault or malfunction When a fault or When a fault or occurs in the system malfunction occurs malfun
17. 5 Syste 4 gt BB Unallocated Mirrored volume p EE _ loxi 8 The mirror configuration is Sara FAE completed if the volume status jm 2 0 l changes from Resyching to E compde Mansgemert oca Wome Layout Type Fie System status Capacty Free sp Hi l h CEI Ej EA System Tools SI0EM C Mirror Dynamic NTFS Healthy System 6 01GB 3 63 GB ealt y SE Event Viewer z Shared Folders amp Local Users and Groups ic Performance Logs and Alerts gt a Device Manager a Storage E Ri ible Sti emovable Storage OEM C Disk Defragmenter 6 01 GB NTFS Disk Management Healthy System fa Services and Applications OEM C 6 01 GB NTFS Healthy System CD ROM D No Media E Unallocated Mirrored volume 3 8 Windows Setup and Operation Confirming if Paired Disks are Mirrored Properly Check the following to confirm that the mirror is configured properly e Is disk mirroring completed successfully Disk mirroring is completed properly if the volume layout is Mirror and the status is Healthy on the Disk Management window omputer Manageme _ 51 x SJ Fie Action View Window Help gt e gt om eng Computer Management Local fh System Tools H E Event Viewer a Shared Folders ic Local Users and Groups g Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager ij Storage
18. Fail to power on the server O Is the server properly supplied with power Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet or UPS that meets the power specifications for the server Check if the two pieces of the provided power cord are connected to the main unit properly Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on If the power cord is plugged to a UPS make sure the UPS is powered and it supplies power See the manual that comes with the UPS for details Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS setup utility of the server lt Menu to check System Hardware gt AC LINK gt Power On gt Make sure the POWER switch on the power unit is on Did you press the POWER switch Press the POWER switch on the front of the NEC Express5800 ft series to turn on the power the POWER LED lights Did you install the CPU PCI module properly Check if the CPU PCI module is properly installed in the server Secure the module with screw located on the module handle 7 24 Troubleshooting Display Settings on the bottom right of the window Select Control Panel Display Settings tab and change the Color quality to Medium 16 bit or higher RS 5 41 PM The screen turns blue during
19. N8800 063E 064E NEC Express5800 320Lc 320Lc R User s Guide 1st Edition Updated 4 2005 856 124966 901 A PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER The information disclosed in this document including all designs and related materials is the valuable property of NEC Corporation NEC and or its licensors NEC and or its licensors as appropriate reserve all patent copyright and other proprietary rights to this document including all design manufacturing reproduction use and sales rights thereto except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others The NEC product s discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product However actual performance of each such product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration customer data and operator control Since implementation by customers of each product may vary the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC To allow for design and specification improvements the information in this document is subject to change at any time without notice Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC is prohibited First Printing January 2005 Copyright 2005 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 Chome Minato Ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan Keep this User
20. SNMP Community list box 3 Click OK to terminate the operation To allow NEC ESMPRO Agent to receive SNMP packets sent from NEC ESMPRO Manager set the send community name in NEC ESMPRO Troubleshooting 7 39 Manager to be the same as that accepted by the SNMP Service in NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot perform correctly Ifthe SNMP Service is added after adaptation of the service pack in installation of OS adapt the service pack again If not the SNMP Service may not operate correctly This then disables NEC ESMPRO Agent to be operated The SNMP Service is required for operating NEC ESMPRO Agent If the SNMP Service is deleted after the installation of NEC ESMPRO Agent install the SNMP Service and then reinstall NEC ESMPRO Agent Some software products provided by other vendors use the SNMP Service If the SNMP Service and NEC ESMPRO Agent are installed in the system in which such software as above is installed it may be impossible to start NEC ESMPRO Agent services If so delete the SNMP Service once and install the service again After which reinstall NEC ESMPRO Agent and the other vendor s software Total Status of the PCI Module When each module s status is simplex the total status of the PCI module displayed on the Data Viewer is yellow warning and the status will be reflected to the server status The ft control software 3 0 or later does not display the information on Ethernet
21. See LEDs in this chapter for details 100 10 LED See LEDs in this chapter for details LAN connector 2 A connector for 100BASE TX and 10BASE T Connected to the network system on LAN General Description 2 13 CPU Module Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration Module handle Cooling fan CPU module board CPU socket 2 additional AC inlet in the back Back panel connector in the back CPU socket 1 standard DIMM Power unit Power backboard SeOMONOUEAWN 2 14 General Description fi CPU module board Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration Cooling fan connector LED connector Power connector CPU socket 2 CPU socket 1 DIMM sockets Slots 1 to 6 from left Add memory modules in pairs 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 This section only describes connectors that are used for replacing parts or upgrading Other connectors have been setup before shipment OOR ON General Description 2 15 PCI Module Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration Cooling fan 2 Power unit AC inlet in the back The AC cable in the module which is connected to the AC inlet cannot be used for other purposes Backpanel connector in the back PCI module board Video board PCI riser card PCI board retention bracket SCSI backboard o COOANODUO FS 2 16 General Description PCI module board Group 1 and group 2 have the same con
22. System Configuration 4 27 Exit Move the cursor onto Exit to display the Exit menu Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Security System Hardware Item Specific Help Exit System Setup and Save Changes amp Exit Exit Without Saving Changes Get Default Value Load Previous Value save your changes to Save Changes CMOS F1 Help t 1 Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save Changes amp Exit The following describes each option on the Exit menu m Save Changes amp Exit Select this option to save the current configuration data into the CMOS non volatile memory and exit the SETUP utility The following screen appears Setup Confirmation Save configuration changes and exit now Yes No Select Yes to save the current configuration data into the CMOS non volatile memory and exit the SETUP utility The server will automatically restart the system m Exit Without Saving Changes Select this option to discard the current configuration data and exit the SETUP utility Setup Warning Configuration has not been saved Save before exiting Yes No Select No to discard the current configuration data and exit the SETUP utility Select Yes to save the current configuration data into the CMOS to exit the SETUP utility and to restart the server automatically 4 28 System Configuration m Get Default Value Sele
23. The following message may be displayed during usage Your system is low on virtual memory To ensure that Windows runs properly increase the size of your virtual memory paging file For more information see Help When this message is displayed extend a physical memory following the procedure below 1 Adda physical memory 2 Change the configuration of the paging file Change more than lt physical memory capacity x 1 5 gt The system also displays a warning message if an internal device or peripheral equipment e g disk network or printer encounters an error Take notes of the message and call your sales agent 7 22 Troubleshooting Server Management Application Error Message If the server management tool such as NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager or GAMServer has eae been installed in the NEC Express5800 ft series or sinma ni arena management PC you can obtain the error information nase af from the display unit of the server or management PC See Chapter 5 or online documentation for details of such application programs Troubleshooting 7 23 SOLVING PROBLEMS When the server fails to operate as expected see the following to find out your problem and follow the given instruction before asking for repair If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem take a note on the on screen message and contact your sales agent Problems with NEC Express5800 ft series
24. m To keep the server off powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER switch was used to power off Select System Hardware gt AC LINK Last State m To keep the server off powered even when power is supplied from the UPS Select System Hardware gt AC LINK gt StayOff Keyboard To set NumLock and key repeat Select Advanced Keyboard Features and set each item 4 6 System Configuration Security To set passwords on the BIOS level Select Security Set Supervisor Password and enter a password Set Supervisor password first then User password To enable disable the POWER switch Select Security Power Switch Mask Unmasked Select Security Power Switch Mask Masked IMPORTANT Masking the POWER switch disables forced shutdown as well as power on off using the POWER switch Serial Devices To setup serial devices Select Advanced Peripheral Configuration and setup each device Optional PCl related devices To install optional SCSI boards etc Select Advanced Option ROM gt PCI Slot n Enabled n Slot number to install the board Boot To change the boot order of devices connected to the server Select Boot and specify the boot order To display POST check results Select Advanced Advanced Boot time Diagnostic Screen Enabled You can also press Esc while the NEC log is on the screen to d
25. mgr TUNE mgr_TUNE mgr_TUNE mgr _TUNE mgr_TUNE mar TUNE s 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM ESMCommonService 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb 06 28 2001 11 43 AM E100B 06 28 2001 11 43 AM_srabb 5 18 Installing and Using Utilities NEC ESMPRO Agent Device ID in Alert Report Some NEC Express5800 ft series reports use unique device IDs which correspond to the devices listed in the table below as the device identification information Device name Device ID CPU module 1 0 DIMM1 on CPU module 1 0 0 DIMM2 on CPU module 1 0 1 DIMM3 on CPU module 1 0 2 DIMM4 on CPU module 1 0 3 DIMM5 on CPU module 1 0 4 DIMM6 on CPU module 1 0 5 CPU1 on CPU module 1 0 20 CPU2 on CPU module 1 0 23 Power supply unit on CPU module 1 0 100 CPU module 3 2 DIMM1 on CPU module 3 2 0 DIMM2 on CPU module 3 2 1 DIMM3 on CPU module 3 2 2 DIMM4 on CPU module 3 2 3 DIMM5 on CPU module 3 2 4 DIMM6 on CPU module 3 2 5 CPU1 on CPU module 3 2 20 CPU2 on CPU module 3 2 23 Power supply unit on CPU module 3 2 100 PCI module 1 10 PCI slot 1 on PCI module 1 10 0 PCI slot 2 on PCI module 1 10 1 PCI slot 3
26. Ba Services and Applications OEM C 4 01 GB NTFS Healthy System 4 gt f E Unallocated 3 28 Windows Setup and Operation 9 Select and right click a disk and then select Convert to Dynamic Disk F aa z EE oe volume Layout Type File Syste new Volume E Simple Dynamic NTFS new Volume F Simple Dynamic NTFS EEM c Mirror Dynamic NTFS Computer Management Local fi System Tools Ej a Event Viewer E Shared Folders E 4 Local Users and Groups E B Performance Logs and Alerts 8 Device Manager amp Storage E Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management E E3 Services and Applications Convert to Dynamic Disk 3 EJEA Select one or more basic disks to convert to dynamic disks Disks OEM C 16 94 GB 4 01 GB NTFS Healthy System Cancel IMPORTANT If Foreign appears execute Convert to Dynamic Disk after Convert to Basic Disk is executed 10 Open the disk s properties to check the target IDs In the following figures disks are configured as Disk 1 Target ID 1 Disk 2 Target ID 2 Disk 4 Target ID 1 Disk 5 Target ID 2 Disks with the same target ID are mirrored Disk 1 Disk 2 zixl zixl General Policies Volumes Driver General Policies Volumes Driver a SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI Disk Device eee SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI Disk Device Device type Disk drives Device type Disk drives Manufact
27. CPU Module General BIOS Information of Data Viewer In this case see the data in ESMMIB BIOS of Data Viewer The displayed status of Ethernet adapter is error If an Ethernet adapter is not used not connected to cable set it to Disable in Network Connections from Control Panel If an Ethernet adapter you are about to disable has dual LAN settings AFT function remove the dual LAN settings before disable it 7 44 Troubleshooting NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot perform correctly by coexistence with the Oracle products The installation of the Oracle products may change Startup Type of SNMP Service into Manual If so change the setting back to Automatic and set up correctly according to the description of the Oracle product A modular state is displayed as fault PCI modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other For example when the Status item of a module changes to fault it may be caused by another module s error Therefore you need to check the status of the other modules based on alert information After mounting a hard disk a status color changes frequently When creating a new mirror the status of the hard disk and its upper component SCSI enclosure will continue to change frequently after you mount a hard disk until the mirror is completed During this process the status color may turn to abnormal but when the mirror
28. Cleaning the Floppy Disk Drive A read write error may occur due to stains on the read write head of the floppy disk drive Use the cleaner dedicated for floppy disk drive to clean the read write head It is recommended to clean the head on regular basis Cleaning CD ROM A dusty CD ROM or dust accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD ROM regularly 1 Make sure that the server is powered 2 Press the Eject button on the front of the CD ROM drive The tray comes out 3 Hold the CD ROM lightly and take it out from the tray IMPORTANT Do not touch the signal side of the CD ROM with your hand 4 Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Do not wipe the lens of the CD ROM drive Doing so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive 5 Gently push on the tray front to close the tray 6 Wipe the signal side of the CD ROM with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Wipe CD ROMs from the center to the outside Use only CD ROM cleaner if necessary Cleaning a CD ROM with record spray cleaner benzene or thinner causes damage to the CD ROM contents At worst inserting the CD ROM into the server may cause failure 6 6 Maintenance Cleaning Tape Drive Dirt on the tape head may be a cause of unsuccessful backup and damage to tape cartridge Clean the tape head regularly using a cleaning tape For procedure and interval
29. File menu select Configuration command to open Configuration dialog box Select New to display the Select a model dialog box 5 Check Write to FD and select an applicable model to open Configuration for ft Server dialog box Ex The model name is printed on the front cover like NEC Express5800 320Lc or NEC Express5800 320Lc R 6 On the Configuration for ft Server dialog box specify register configuration information including the names of computers to be managed and then write the information to FD as the following filename lt Filename gt CSL_LESS CFG The setting items of the server are as follows Computer Name The managed server name Arbitrary IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Primary contact Management PC s IP address 7 Right click the server name to open the pop up menu from which select Property command to open Property dialog box 8 When the Property dialog box appears specify the items as follows lt ID page gt Connection mode LAN lt Alert notification page gt Uncheck Use Default Settings and check Reset of Activate Installing and Using Utilities 5 75 9 Right click the server name to MWA Remote Console LAN192 168 1 249 ServerA Not connected OY x open the pop up menu an d File View Data Window Help select Open Remote Console el ujaj to open MWA Remote E LAN192 168 1 249 ServerA Not connected Console LAN192 16
30. If you set a small value for Boot Monitoring Time out Period you can shorten the waiting time to the rebooting It is recommended to set a value of more than 3 minutes though smaller value setting is available when external devices are not used As it depends on the user s setting environment make sure to execute enough evaluation after the configuration of the environment Option ROM Select Option ROM on the Advanced menu to display the following screen and enable disable expansion of Option Rom BIOS on the PCI bus Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Option ROM Item Specific Help On Board SCSI Enabled Disables enables the On Board LAN 1 Enabled mapping of the on board On Board LAN 2 Enabled SCSI BIOS PCI Slot 1 Enabled PCI Slot 2 Enabled PCI Slot 3 Enabled Fi Help f Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save Changes amp Exit System Configuration 4 17 See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting On Board SCSI Disabled Enable or disable expansion of SCSI Enabled BIOS on the motherboard On Board LAN 1 2 Disabled LAN1 Enable or disable 10 100BASE Enabled LAN controller on the motherboard LAN2 Enable or disable 1000BASE LAN controller on the motherboard PCI Slot 1 PCI Slot 3 Disabled Enable or disable BIOS on a device 1 Enabled board co
31. None Select a flow control method XON XOFF Console Direct Select a connection with the HW console Connection Via modem Factory set System Configuration 4 25 ft Memory Select ft Memory on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen System Hardware See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Size 0 Size of ft Memory is specified MB Start Address Shows the start address of ft Memory view only Factory set IMPORTANT m Unless you use ft Memory do not change the factory setting m To use ft Memory you need to prepare an ft Memory RAM Disk m If you specify change the size of ft Memory on the ft Memory RAM Disk not this menu the changes will take effect automatically m For details see manuals included with the ft Memory RAM Disk 4 26 System Configuration Boot Move the cursor onto Boot to display the Boot menu AY ETI Advanced Security System Hardware Exit The server searches for the boot device according to the order specified in this menu and use the software to boot the system if found You can change the boot device order using or 4 and or Move the cursor to select the device by T or 4 and then change the priority using or IMPORTANT Specify the device boot order as shown above to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
32. Others z No status is shown TIPS Unless the hard disks make up a mirror the Mirror Disk screen does not show any information 5 38 Installing and Using Utilities IMPORTANT The Mirror Disk screen shows a pair of two hard disks as a mirror Disk pairs are shown in the same manner even if a few volumes are created within a single disk or one volume spans a few disks span volume A few volumes are created within a single disk omea Hf volume Boot volume ferme Senne I 1040 1 10 402 10 40 3 poco e I US 1140 1 11 402 The screen shows information on a pair of hard disks that make up a mirror It does not show information based on volumes ex Volume A Volume B Installing and Using Utilities 5 39 IMPORTANT A volume that spans a few hard disks is mirrored mirror volume span volume aT BE 1040 1 10 402 1040 3 1140 1 11 402 11 403 ow Piip pense PE Siew ews BB ond Even if a volume consists of a few hard disks the screen shows information on each pair of hard disks that make up a mirror In the above example Volume A is shown in Mirror 2 10 40 2 11 40 2 and Mirror 3 10 40 3 11 40 3 separately When a hard disk fails that status will be reflected in both mirrors 5 40 Installing and Using Utilities 3 Recovery from a hard disk failure If a hard disk breaks the broken disk must be replaced immediately This section descr
33. Removal of the server from the rack assembly should be performed by suitably trained maintenance personnel oS A CAUTION S A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of a fire personal injury or property damage See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in AN Chapter 1 for details e Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself e Do not install the server in any place other than specified e Do not connect disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source IMPORTANT m If the server needs to be relocated stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great extent contact the sales agent m Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk if any m When moving the server with hard disks make sure not to give a shock to the hard disks m When storing the server keep it under storing environment conditions temperature 10 to 55 C humidity 20 to 80 non condensing 1 Take a floppy disk and a CD ROM out of the server if any Power off the server Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Remove all the cables from the server Remove all the mounted modules OY is If the server is a rack mount model remove the backplane and the rails from the rack cabinet 7 Carry the backplane rails and modules separately IMPORTANT If the server is a tower model do not hold the front beze
34. This device is working properly p Device status This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter zd Device usage Use this device enable i Windows Setup and Operation 3 9 Breaking mirror Follow the procedures below to break the mirror of volumes The procedures to break a mirror on C drive are discribed here 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Computer Management The Computer Management window will appear Right click the volume of the dynamic disk whose mirror is to be broken and click Break Mirrored Volume fle Action yiew window Help i Le xi e omen Computer Management Local E System Tools HE Event Viewer Shared Folders ic Local Users and Groups cr A Performance Logs and Alerts Healthy System 6 01 GB 3 63 GE E Device Manager Si Storage ic Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management m f Services and Applications 8 17 GB 8 17 GB Inallocated gt W Unallocated Mirrored volume Click Yes on the Break Mirrored Volume dialog box Break Mirrored Yolume E xi d If you break the mirrorred volume your data will no longer be Fault tolerant Do you want to continue Click OK on the Logical Disk Manager dialog box This dialog box is not displayed for data volu
35. e Check configuration in Setup menu menu e Hard disk is faulty e CPU module board is faulty e PCI module board is faulty e Replace the hard disk e Replace the CPU module board e Replace the PCI module board 0210 Stuck Key Keyboard connection error e Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back again e Replace the keyboard e Replace the PCI module board 0211 Keyboard error Keyboard is faulty 0212 Keyboard Controller Failed Keyboard controller is faulty e Check the keyboard connection e Restart the server e Replace the PCI module board 0213 Keyboard locked Unlock key switch Keyboard is locked Unlock the key switch 0220 Monitor type does not Illegal monitor type is e Select Get Default Value offset match CMOS Run specified from the Setup menu SETUP e Clear the CMOS data 0230 System RAM Failed at DIMM is faulty e Replace DIMM offset e Replace the CPU module board 0231 Shadow RAM Failed at DIMM is faulty e Replace DIMM e Replace the CPU module board Troubleshooting 7 15 On screen error message Cause Action 0232 Extend RAM Failed at address line DIMM is faulty e Replace DIMM e Replace the CPU module board 0233 Memory type mixing detected DIMMs of the different types are installed Replace DIMM with appropriate one 0234 Single bit ECC error DIMM is faulty e Replace D
36. pressing F5 m The display of RDR Utility is not updated automatically When any operation is performed to a disk update the display manually FAROR utility File E Action amp Help H E PCI module 1 E SCSI Enclosure Slot 1 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 f Slot 2 Slot E PCI module SCSI Enclos Slot 1 Dist B Slot 2 Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 IDR x A Deactivate RDR operation was successful Resynchronize This Disk Name DevicePathID Op State State Op State Reason Vendor ProductID Virtual Disk FAROR utility File E Action A Help H PCI module 1 E SCSI Enclosure Slot 1 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 f B s E PCI module 2 E SCSI Enclosure B Slot 1 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 f B Slot 2 Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 A Name DevicePathID Op State State Op State Reason vendor ProductID ProductRevisionLeve SerialNumber ObjectName ConfigState MTBF Current MTBF ThresholdSta 3 22 Windows Setup and Operation 5 Remove the RDR setting from the disk in the corresponding slot the Slot 2 of the Group2 in the same manner Zi FAROR utility File E Action A Help H Op State Reason El PCI module 1 Name amp Do you want to Deactivate this disk from RDR virtual disk El SCSI Enclosure DevicePathID Slot 1 Op State State Disk HarddiskO LUN1 f Vendor E Slot 2 i Prod
37. tab Enter values in the available time From and To and click OK in the Advanced and Properties dialog boxes Now you can see the correct information from Manager too Hang of SNMP Service SNMP Service has a module called SNMP Extended Agent This module may be registered when you install some software that uses SNMP Service If you start SNMP Service SNMP Extended Agent is also loaded at the initialization However if the initialization is not completed within a specified period SNMP Service will hang It may take time to complete the initialization due to temporary high load on the system In this case wait for the system load become low enough before restarting SNMP Service Installing and Using Utilities 5 27 NEC ESMPRO Manager To monitor and manage a computer on which NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed with a management PC online use NEC ESMPRO Manager that is bundled with the product For detailed procedures of installation and setting see online documents or NEC ESMPRO Online Help TIPS Online documents provide cautions and information for using NEC ESMPRO Manager See NEC ESMPRO Manager User s Guide in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Monitoring by Use of Data Viewer To monitor the state of the NEC Express5800 ft series on a management computer with installation of NEC ESMPRO Manager the data viewer is used If you click each of the modules and items to be checked sequentially on the tree vie
38. you can see the correct information from Manager too Disk Maintenance While NEC ESMPRO Agent is Running The following works to disks hard disk drive or magneto optical are not allowed while NEC ESMPRO Agent is running 1 Oy Ol Be Ge th To format or delete a partition by Disk Administrator or by other means To request programmatically to remove media from removable disks such as MO Zip and PD Select the Start Settings Control Panel Open the Service Select a service named ESMCommonService and click the Stop Confirm that ESMCommonService stopped and close the Service Do the disk related works Open the Service again select ESMCommonService and click the Start Confirm that ESMCommonService is active and close the Service and Control Panel 7 42 Troubleshooting Change the threshold of temperature voltage and fan sensors From NEC ESMPRO Agent the display the change of the threshold of temperature voltage fan cannot be performed However there are some which can perform only the display of a threshold in the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager depending on a model NEC ESMPRO Agent is supervising by the optimal threshold set up from each model The incorrect information appears on Current Status of Temperature Voltage and Fan Sensors The temperature voltage fan sensor which does not have information such as a state the present value number of
39. 1 SCSI 3 from left to right PCI module2 SCSI enclosure2 SCSI 1 SCSI 3 from left to right CPU module1 CPU module3 5 20 Installing and Using Utilities Supplement Note the following when using NEC ESMPRO Agent Application log registered when system starting Source About the event of Perflib When system is starting Perflib log may be registered to the application log The detailed information about an event log is described on Microsoft Product Support Services Please check the contents INFO Events for Performance Monitor Extensions http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 226494 Application Log Events Generated When You Start Performance Counter Query http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 296 187 Event ID 2003 Warning Message Logged When Loading Performance Counters http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 26783 Visit the Microsoft Help and Support on regular basis where you can find other information than the above at http support microsoft com default aspx LN en us Dual registration of event logs At some types of errors two event logs may be registered for a single occurrence However in the case of NEC ESMPRO Manager one log is reported for one occurrence Such errors are as follows Temperature error Voltage error Thermal trip Maintenance related Functions When you want to use maintenance related functions of the NEC Expre
40. 1 DevicePath 2 4ni2it ResyncLUNPriority Status IMPORTANT m When a new partition is created on the disk where RDR is set the created partition area is synchronized automatically m When the disk where RDR is set is converted to a dynamic disk the area which has not been synchronized the area that no partition exists will be synchronized m When the system is shut down without shutting down Windows properly for example by pressing the power button the entire area of the synchronized disks will be resynchronized after the system is restarted Windows Setup and Operation 3 21 Removing duplex configuration of RDR disks This section describes how to remove duplex configuration from the disk with RDR setting In the example below the duplication setting of the disks in the Slot 2 of the PCI modules for Group 1 and for Group 2 is removed IMPORTANT You cannot break the duplex setting of the following disks m Disk containing the boot partition or volume m Disk containing page files m Dynamic disk 1 Start RDR Utility 2 Right click the disk to deactivate RDR and click Deactivate RDR Virtual Disk 3 Inthe Warning dialog box click Yes x Success dd Do you want to Deactivate this disk from RDR virtual disk 4 The RDR setting is removed from the target disk IMPORTANT m When the disk does not appear on the tree update it by clicking Refresh R from Action A or
41. 19 LED indications Primary Secondary Description Action Red Red BMC is being dumped Wait for a while After a while the BMC status LED on the primary will go off Both BMCs are out of order Check if both PCI modules are connected correctly Confirm that screws are fixed firmly If the indication does not change contact your sales agent 1 The status of green green blinking every second amber amber blinking every second or off 2 20 General Description PCI Module Status LEDs Disk Access LED 1 2 The PCI module has three LEDs Combined the three LEDs show the status of the PCI modules and hard disks See NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS page 2 7 for the locations of LEDs 1 2 1 Status LED 1 of both PCI modules are off PCl 1 PCl 2 Status DISK Status DISK wat LED 2 Access LED 2 Access pescription Anton LED LED Green Green Green Green Both PCI modules Off Off operate normally in 7 duplex mode Green Off Amber Amber Some trouble occurred Reconfigure the hard disk on a hard disk of the mirror PCI module 1 See DISK OPERATIONS in Amber Amber Green Off Some trouble occurred Chapter 3 Windows Setup and on a hard disk of the Operation PCI module 2 If the problem persists contact your sales agent Off Off Amber Amber AC power is not Check if the power
42. 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Cor0 3 3vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit Cor0 3 3vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Cor0 3 3vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CorQ 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Cor0 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit Cor0 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Cor0 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit Cord 5 0vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 5 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent 00 lower limit Cor0 5 0vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 02 lower limit Cor0 5 0vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Troubleshooting 7 5 Indication saui E2 S Explanation Procedure Cor0 5 0vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal5 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent 09 upper limit Cor0 5 0vsAl m Amber Blink PCI module 1 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Cord 5 0vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal5 V power voltage alarm 0
43. 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Corl 2 5vAlm Amber Lit PCl module 2 Fatal2 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit Corl 2 5vAlm Amber Blink PCl module 2 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Corl 2 5vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal2 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit Corl 3 3vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Corl 3 3vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal3 3 V power voltage Contact your sales agent 02 alarm lower limit Corl 3 3vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Corl 3 3vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit Corl 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Corl 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit Corl 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Corl 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit Corl 5 0vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Corl 5 0vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal5 V power voltage alarm 02 lower limit Corl 5 0vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Corl 5 0vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal5 V power voltage alarm 09 upper limit Corl 5 0vsAlm Amber Blin
44. Chapter 7 8 20 System Upgrade Replacing DIMM Follow the procedure below to replace the failed DIMM 1 Identify the failed DIMM using the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager ok SONI Data iewer _ o x Eile Edit view Tools Help amp SONI ESMPRO MIB SONI FTServer f CPU Module 8 CPU Module ID 0 General W Update E Maintenance DIMM ID 0 0 Memory Type Revision Serial Number a cu SPD Revision Clock Frequency Self Refresh Support Refresh Rate 15 625 MicroSecond Error Correction ECC ECC Information Threshold Exceeded Within the limits of threshold E Conectable Errors 0 E crucio o 20 Pa CPUCID 0 21 DIMM ID 0 1 DIMM ID 0 2 p DIMM ID 0 3 a Doamne 0 m CPU Module 1D 2 EqUnconectable Errors 0 BY PCI Module Manufacture Information B A SCSI Enclosure Mirror Disk ae Ra een jon Code Part Number Unknown Manufactured Date Specific Data Status M Online Normal Warning W Abnormal 7 Remove the CPU module Replace a DIMM Install the CPU module Boot the CPU module using the NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility System Upgrade 8 21 PROCESSOR CPU In addition to the standard CPU Intel Xeon Processor you can add one CPU to make a multi processor system IMPORTANT m The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from
45. Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen 3 Click the Bring Down button in the Maintenance screen for the target component A certain time is required for the stop The stop result can be confirmed by State on the target component screen The result of the stop operation is reported by the NEC Express5800 ft series as an alert Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 1 oi SONI DataViewer BE Ele Edit yew Tools Help a Pci modue J ela aal ele A Em l eee e Ue E E Module up press the Bring Down button Bina the BO Module Some MTEF Information Type Use Threshold Threshold 600 Sec 2 i pi ICI Slot ID 10 1 ICI Slot ID 10 2 CI Slot ID 10 3 CSI Adapter ID 10 5 SEE Bross the Clear MTBF button to Clear pret meem Diagnostics Information Time of last run Result Message Test Number om date s ID 10 5 0 4 SCSI Bus ID 10 5 1 PACED 10 6 awe E reid SCSI Enclos SB Mirror Disk Fress the Diagnastice button to TRE iagnose the PCI Module Dao T For Help press F1 M Normal Warning INN Abnormal 4 Maintenance screen of PCI module PCI Module PCI Module Maintenance Installing and Using Utilities 5 47 Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 2 cis SONI DataViewer Be E Ele Edit View Tools Help CPU Module amp gt a
46. Configuration 4 23 Wake On Events Select Wake On Events on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen System Hardware See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Wake On LAN Disabled Enable or disable the remote power on Enabled feature via the network When Enable is selected change the AC LINK setting in the System Hardware to Stay Off Factory set 4 24 System Configuration Console Redirection Select Console Redirection on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility System Hardware Console Redirection Item Specific Help Serial Port Address Disabled If enabled the console will be redirected to Baud Rate 19 2K this port Flow Control XON XOFF Console Connection Direct F1 Help f I Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save Changes amp Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Serial Port Disabled Select a serial port to connect the HW Address On board COMB console Selecting On board COM B changes Boot time Diagnostic Screen to Enabled Baud Rate 19 2K Select a baud rate for communications 57 6K with the connected HW console Flow Control
47. Contrast Displays allow you to adjust brightness and contrast Optimum brightness and contrast vary depending on the individual age brightness of the room etc you need to make an adjustment accordingly If the screen is too bright or too dark it is bad for your eyes Adjust the installation angle of Keyboard Some types of keyboards allow you to adjust the angle If you adjust the angle to make the keyboard more comfortable to use you can greatly reduce stresses on your shoulders arms and fingers Clean the Equipment Cleanliness of the equipment is very important not only for reasons of appearance but also from the viewpoints of function and safety Especially you need to regularly clean the display which gets unclear due to the accumulation of dirt Take a break when you get tired If you feel tired you are recommended to refresh yourself by taking a short break or doing a light exercise Chapter 2 General Description This chapter describes what you need to know to use the NEC Express5800 ft series Refer to this chapter when you want to know about certain components and how to operate them 2 2 General Description STANDARD FEATURES High performance m Intel Xeon Processor 2 8 GHz m High speed Ethernet interface 1000Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps supported m High speed disk access Ultra160 SCSI Wide Expandability Wide variety of optional I O slots Four 64 bit 33 MHz two 32
48. Down iol x 5 CPU Module ID 0 ft server utility File View Window Help E a FTServer General K9 Disk Failure Prediction MTBF Clear B E CPU Module ace information is cleared Feed CPU Module ID 0 F CPU Module ID 2 E 8 PCI Module SCSI Enclosure Use Threshold ci BMC Never Restart C Always Restart MTEF MTEF Type Bring Up Bring Down CPU module is brought up or down Diagnostics Information Start diagnostics of CPU module Fomware Start fimware update Fi Phoenix ServerBIOS Version 2 00 PB 4 0 re16 20 3 44 Windows Setup and Operation When you stop the operation of a CPU module the indications of the status LEDs change as follows Below denotes that the only one CPU module is operating Indications of status LEDs LED CPU module 1 CPU module 2 Stopped Operating 1 CPU module status LED1 Red 2 CPU module status LED2 Amber As an example the indications of when CPU module 1 is stopped are shown 3 Press the start button of the CPU module stopped by ft server utility In the ft server utility select the stopped CPU module and click Up of Bring Up Bring Down Once the CPU module is started hardware diagnosis and then synchronization of memory memory copy are performed and the duplication process is completed Note that the system is paused temporarily for copying memory during memory synchro
49. Function PCI device is faulty 0B1C PCI Parity Error on Bus Device Function PCI device is faulty e Replace the PCI board e Re install the PCI board e Re configure the PCI board e Replace the PCI module board 0B22 CPUs are installed out of order CPU is faulty Replace the CPU 0B28 Unsupported Processor detected on Processor 1 The processor CPU not supported by this server is installed in Processor 1 Install the CPU appropriate to the server 7 16 Troubleshooting On screen error message Cause Action 0B29 Unsupported Processor detected on Processor 2 The processor CPU not supported by this server is installed in Processor 2 Install the CPU appropriate to the server 0B30 CPU FAN 1 Alarm e Dusts are clogged in fan e Replace the fan occurred e Fan is faulty e Replace the CPU module 0B31 CPU FAN 2 Alarm e CPU module board is faulty board occurred e Connect fan cable properly 0B32 CPU FAN 3 Alarm e Dusts are clogged in fan e Replace the fan occurred e Fan is faulty e Replace the CPU module e CPU module board is faulty board e Connect fan cable properly 0B40 Invalid System Configuration Data e Configuration error in SETUP e CPU PCI module board is faulty e Reset the setting by selecting Yes at Reset Configuration Data e Replace the CPU PCI module board 0B41 System Configuration Data Read
50. Groups e Gm eaxgesas cothy System 6 01GB 3 64Gi Extend volume Alerts Add Mirror CD ROM D No Media gt BB Unallocated I Simple volume 6 On the Add Mirror dialog box select the disk to mirror and click Add Mirror Add Mirror Adding a mirror to an existing volume provides data redundancy by maintaining multiple copies of a yolume s data on different disks Select a location for a mirror of C OEM Disks Windows Setup and Operation 3 7 IMPORTANT m Clicking Add Mirror displays the Logical Disk Manager dialog box but there is no problem Click OK m Ifthe server is rebooted during mirror generation mirroring will not be completed Do not reboot the server until the mirroring process is completed 7 The volume status changes to EEMI _ lolx R hine Fle Action View Window Help x esynching e ameng Computer Management Local volume Layout Type File System status Capacity Free Sp E System Tools OEM C Mirror Dynamic NTFS Resynching 6 01GB 3 63 GB gg Event viewer z Shared Folders ic Local Users and Groups ic Performance Logs and Alerts gt a Device Manager Sj Storage cc Removable Storage a arasia OEM C Disk Defragmenter 6 01 GBNTFS 4 Disk Management Resynching 5 Syste m f Services and Applications OEM C 6 01 GB NTFS Resynching
51. If the problem persists contact operates in simplex your sales agent mode Red Off Off Amber The CPU module 1 is Start the CPU module 1 from ft on standby The CPU server utility See pages 3 42 module 1 has not been 3 powered on yet through 3 43 N a a module 1 operates in simplex p p mode your sales agent Off Amber Red Green The CPU module 2 is Wait for the CPU module 2 to performing diagnosis start When the CPU module 2 Diag starts and duplex mode is The CPU module 1 established the indications will operates in simplex return to normal mode Red Green Off Amber The CPU module 1 is Wait for the CPU module 1 to performing diagnosis start When the CPU module 1 Diag starts and duplex mode is The CPU module 2 established the indications will operates in simplex return to normal mode Off Off Off Amber AC Sad Pe aij Check if the power cord is supplied to the module 1 The CPU ans mea ies module 2 operates in eck the condition of breaker simplex mode and UPS Check if the power unit is connected correctly Remount the CPU module 1 If the problem persists contact your sales agent General Description 2 25 CPU 1 CPU 2 Status Status Status Status Description Action LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 Off Amber Off Off AC power is not Check if the power cord is supplied to the CPU connected correctly module 2 Ch ae The CPU module 1 eck the condi
52. L NECST 5SX0 Not Supported M TUNE 3051 ON Evecute Close T State Change Alert Setting dialog box 4 Check the name of servers sending the state change alert to the Manager when the Agent recognizes changes in the state Click the Execute button for the setting change to take effect 5 72 Installing and Using Utilities Change of Device State Color on DataViewer From Manager Ver3 88 and Agent Ver3 8a some change has been made to the color of device state in order to improve intuitive recognition at an abnormality or a system trouble occurrence Device State Old color New color CPU Module Empty Gray Yellow CPU Module Removed Gray Yellow CPU Module Simplex Yellow Green PCI Module Empty Gray Yellow PCI Module Removed Gray Yellow PCI Module Simplex Yellow Green SCSI Slot Empty in case of mirroring Gray Yellow As shown above the device state color of troubled components components that is Empty or Removed affecting the FT system s redundancy has been changed to yellow Warning in order to make it easier to determine problems However for the device state color of modules operating without hardware trouble the color indicating the simplex state has been changed from yellow Warning to green Normal Example of old window Gis TUNE3051 DataViewer Bs Es Bile Edit view Tools Help SS lt gt sla Sie CPU Module
53. LED indications of the server and alarm indications on the display which will serve as helpful information at the time of repair ABOUT REPAIR PARTS The minimum duration of holding repair parts of this equipment may be different for each country so contact the NEC sales representatives If the period is not specified the repair parts are kept for 5 years after discontinuance of the product 1 20 Precautions for Use Advice for Your Health Prolonged use of a computer may affect your health Keep in mind the following to reduce stresses on your body Sit in a good posture Sit on your chair with your back straight If the desk height is appropriate you will slightly look down at the screen and your forearms will be parallel to the floor This good work posture can minimize muscle tension caused by sedentary work If you sit in a bad posture for example sit round shouldered or with you face too close to the display you may easily suffer fatigue or have your eyesight affected Adjust the installation angle of Display Most types of displays allow you to adjust the angle vertically and horizontally This adjustment is very important to prevent the reflection of o light as well as to make the screen more comfortable to see Without this _ adjustment it is difficult to maintain a good work posture and may get tired soon Be sure to adjust the angle before using the display Adjust Brightness and
54. O windows Task Manager E o x File Options Yiew Help Applications Processes Applications Processes Networking Users CPU Usage p CPU Usage History M CPU Usage CPU Usage History PF Usage p Page File Usage History ae PF Usage m Page File Usage History Totals Bae Memory K r Totals Physical Memory K Handles 4931 Total 1047724 Handles 4931 Total 1047724 Threads 321 Available 893064 Threads 321 Available 893064 Processes 28 System Cache 93216 Processes 28 System Cache 93216 m Commit Charge K Kernel Memory K Total 25804 Paged 7860 Nonpaged 17944 M Kernel Memory K Total 101996 Total 101996 Total 25804 Limit 2526696 Paged 7860 Peak 104244 Nonpaged 17944 Limit 2526696 Peak 104244 M Commit Charge K E Processes 28 CPU Usage 2 Commit Charge 99M 2467M Processes 28 CPU Usage 2 Commit Charge 99M 2467M A System with one CPU System with two CPUs General Description 2 7 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS Names and functions of components are shown below Front View Tower model Rack mount model 2 8 General Description 1 Front bezel A door that covers internal components You can lock it with the included security key 2 Key slot Insert the security key in this slot to unlock the front bezel 3 Stabilizers Parts for stabilizing a tower model unit 4 Casters Wheels fo
55. OS boot Wait for the period of time you set at BIOS Boot Monitoring after the boot pair is automatically swapped the server will be rebooted and the OS will start up gt Start the OS from the other PCI module s hard disk Fail to power off the server O Is the POWER switch enabled Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility lt Menu to check Security Power Switch Mask gt Unmasked gt POST fails to complete O Is the DIMM installed At least one DIMM is required for operation O Is the memory size large The memory check may take a time if the memory size is large Wait for a while O Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start up POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding In such a case restart the server once again Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start up message appears when you restart the server O Does the server have appropriate memory boards or PCI card Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed Troubleshooting 7 25 Fail to access to internal or external devices O Are cables properly connected Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected Also make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order O Is that
56. Off Off Only the PCI module 1 Check if the power cord is is on standby AC connected correctly power is supplied Check the condition of through the cord but breaker and UPS the system has not Check if the power unit is been powered on yet connected correctly AC power is not Remount the PCI module 2 supplied to the PCI If the problem persists module 2 contact your sales agent General Description 2 23 PCI 1 PCI 2 Status DISK Status DISK wat LED 2 Access LED2 Access Description Action LED LED Green Off Off Off The PCI module 1 is Wait for the OS to start After performing diagnosis Diag AC power is not supplied to the PCI module 2 the OS starts check the status LEDs and then take the appropriate actions If the problem persists contact your sales agent 4 Status LED of only PCI module 2 is red PCI 1 PCI 2 Status DISK Status DISK nae LED 2 Access LED2 Access Description Acton LED LED Amber Amber Off Off The PCI module 2 is on Start the PCI module 2 from ft standby The PCI server utility See pages 3 39 module 2 has not been through 3 41 powered on yet Remount the PCI module 2 The PCI module 1 If the problem persists operates in simplex contact your sales agent mode Amber Amber Green Off The PCI module 2 is Wait for the PCI module 2 to performing diagnosis start When the PCI module 2 Diag
57. Off line Maintenance Utility Maint Part None System Diagnostics Create Support Disk BIOS FW etc Update System Management Help Return to the Top Menu m Off line Maintenance Utility Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS dependent maintenance program that performs preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server See Chapter 6 or the online help for details m System Diagnostics Executes several tests on the main system to examine the features of the system and the connections between the system and extension boards If the system diagnosis is executed the system check program is started depending on the system status See the description in Chapter 6 to manipulate the system check program m Create Support Disk In the support disk creation procedure the starting support disk for starting a utility within the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from a floppy disk and the support disk required in the installation of the operating system can be created If you write down the titles appearing on the screen on the floppy disk labels they can be easily managed later The customer should prepare the floppy disks for creating the support disks Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creates a support disk required for recovering the system ROM DOS Startup FD The support disk for starting the ROM DOS system is created Off line Maintenance Utility FD Creates a support disk for activating the Off line Main
58. PCI module Remove the PCI module s top cover Identify the slot to which you want to install a PCI board and remove the connector cap IMPORTANT Carefully keep the removed connector cap To install a long card loosen the setscrew slide the bracket and secure it with the setscrew Pull the PCI board retainer bracket from the inside Unscrew the setscrew of the additional slot cover at the same position level as the target slot and remove the slot cover IMPORTANT Carefully keep the removed additional slot cover PCI board retainer bracket Additional slot cover System Upgrade 8 35 7 Align the terminal segment of the board with the connection of the slot and insert the board slowly into the slot Slots for inserting bracket edges TIPS Check to see if the edge of the bracket taper is inserted into a slot of the chassis In the case of a long board check also to see if its other edge is inserted into the bracket guide 8 36 System Upgrade 8 Align the PCI board with the guide rail groove and insert the board slowly IMPORTANT m If the insertion is unsuccessful remove the board once and retry installation Note that if excessive force is applied to the board it may be damaged 9 Attach the retainer bracket to fasten the PCI board 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 System Upgrade 8 37 In the case of a long board slide the bracket to fasten the
59. Specify whether the load of RISC codes is enabled or Disable disabled gt 4GByte Addressing Enable Specify whether hard disks of 4 GB or larger is used Disable or not Fast Command Porting Enable Do not change the factory setting Disable Factory set SCSI Device Settings System Configuration 4 33 If you put the cursor on SCSI Device Settings with keyboard cursors and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter the screen for setting the information on the device connected to the host adapter appears The table below shows the parameters of the setting items and their factory settings IMPORTANT The settings can be made for each SCSI bus Submenu item Parameter Description SCSI Bus0 SCSI Bus1 Disconnects OK Yes Yes Specify whether the disconnection of No No SCSI devices from the SCSI bus is enabled or disabled On Bus0O select No for ID8 Check Parity Yes Yes Specify whether the parity check is No No provided or not Enable LUNs Yes Yes Specify whether more than one LUN No No numbers are given to SCSI ID Enable PPR Yes Yes Do not change the factory setting No No Enable Device _ Yes Yes Do not change the factory setting No No Negotiate Wide Yes Yes Specify whether the wide 32 bits No No transfer is enabled or disabled Negotiate Yes Yes Specify whether the synchrono
60. To this end use the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to your server or the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager For more information see NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager Maintenance of NEC PCI Module ID 10 ft server utility ofx File view Window Help 1 Bing Ubre Dower hg FToerver MTBF Ch DeateliraUslnnttrate FS bal P General va bring the PO Mache down Brot i Disk Failure Prediction MTBF information is cleared Clear CPU Modde MTBF irtomatien eset wane ee r Bing Up Bing Down a amp pter 1D 10 5 PCI module is bought up or down Up ee x SCSI Bust1D 10 5 0 A ij ri lem css 1081 Din Dagrostes heaton J Ethernet Board 1D 10 6 Ti of Mt rary 0AE 1447171000 f Make BPC nm r Diagnostics Infomation SCSI Enclosure o Ba Start diagnostics of PCI module Diagnostics Kuala Shane Status Duplex Sarona ba FO Modde io H For hols res PA Ba a I rome Ready 4 NEC ESMPRO Manager Select FTServer gt PCI Module PCI Module to be removed Maintenance gt Bring Up Bring Down gt Bring Down ft server utility Select FTServer PCI Module PCI Module to be removed Bring Up Bring Down gt Down After the CPU enters into off line status the status LEDs of the PCI board and PCI module will change as follows PCI board slot status LEDs all of them Off PCI module Status LED 1 Red Status LED 2 Off lt
61. Tower model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it lt Rack mount model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels Disconnect the PCI module s network cable and cables connected to the options Loosen the setscrew securing the PCI module s release lever 8 30 System Upgrade 5 Hold the release lever of the PCI module and pull it off The PCI module is slightly pulled out toward you IMPORTANT Do not hold the other parts than the release lever to pull the module 6 Pull off the module halfway slowly Pushing down the latch lever on the side to unlock it pull the module off the rack IMPORTANT Carefully handle the PCI module so that you will not drop it or strike it against other server internal devices Release lever Latch lever 7 Carefully place the PCI module on the flat and sturdy table Avoid the dusty or humid place 8 Remove the two setscrews on the front of the PCI module and one setscrew on the back 9 Slide the top cover a little to remove it This allows you to access the devices in the PCI module For more information on how to handle these devices see the associated sections System Upgrade 8 31 Installing PCI Module Follow the procedure below to install the PCI module IMPORTANT Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before starting installing or removing option
62. _ ED AN Explanation Procedure A a bientTempAl m Amber Blink CPU module Temperature alarm lower Contact your sales agent limit AmbientTempAlm Amber Lit CPU module Fatal temperature alarm 02 lower limit An bientTempAl m Amber Blink CPU module Temperature alarm upper limit AmbientTempAl m Amber Lit CPU module Fatal temperature alarm 09 upper limit B BMC Unsync PCl module 1 The BMC cannot be Contact your sales agent synchronized BMCO Not Ready Green Blink PCI module 1 PCI module s BMC is If disconnection continues BMC1 Not Ready Green Blink PCI module 2 disconnected for a while contact your sales agent Ce Cor0 12vAl m00 Amber Blink PCI module 1 12 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent lower limit Cor0 12vAlm02 Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm lower limit Cor0 12vAl m07 Amber Blink PCI module 1 12 V power voltage alarm upper limit Cor0 12vAlm09 Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm upper limit CorQ 2 5vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 2 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Cor0 2 5vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal2 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CorQ 2 5vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Cor0 2 5vAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CorQ 3 3vAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 3
63. a Enter Esc F1 F9 F10 submenu option an option preceded by is selected these keys are disabled Press Enter to choose the selected parameter Displays the previous screen Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations The help screen for SETUP operations appears Press Esc to return to the previous screen Sets the default parameter to the parameter of the currently displayed item The default parameter may differ from the factory setting Save configuration values and exit System Configuration 4 5 Configuration Examples The following describes examples of configuration required to use software link features or for system operations Link with Management Software To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network Select System Hardware AC LINK gt StayOff To use the management PC with NEC MWA installed for remote operations m Remote operation via LAN Select Advanced Advanced gt RomPilot Support Enabled m Remote operation via direct connection using cross cable Select System Hardware Console Redirection Console Connection Direct m Remote operation via WAN Select System Hardware Console Redirection Console Connection gt Via Modem UPS To link power supply with the UPS m To power on the server when power is supplied from the UPS Select System Hardware AC LINK gt Power On
64. a PCI module and another Fibre Channel Coniac into the alot at the same location in another PCI module How to confirm the status 8 46 System Upgrade Use StoragePathSavior when iStorage is connected or PortDuplexManager when N8190 110F is connected to check Fibre Channel Controller statuses instead of viewing PCI board statuses System Upgrade 8 47 N8104 84 1000BASE SX Adapter Consult your sales personnel for details when purchasing this hardware IMPORTANT Note the following about this product m It is advisable to add this product to such environment that each system is used for a different purpose ex system line maintenance monitoring and multiple accesses do not occur simultaneously m If there are multiple accesses the processing power and transmission speed may be somewhat affected Slots to install the board PCI slot N code Name Group 1 Group 2 Remarks 1 2 3 1 2 3 N8104 84 1000BASE SX Adapter V v Vv vy Each PCI module can contain one board only vX Can be installed Installation of driver Cannot be installed The NEC Express5800 ft series uses a pair of N8104 84 boards in duplex mode After installing the drivers in the following procedure perform a dual configuration setup IMPORTANT Please use the CD ROM for NEC Express5800 ft series for installation If you use the floppy disk provide
65. a case it is required to force the server to shut down This forced shutdown however is not available if Masked is selected for Power Switch Mask on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility SETUP because this setting disables POWER switch operation Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the server 1 Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility SETUP 2 Select Unmasked for Power Switch Mask in the Security menu 3 Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP Saving Dump Files Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an err occurs Insert a metal pin a straightened large paper clip make a substitute into the switch hole to press the DUMF switch Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory Memory dumping may not be availat when the CPU stalls IMPORTANT Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break Dump switches Chapter 8 System Upgrade This chapter describes procedures to add options and replace failed components IMPORTANT m Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by the user However NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user NEC recommends you ask your sales agent to install or remove any optional devices m Be sure to us
66. and operates in occurs non duplex mode AFT ALB Does not depend on simplex or duplex PCI board is installed to The system is operating normally in duplex operate in the duplex mode mode The PCI board is not Mount the PCI board correctly installed yet the PCI board If the PCI board was not mounted there is no is installed incorrectly or the problem power is not supplied Check the condition of power unit Remount the PCI module Red In the process of configuring Wait for a while until the indication changes If or canceling the duplex the indication unchanged check the PCI board mode slot status using NEC ESMPRO Manager Although the PCI board is Make the slot of the board installed from NEC mounted it may be offline ESMPRO Manager online or not be working Mount the PCI board correctly System Upgrade 8 49 N8104 103 1000BASE T Adapter Consult your sales personnel for details when purchasing this hardware IMPORTANT Note the following about this product m It is advisable to add this product to such environment that each system is used for a different purpose ex system line maintenance monitoring and multiple accesses do not occur simultaneously m If there are multiple accesses the processing power and transmission speed may be somewhat affected m For LAN cable s connector use the RJ 45 connector which is compliant with IEC8877 standard Using a different connector may make it dif
67. are changed They are reflected at the next monitoring interval of monitoring service CPU Load Ratio of SNMP Service snmp exe While monitoring the server from NEC ESMPRO Manager the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service on the NEC ESMPRO Agent side may increase at every monitoring interval default 1 minute NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent exchange information through SNMP Service If the server status monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager is on default ON NEC ESMPRO Manager regularly issues a request to NEC ESMPRO Agent to get the current status of the server In response NEC ESMPRO Agent checks the status of the server As a result the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service increases temporarily If you have trouble of terminating a movie player application turn off the server status monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager or extend the monitoring interval Current Status of Temperature Voltage and Fan Sensors Some modes are equipped with temperature voltage fan sensors that do not have information on status current values rpm threshold etc Therefore if you view such a sensor on NEC ESMPRO Manager it may be displayed as follows m The status becomes Unknown grayed out on the data viewer m The current value or rpm becomes Unknown on data viewer m The status is grayed out on the Web component data viewer m The current value or rpm becomes blank on the Web component data viewer Even if the sensor is displayed like stated ab
68. bit 33 MHz PCI slots m Large memory of up to 6GB m Remote power on feature m USB interface High reliability m Memory monitoring feature 1 bit error correction 2 bit error detection Bus parity error detection Temperature monitoring Error notification Built in fan monitoring feature Internal voltage monitoring feature BIOS password feature Security feature security lock for front bezel Management Utilities m NEC ESMPRO m NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA Ready to use Quick cableless connection hard disk CPU module and PCI module hot swap supported Fault tolerant Feature m Redundant modules achieved within a system Higher hardware availability by isolation of failed module Various Features E Graphic accelerator CT69000 supported El Torito Bootable CD ROM no emulation mode format supported POWER switch mask Remote power on feature AC LINK feature Consoleless feature Self diagnosis m Power On Self Test POST m Test and Diagnosis T amp D Utility Maintainability m Off line Maintenance Utility Easy and Fine Setup m NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system setup utility m SETUP BIOS setup utility m Fast UTIL SCSI device utility General Description 2 3 The NEC Express5800 ft series achieves fault tolerant high availability in a space saving form factor by incorporating redundant hardware module pairs in a single chassis These modules work in synchronous tight lockstep while consta
69. bus to be viewed PCI Bridge Bus information Allows the bus information of a bridge on the PCI bus to be viewed m PCI Bridge Detailed information Allows the detailed information of a bridge on the PCI bus to be viewed Installing and Using Utilities 5 33 Monitoring SCSI Enclosure To monitor the SCSI enclosure see the SCSI enclosure tree To see the information on the SCSI enclosure tree select SCSI enclosure of the FTServer tree You can see the following information of the SCSI enclosure from the SCSI enclosure tree m General Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI enclosure to be viewed IMPORTANT You need to be aware that PCI modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other For details see Impact When Module Status Changes described above m Maintenance Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI adapter to be viewed or cleared See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for clearing the MTBF information on the SCSI enclosure Se j Sai j m Update Allows the firmware of the SCSI enclosure to be updated However this function is not supported in the current version 5 34 Installing and Using Utilities m Electronics General Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI enclosure electronics to be viewed m Electronics Maint
70. disabled the malfunction and disabled the module component module component Executable in the following module Executable in the following module state state this can be viewed on manager this can be viewed on manager screen screen Only the red LED is on and the event Broken indicating that MTBF is lower than the MTBF is lower than the threshold threshold is registered in the event log SCSI Same as above Same as above Electronics SCSI Slot Same as above Same as above Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Not support Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager Executable on local server by using ft server utility Perform the procedure below before replacement of a component 1 Select the target component in the FTServer tree 2 Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen play g p 3 Click the Clear button in the MTBF Clear of the target component The MTBF clearing result can be confirmed by State on the target component screen The result of the MTBF clearing operation is reported by the NEC Express5800 ft series as an alert 4 Start the component Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager Prans the Barg Ut tason to Berg re SCSI Ereionpe up prens tee Dung Doned inann i SE Crelonse dome Faas To of et ona Pres the IM TRE Cowi tamon ve CONT emus id Care bomen Taa of Maat a Penna Pens he D a
71. disk using Disk Management IMPORTANT If you import the disk used as a boot disk on another system it becomes impossible to boot from the disk 1 Insert the disk to import 2 Foreign Dynamic Disk is displayed on Disk Management In the figure on the right Disk 2 and Disk 3 are the inserted disks 3 Right click the disk to import and select Import Foreign Disks 4 In the Import Foregn Disks dialog box select the disk group to import and click OK C Computer Manageme ox 3 file Action View Window Help e omes Computer Management Local ih System Tools H E Event Viewer Ej Shared Folders ic ra Local Users and Groups S90EM C Mirror Dynamic NTFS zz Performance Logs and Alerts 3 Device Manager Storage ic Removable Storage I Disk Defragmenter Disk Management fa Services and Applications OEM C 6 01 GB NTFS Healthy System Disk 2 Dynamic Foreign ENDisk 3 Dynamic Foreign File Action View Window Help e melas Um Ga volume Layout Type Fie system amp BOEM C Mirror Dynamic NTFS Computer Management Local fh System Tools H E Event viewer Ej Shared Folders ic ra Local Users and Groups ic Performance Logs and Alerts 3 Device Manager amp Storage amp PDisk 1 Ea aeara aa Gynec OEM C T sated lai 34 18 GB 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB Disk
72. due to failures or damage resulted from installing such a board will be charged m Before adding or removing DIMMs power off the server and detach the CPU module m Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before installing or removing options CiMMe1 Jom 1 Group 1 DOMM 2 DOMM 3 Jom Group 2 DIMM ad DIMMs Jom zoup 3 DIMM 6 CPU module board Note the following to install or replace DIMM System Upgrade 8 17 m The DIMMs with the same number are linked among the groups When a DIMM is added to one group another identical DIMM should be installed to the socket with the same number in another group This rule is applied to the case of removal m The linked DIMMs should be of the same product with same performance DIMMs should be installed in sockets starting from the lowest socket number 8 18 System Upgrade Installing DIMM Follow the procedure below to install the DIMM Make sure to power off the server before starting installation except when replacing DIMM 1 oP eeN 11 Shutdown OS The system turns off automatically Disconnect power cord from outlet Remove the CPU module Check to be sure in which socket you are mounting the DIMM Remove the connector cover from the socket A DIMM connector cover is installed to the open socket When the levers on both ends of the connector are opened the DIMM connector cover is unlocked and y
73. e Duplex configuration e Broken off state e Shot e Firmware Update ieee The both green Complete LEDs are on when e Diagnostics when the module is the module is in the 2 in one of the following state Passed following states e Removed e Duplex e Broken e Shot e Firmware Update Complete e Diagnostics Passed PCI Module Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above SCSI Slot 3 Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support IMPORTANT PCI modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other You need to be aware of this for example when you replace a PCI module For details see Impact When Module Status Changes described above 5 46 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager Start 1 Select the target component in the FTServer tree 2 Check the current state with the Status display on the target component screen Click the Bring Up button in the Maintenance screen for the target component A certain time is required for the start The start result can be confirmed by State on the target component screen The result of the start operation is reported by the NEC Express5800 ft series as an alert Stop Perform the procedure below before replacing a component 1 Select the target component in the FTServer tree
74. fire Do not insert a wire or metal object Do not insert a wire or metal objects into a vent or disk drive slot There is a risk of an electric shock Do not use the equipment in an unsuitable place Do not install a server rack in an unsuitable environment Other systems also may be affected and the rack may fall over to cause a fire or injuries For details about installation environment and quake resistant engineering see the attached manual or contact your sales agent Do not install the equipment on a nonconforming rack Install the equipment on a 19 inch rack confirming to the EIA standard Do not use the equipment without a rack or install it on a nonconforming rack The equipment may not function properly and there is a risk of damage to physical assets or injuries For suitable racks contact your sales agent 1 8 Precautions for Use A CAUTION Prevent water or foreign objects from getting into the equipment Do not let water or foreign objects e g pins or paper clips enter the equipment There is a risk of a fire electric shock and breakdown When such things accidentally enter the equipment immediately turn off the power and unplug the cord Contact your sales agent instead of trying to disassemble it yourself gt gt Precautions for Use 1 9 Use of Power Supply and Power Cord WARNING Do not handle a power plug with a wet hand Do not plug unplug a power co
75. ft series Thus unlike other highly fault tolerant products special API or scripts are not necessary m Automatic mirroring NEC Express5800 ft series automatically maintains data as the current data m Automatic detection and notification of faults NEC Express5800 ft series detects and sorts out all events such as general status changes and faults and notifies Windows Event Log of these events m Transparent migration NEC Express5800 ft series constantly monitors events If trouble occurs on NEC Express5800 ft series server module it will transparently use a redundant module of the failed module This feature maintains data and user access without losing application service m Automatic reconfiguration When the failed module restarts after the trouble is corrected NEC Express5800 ft series will perform reconfiguration automatically and if necessary resynchronize the affected modules Reconfiguration can include CPU processing e g CPU memory server s operating system and related applications and system data stored on the hard disks In most cases NEC Express5800 ft series automatically restores redundancy of the server modules after recovery General Description 2 5 Local and remote management NEC Express5800 ft series uses NEC ESMPRO as a server management tool This tool uses a GUI that enables monitoring and setting of NEC Express5800 ft series NEC ESMPRO can be used both locally and remotely on work station P
76. in the back have two LEDs each e 100 10 LED LAN connector 2 1000 100 10 LED LAN connector 1 These LEDs show the transfer rate of the network that is being connected LED indications LAN connector 1 LAN connector 2 1000 100 10 100 10 Amber Operating as 1000BASE T Operating as 100BASE TX Off Operating as 100BASE TX or Operating as 10BASE T 10BASE T e LINK ACT LED The LINK ACT LED shows the status of a standard network port It is green if power is supplied to the main unit and hub and they are connected correctly LINK It blinks green while the network port sends or receives data ACT When the LED does not illuminate during LINK check the condition and connection of network cables If there is nothing wrong with the cables a defect is suspected in the network LAN controller In this case contact your sales agent 2 28 General Description BASIC OPERATION This section describes basic operation procedures of NEC Express5800 ft series Locking and Unlocking the Front Bezel The front bezel covers built in components of the server such as the POWER switch CD ROM drive and hard disks The tower model server has a door type bezel it can also be detached The rack mount model server has a cover like detachable bezel You need to open the front bezel when you access the POWER switch CD ROM drive or hard disk IMPORTANT m Without using the security key you cannot open or deta
77. is created successfully it will return normal Diagnostic of the CPU modules While diagnosing a stopped CPU module the CPU is no longer in the duplex mode and the CPU and the memory cannot be used However the status of CPU and DIMM displayed under CPU module in the FTServer tree on a Data Viewer becomes Online and the status color becomes green New settings in thresholds of monitoring interval and free space monitoring are not reflected New settings in thresholds of monitoring interval and free space monitoring are not reflected immediately after they are changed They are reflected at the next monitoring interval of monitoring service Fault time of a SCSI slot is not displayed correctly Inthe NEC Express5800 ft series with ft control software 3 0 Time of last fault in Maintenance under SCSI slot on a Data Viewer is not supported Therefore the time will not be displayed correctly The mirroring status of a hard disk drive mirrored by the Rapid Disk Resync function is not displayed correctly The Data Viewer s Mirror Disk tree of FTSever shows a pair of hard disk drives constructing mirroring as one mirror Therefore the status of a volume such as span volume and striping volume over Troubleshooting 7 45 multiple hard disk drives created by the RDR function may not be displayed correctly Use the RDR Utility for checking the state of mirrored hard disk drives created by th
78. of cleaning as well as lifetime of a tape cartridge to use see instructions included with the tape drive Maintenance 6 7 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server Select Tools System Diagnostics in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the server Test Items The following items are tested in system diagnostics E Memory m CPU cache memory E Hard disk used as a system IMPORTANT When executing the system diagnostics make sure to remove the LAN cable Executing the system diagnostics with the LAN cable connected the network may be influenced TIPS On checking the hard disk no data is written into the disk Startup and Exit of System Diagnosis Procedures to start the diagnostic program are as follows 1 Shutdown the OS and power off the server Then unplug the power cord 2 Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server 3 Plug the power cord and power on the server 4 Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to reboot the server The following menu appears when the server is started using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 5 Select Tools 6 8 Maintenance 8 9 10 11 Select System Diagnostics System bar Title bar The system diagnosis starts and will be completed in approximately three minutes an Test window CURSOR Select Window 3 P L gOut Q Quit gt Target scope When the diagnosis is completed the following appears o
79. power cords 9 Remove PCI Module 1 from NEC Express5800 ft series see page 8 29 Removing PCI Module 10 Reset the jumper switch setting Remove the clips from the jumper pins 3 4 and place them on the jumper pins 11 12 on the PCI Module 1 TIPS If you place it on other pins the server may malfunction 4 44 11 12 13 14 System Configuration Mount the PCI Module 1 again to the NEC Express5800 ft series see page 8 31 Installing PCI Module and plug the power cord to the AC inlet B for Group1 The POWER Switch LED will be turned on Likewise mount the PCI Module 2 to the NEC Express5800 ft series and plug the power cord to the AC inlet A for Group2 Shortly after you connect the both power cords the BMC status LED on PCI Module 2 will start to blink When Password clear is completed the BMC status LED will go off CHECK The BMC status LED blinks to show that synchronous processing is being performed between the two modules When this process is complete Password has also been cleared on PCI Module 2 TIPS m For the location of the AC inlet A the AC inlet B see NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS in Chapter 2 m For the location of the BMC status LED see NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS in Chapter 2 m For description of the BMC status LED see LEDs in Chapter 2 Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities This section d
80. previously set a password with the SETUP utility the password entry screen appears Enter the password Enter password Up to three password entries will be accepted If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive times the server halts You can no longer proceed Power off the server TIPS The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system configurations With the User password the system configurations you can view or change are limited 4 4 System Configuration Description of On Screen Items and Key Usage Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility Key functions are also listed at the bottom of the screen Setup item menu Indicates there are submenus Indicates the current menu Hain fidvanced Security System Harduare Boot Exit Item Specific Help Thermal Sensor Menu gt Wake On Events AC LINK Last Statel Waiting time for AC LINK 6 Error Log Initialization Enter gt Console Redirection Online help window FA Enter Parameter high lights upon selection menu Explanation of key function menu Cursor 4 Selects an item on the screen The highlighted item is currently selected Cursor lt gt Selects the Main Advanced Security System Hardware Boot or Exit menu and Changes the value parameter of the selected item When
81. s Guide handy for quick reference when necessary SAFETY INDICATIONS To use NEC Express5800 Series safely follow the instructions in this User s Guide This guide explains components that pose a danger types of dangers and actions taken to prevent them such components are labeled warning This guide and warning labels use WARNING and CAUTION to indicate a danger depending on the degree These terms are defined as follows A WARNING Indicates a danger that could lead to a death or serious injury A CAUTION Indicates a danger that could lead to a burn other injuries or damage to physical assets This guide uses the following three types of symbols to give indications and precautions against a danger They are defined as follows Indicates that there is a risk of danger Each image symbolizes a particular type of danger Attention Indicates what you must not do Each image symbolizes a particular type of prohibition Prohibited actions Indicates what you must do Each image symbolizes a particular type of action necessary to avoid a danger Mandatory actions evl gt Example Symbol to draw attention Term indicating a degree of danger A CAUTION High temperature Immediately after the power off system components such as hard disk are very hot Wait the server to cool down completely before adding removing some component Symbol indicating a prohibited Desc
82. solved by the above contact your sales agent CPUO offline Green Blink CPU module 1 PCI module logically isolated Start the PCI module by ft sever utility or dismount and remount that module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent CPUO removed Green Blink CPU module 1 PCI module detached Dismount and remount the PCI module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent CPUO Temp Alm 00 Amber Blink CPU module 1 Temperature alarm lower Check to see if dust is limit accumulated on the CPU0 Temp Alm 02 Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal temperature alarm internal fans Check also if lower limit the fan cables are CPUO Temp Alm 07 Amber Blink CPU module 1 Temperature alarm upper connected securely If not limit solved by the above CPUO Temp Alm 09 Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal temperature alarm contact your Sales agent upper limit CPUO VecpAlm 00 Amber Blink CPU module 1 CPU operating voltage alarm Contact your sales agent lower limit VCCP CPUO VcecpAlm 02 Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal CPU operating voltage alarm lower limit VCCP CPUO VecpAlm 07 Amber Blink CPU module 1 CPU operating voltage alarm upper limit VCCP CPUO VecpAlm 09 Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal CPU operating voltage alarm upper limit VCCP CPUO Vtt Alm 00 Amber Blink CPU module 1 1 25 V power voltage alarm lower limit CPUO Vtt Alm 02 Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 1 25 V power volta
83. starts and duplex mode is The PCI module 1 established the indications operates in simplex will return to normal mode Off Off Off Off Only the PCI module 2 Check if the power cord is is on standby AC connected correctly power is supplied Check the condition of through the cord but breaker and UPS the system has not Check if the power unit is been powered on yet connected correctly AC power is not Remount the PCI module 1 supplied to the PCI If the problem persists module 1 contact your sales agent Off Off Green Off The PCI module 2 is Wait for the OS to start After performing diagnosis the OS starts check the Diag status LEDs and then take the AC power is not appropriate actions supplied to the PCI If the problem persists module 1 contact your sales agent 2 24 General Description CPU Module Status LEDs 1 2 The CPU module has two LEDs Combined the two LEDs show the status of CPU modules See NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS page 2 7 for the locations of LEDs 1 2 CPU 1 CPU 2 Status Status Status Status Description Action LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 Off Green Off Green The CPU module operates normally in duplex mode Off Amber Red Off The CPU module 2 is Start the CPU module 2 from ft on standby The CPU server utility See pages 3 42 module 2 has not been through 3 43 powered on yet Remount the CPU module 2 The CPU module 1
84. system environment If you find something unclear stop using them and contact your sales agent This page is intentionally left blank CONTENTS PREFACE 3 pisvigeiosa anna ia ea heise eae eal ee a T a i ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE oi sissiscsacessicies O EE E ist REE AEE E E ATT R SEA ETE Sa ii Chapter 1 Precautions for USC sccccseeceeseeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeeenseeeeeseseseaeseneenenseeenes 1 1 WARNING LABELS i ccuiivscuncasessretstuceuttnet a ar tured Saleh A E e 1 2 Tower MOG assesses cid ste n n A R E E E R R 1 2 Rack mount Models sss scvetocoscintisedivauenss r a E E A A A E qunteesbaiees 1 4 PCU CRU Mod le Sirini an aa ar R die A E A 1 6 PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY aroi a aa a a e teveuaat 1 7 Generals an s E n A ENE A E R E A R E E A 1 7 Use of Power Supply and Power Cord cccesssssscsesssceeseeceecneeeecaeeeessecaeeseeneseecsaseeeeaesaeeeeens 1 9 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection sessssesssessssseserssesersresteeeserseseeeesseseesee 1 10 Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices 0 0 0 ee ee eeceeecseeeececseesecneeeceseeeesaecaeesecneeeeenaeeees 1 12 During Operation ah sctsiese ciao ino a ape tiie Suge Scher ape E AEE E E 1 13 Rack mount Model sisser ae eben Apresse ae Ee ate EE E e a ai 1 14 F t Proper Operation serere nrn ea E E E AE AEE 1 15 TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY werscichestharisssssttrlsinci aioe abso a E A E tases 1 17 DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES osseseeeeseeeiee
85. the component is operating stop the component 2 Click the Firmware Update button in the Update screen for the target component Choose update method 3 Select the update method in the Firmware Copy fimware from Online module to Offine one Update dialog box and click the Run 9 g button Enter the file location of the new firmware 4 Start the module Browse Cancel Even if you do not have the image data of firmware for update the firmware can be copied from the other module By starting the module the firmware will be updated automatically However when the Enable automatic firmware update property is disabled follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 Start the system using the module of the firmware copy source See the current status by the Status indication on the target component screen of the copy destination and confirm that it is stopped 2 On the Update screen of the target component click Firmware update 3 When a firmware updating dialog appears check Copy firmware from Online module to Offline one and execute it Firmware is updated by copying the firmware on the online side to the offline side 4 Start the stopped module 5 58 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in ft server utility 1 Save the image data of the update firmware in a desired directory of the NEC Express5800 ft series Save the image data in some manner Write down the path t
86. the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Monitoring Configuration Item Specific Help Option ROM Scan Monitoring Disabled Option ROM Scan Option ROM Monitoring 5 Monitoring cature Boot Monitoring Enabled Boot Monitoring Time out Period 8 POST Pause Monitoring Enabled POST Pause Monitoring Time out 3 t Select Item Change Valges F9 Setup Defaults lt gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save Changes amp Exit Displayed only when Enabled is selected for Option ROM Scan Monitoring Boot Monitoring or POST Pause Monitoring See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Option ROM Disabled Enable or disable the Option ROM scan monitoring Scan Monitoring Enabled feature Option ROM 1 5 20 Specify the Option ROM monitoring time out Monitoring period This option is displayed only when Time out Enabled is selected for Option ROM Scan Monitoring Boot Monitoring Disabled Enable or disable the boot monitoring feature This Enabled function is unique to NEC Express5800 ft series detects errors until the OS boots up and immediately reboots the OS upon detection of an error For details see Behavior at Occurrence of Error in Chapter 2 Enable this function if NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed on the OS Disable this function if NEC ESMPRO Agent is not installed or when you install th
87. the reset valid or invalid in Disabled Disabled SCSI buses SCSI Bus Reset 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 Leave this item as factory set Delay 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 SCSI Bus Auto Auto Set the termination resistance of Termination High only High only SCSI bus Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Factory set Autoconfigure SCSI Device If you put the cursor on Autoconfigure SCSI Device with keyboard cursors J and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter the screen for setting the information on the device connected to the host adapter appears The parameters of the setting items and their factory settings are the same as those shown in the table for SCSI Device Settings IMPORTANT m The settings can be made for each SCSI bus and SCSI ID Check the SCSI ID of the target device before changing the settings m The factory settings are the same for both SCSI bus 0 and SCSI bus 1 m The following items can be changed by setting Adapter Configuration in Host Adapter Settings to Manual Enable Device Enable LUNs Negotiate Wide Negotiate Sync Tagged Queuing Sync Offset Sync Period Exec Throttle System Configuration 4 35 Selectable Boot Settings If you put the cursor on Selectable Boot Settings with keyboard cursors and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter
88. 0 1 5v Al m Amber Blink CPU module 1 1 5 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent 07 upper limit CPUO 1 5v Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal1 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU0 2 5vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 2 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPUO 2 5vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPUQ 2 5vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPUO 2 5vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPUO 2 5VcAl m Amber Blink CPU module 1 2 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU0 2 5VcAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPUO 2 5VcAl m Amber Blink CPU module 1 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU0 2 5VcAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU0 3 3vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU0 3 3vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU0 3 3vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPUO 3 3vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU0 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPUO 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower li
89. 0 00000000 00000002 00000000 In the case where the detailed 00000000 00000000 00000000 data of the above event 00000000 f0030004 properties is represented in words the error represents no trouble if the value from 0034 is f0030004 or f0030015 TIPS m POWER LED is on to indicate that it is the primary module m The module that you plug in first will be the primary module see Chapter 3 8 6 System Upgrade You can install hard disks each of which is about 25 4 mm 1 inch in thickness to the three slots of each module Each slot has a label describing the slot number Disks of the same slot number are mirrored between the groups The figure below shows the groups and mirroring slots Slots 1 Slots 2 Slots 3 N Arep T S ezan B Group 1 Group 2 Slots used in mirroring Empty slots in the 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay contain dummy trays The dummy trays are inserted to improve the cooling effect within the device Always insert the dummy trays in the slots in which hard disks are not installed Attach an HDD ID label indicating the slot number of installed hard disk to the handle of the hard disk System Upgrade 8 7 Installing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Follow the procedure below to install the hard disk A hard disk may be installed in another slot in the same procedure IMPORTANT m Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade be
90. 0532KC a omm BOM ID RANSBFUAVAE g DIMM ID 0 0 Serial Number o DIMM ID 0 1 Thermal Reference Unknown Em DIMM ID 0 2 m DIMM ID 0 3 OEM EEPROM Part Unknown fm DIMM ID 0 4 s information Em DIMM ID 0 5 peed a ea w E CPL Module ID 2 High Voltage Tolerance Omv Low Voltage Tolerance OmV F ff PCI Module JE SCSI Enclosure a Mirror Disk Level2 Cache Information Size oKB SRAM Components o Votage Omv High Voltage Tolerance OmV Low Voltage Tolerance OmV Revision o Stat Online i For Help press F1 B Normal warning MMM Abnormal 7 Use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager to check the failed CPU Remove the CPU module Replace the CPU Install the CPU module The installed CPU module will start automatically System Upgrade 8 27 PCI MODULE Three PCI boards can be installed to the PCI module Up to two PCI boards can be added to each PCI module therefore the server can accommodate four additional PCI boards at a maximum one video board has already been installed to each PCI module in standard configuration Remove the PCI module when adding or replacing the PCI board The figures used in this section show the rack mount model The orientation is the only difference from the tower model IMPORTANT m Ask your sales agent to replace the PCI module and its components m Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before sta
91. 2 lower limit Cor0 5 0vsAlm Amber Blink PCI module 1 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Cor0 5 0vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal5 V power voltage alarm 09 upper limit Cor0 12vAl m 00 Amber Blink PCI module 1 12 V power voltage alarm lower limit Cor0 12vAl m02 f Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm lower limit Cor0 12vAl m 07 Amber Blink PCI module 1 12 V power voltage alarm upper limit Cor0 12vAlm09 Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage Contact your sales agent alarm upper limit T r0 Bus PERR Green Blink PCI module 1 PCI bus parity error a r0 Bus SERR Green Blink PCI module 1 Fatal PCI bus error Cor0 CLK Alm 00 Amber Blink CLOCK board CI ock alarm lower limit Cor0 CLK Alm 02 f Amber Lit CLOCKboard Fatal Clock alarm lower limit Cor0 CLK Alm 07 Amber Blink CLOCK board CI ock alarm upper limit Cor0 CLK Alm 09 fAmber Lit CLOCK board Fatal Clock alarm upper limit Cord FAN Alm 01 Amber Blink PCI module 1 Cooling fan1 alarm Check to see if dust is Cor0 FAN Alm 02 Amber Blink PCI module 1 Cooling fan2 alarm accumulated on the Cor0 FAN Al m 03 Amber Blink PCI module 1 Cooling fan3 alarm internal fans Check also if Cor0 FAN Alm 04 Amber Blink PCI module 1 Cooling fan4 alarm the fan cables are connected securely If not Cor0 FAN Alm 05 Amber Blink PCI module 1 Cooling fan5 alarm solved by the above contact
92. 8 1 249 Server 10 Select the Action at Remote Console Connect command from the popup menu displayed by right clicking the server window to display the Action at Remote Console Connect dialog box Then select Go MWA mode 11 Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the drive of the computer to be managed and insert floppy disk storing the configuration information CSL_LESS CFG into the FDD drive 12 Hook up the management PC to LAN 13 Power off and on the main unit to reboot the system After one reboot the main menu will appear on the management PC s screen on which you can perform hardware setup and run utilities TIPS If the configuration information CSL_LESS CFG in the FD has already been loaded the main menu will appear without a reboot 14 When the main menu appears on the management PC s screen eject the floppy disk 15 Ifyou use other tools exit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and power off on the main unit IMPORTANT After completing the procedure for remote console connection uncheck Reset of Activate in Property dialog box 5 76 Installing and Using Utilities Connect from the Management PC Directly Linked through Serial port B On the management PC that is linked directly to Serial port B of the main unit perform the steps below 1 Start the management PC where NEC MWA is installed From the Start menu select Program NEC MWA gt MWA When NEC MWA starts the initial scr
93. 800 Series Master Control Menu a Cast WC Capman NEC 5 4 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu is used for the setup of hardware and the setup and installation of OS Start Start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu following the procedure below 1 2 3 Turn on the powers of peripherals and the power of the server in this order Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server After the CD ROM is inserted reset the system by pressing Ctrl Alt Delete or turn off the power and then on again to restart the server The system is activated from the CD ROM to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER After the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is started the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu shown below appears Setup Performs various automatic setup operations including settings of internal parameters and states of hardware and installations of Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition and several utilities Select this setup procedure if hard disks are used in a partition different from that defined at the purchase or if OS is reinstalled Tools Starts each of the utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually to allow the operator to provide setup Enables the setup without influence of installed OS Help Describes the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER We recommend you to read through the help before the setup Exit The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER termination scre
94. 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 2 Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 3 40 Windows Setup and Operation CHECK THE DUPLICATING OPERATION OF MODULES This section describes how to check if the system runs properly after system installation or reinstallation Evaluate Startup and Stop of PCI Modules This section describes how to confirm the continuous system operation by failover after stopping the primary PCI module 1 Check which is the primary PCI module The PCI module with the POWER switch illuminated is the primary module 2 Check whether the PCI modules are duplicated To check if the PCI modules are duplicated see the PCI modules status LEDs Rack mount model Indications of the status LEDs when PCI modules are duplicated LED Primary Secondary 1 BMC status LED Green 2 PCI module status LED1 3 PCI module status LED2 Green Green 4 DISK ACCESS LED Green or off Green or off DISK LED Green Green The numbers in the table correspond to the numbers in the above figure The DISK ACCESS LED 4 lights when the hard disk drive is accessed Windows Setup and Operation 3 41 Stop the operation of a PCI module using the ft server utility Select Start All Programs NEC ESMPRO Agent ft server utility to start the ft server utility Then from the ft server utility select PCI Module then the prima
95. Abstraction Laver Version 2 1 0 0 Build 6434 2 1 int2 vaig Findwhat Olas Find J Search selected category only J Search category names only Export Print Ctrl P Exit 3 Enter the name of the target file in the File name box 4 Click Save Collection of Diagnostic Information by Dr Watson Collect diagnostic information related to application errors by using Dr Watson You can designate any destination to save diagnostic information For details see help information Click Start Run execute drwtsn32 exe and click Help in the Dr Watson for Windows dialog box 7 48 Troubleshooting COLLECTION OF THE MEMORY DUMP If a failure occurs the memory data should be dumped to acquire the required information If you stored the dump data in a DAT label it so as to indicate the software e g NTBackup you used for storing it You may save the diagnosis data to a desired destination IMPORTANT m Consult with your sales agent before dumping the memory Executing memory dumping while the server is in the normal operation may affect the system operation m Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual memory Ignore this message and proceed Restarting the system again may result in dumping improper data Preparing for Memory Dump Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart In such
96. Amber Blink CPU module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 5 Ovs Al m00 lower limit CPU2 Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 5 OvsAl m02 lower limit CPU2 Amber Blink CPU module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 5 0vs Al m07 upper limit CPU2 Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 5 Ovs Al m09 upper limit CPU2 broken Green Blink CPU module 2 CPU module breakdown CPU2 FAN Alm 01 Amber Blink CPU module 2 Cooling fan 1 alarm Check to see if dust is CPU2 FAN Al m 03 Amber Blink CPU module 2 Cooling fan 2 alarm accumulated on the CPU2 FAN Alm 04 Amber Blink CPU module 2 Cooling fan 3 alarm internal fans Check also if the fan cables are connected securely If not solved by the above contact your sales agent CPU2 offline Green Blink CPU module 2 The CPU module has been Start the PCI module by logically disconnected ft sever utility or dismount and remount that module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent 7 12 Troubleshooting Indication STATUS LED cir Explanation Procedure CPU2 removed Green Blink CPU module 2 The CPU module has come Dismount and remount off the PCI module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent CPU2 Temp Alm Amber Blink CPU module 2 Temperature alarm lower Chec
97. Blink CPU module 2 2 5 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales 00 lower limit agent CPU2 2 5VcAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU2 2 5VcAl m Amber Blink CPU module 2 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 2 5VcAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 3 3vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU2 3 3vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU2 3 3vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 3 3vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU2 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 3 3 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU2 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 5 0vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU2 5 0vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 02 lower limit CPU2 5 0vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 0 upper limit CPU2 5 0vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 03 upper limit CPU2
98. Bus 1D 10 5 0 N server utility SCSI bus ts meset PCI Module SCSI Adapter SCSI Bus 5 64 Installing and Using Utilities Setup of Preventive Disk Maintenance In this section the preventive disk maintenance S M A R T is configured If the preventive disk maintenance S M A R T is enabled by checking Enable on the setting screen the disk fault monitoring function is enabled to detect possible disk faults Disabling the preventive disk maintenance disables the disk fault monitoring function The table below shows the potential cases in which the setup of the preventive disk maintenance is modified IMPORTANT The disk failure prediction S M A R T feature is not supported in this server Use ft server utility to disable this feature When a disk is replaced be sure to change the setting described below Contact your maintenance personnel for changing the setup of the preventive disk maintenance in any case other than above Component Setup of preventive disk maintenance S M A R T Remote Local SCSI disk Executable if the system is operating Use this function at disk replacement Change the setting to Disable before removing disk Insert a new disk and after termination of disk replacement change the setting to Enable Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support
99. CI module newly inserted is automatically started to be operable If this property is disabled the module is not started automatically The initial setup value is Enable IMPORTANT In the NEC Express5800 ft series with ft control software 3 0 or later this property must be Enable Never specify Disable The system operation can be set on FTServer tree General screen of the ft server utility The table below shows the potential cases in which the system operation setup is changed Contact your maintenance personnel for the change of the system operation setup Setting change will take effect after system reboot However the utility does not indicate that reboot is required Component Quick dump Auto firmware update Auto module start Remote Local Remote Local Remote _ Local Whole Executable if Executable if the Executable if the system the system is system is system is operating operating operating When dump is When firmware is When firmware is acquired by updated manually updated manually using the dump at insertion of at insertion of new function new CPU module CPU PCI module normally installed in OS at occurrence of system fault Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support 5 66 Installing and Using Utilities Configure the system settings using the ft ser
100. CI module status LED1 Red 3 PCI module status LED2 Amber 4 DISK ACCESS LED Amber DISK LED Amber The primary and secondary modules after failover Restart the PCI module From the ft server utility click Up of Bring Up Bring Down to the PCI module which was stopped in the step 3 and the PCI module will be started Once the PCI module is started PCI module diagnosis mirror volume duplication and PCI module duplication are performed 3 42 Windows Setup and Operation IMPORTANT If BrightStor ARCserve 2000 or Backup Exec is installed the tape will not be recognized due to the failover of the PCI module Thus be sure to stop the services before starting the PCI module 1 Start Services from Administrative Tools of Control Panel 2 Select a service of backup software 3 Choose Stop from the Action menu 4 Repeat 2 and 3 for all services of the backup software The PCI modules status LEDs changes as shown below Indications of the status LEDs Immediately after the PCI module startup until the completion of diagnosis LED Secondary Primary 1 BMC status LED Green 2 PCI module status LED1 Red 3 PCI module status LED2 Green Amber 4 DISK ACCESS LED Amber DISK LED Green Amber When duplication of disks is started after the completion of PCI module diagnosis The status of LEDs differ depending on the method of disk duplication
101. CPU module 2 CPU 1 temperature alarm connected securely If 07 upper limit not solved by the above CPU20 TempAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal CPU 1 temperature contact your sales 09 alarm upper limit agent CPU21 TempAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 CPU 2 temperature alarm 00 lower limit CPU2I TempATm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal CPU 2 temperature 02 alarm lower limit CPU21 TempAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 CPU 2 temperature alarm 07 upper limit CPU21 TempAlm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal CPU 2 temperature 09 alarm upper limit D DUMP Request Off DUMP switch request Contact your sales agent a FRB Processing Off During POST execution or OS The server is operating start processing normally Troubleshooting 7 13 er STATUS LED Suspected Explanation Procedure Indication _ Color State module P M emory U Err 01 Green f Blink CPU module 1 DIMM 1 2 bit error The DIMM must be emory U Err 02 Green Blink CPU module 1 DIMM 2 2 bit error replaced Contact a emor y U Err 03 Green Blink CPU module 1 DIMM 3 2 bit error maintenance service emory U Err 04 Green Blink CPU module 1 DIMM 4 2 bit error ene emory U Err 05 Green Blink CPU module 1 DIMM 5 2 bit error emory U Err 06 Green Blink CPU module 1 DIMM 6 2 bit error emory U Err 21 Green Blink CPU module 2 DIMM 1 2 bit error
102. Console Redirection is set this option is unconditionally set to Enabled RomPilot Support Disabled Enabled Enable or disable the RomPilot the remote console and remote drive features during OS start up If this option is set to Enabled Boot time Diagnostic Screen is unconditionally set to Enabled Post Error Pause Enabled Disabled Specify whether to stop POST at the end of POST when an error occurs during POST Factory set TIPS RomPilot is a BIOS feature for communications with the NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA To use the NEC MWA for management of the server select Enabled for RomPilot Support Use of the RomPilot features requires setups for the NEC MWA 4 12 System Configuration Processor Information Select Processor Information on the Advanced menu to display the following screen See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Processor 1 Type Indicates processor type installed on Processor 2 Type Processor 1 or Processor 2 view only Factory set System Configuration 4 13 Memory Information Select Memory Information on the Advanced menu to display the following screen See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting DIMM 1 6 Size Indicates the size of memory insta
103. Cooling fan2 alarm accumulated on the Corl FAN Alm 03 Amber Blink PCI module 2 Cooling fan3 alarm internal fans Check also if Corl FAN Alm 04 Amber Blink PCI module 2 Cooling fan4 alarm the fan cables are Corl FAN Alm 05 Amber Blink PCI module 2 Cooling fan5 alarm Ce eee solved by the above contact your sales agent Corl offline Green Blink PCI module 2 PCI module logically isolated Start the PCI module by ft sever utility or dismount and remount that module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent Corl removed Green Blink PCI module 2 PCI module detached Dismount and remount the PCI module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent Corl Temp Alm Amber Blink PCI module 2 Temperature alarm lower Check to see if dust is 00 limit accumulated on the Corl Temp Alm Amber Lit PCl module 2 Fatal temperature alarm internal fans Check also if 02 lower limit the fan cables are Corl Temp Alm Amber Blink PCI module 2 Temperature alarm upper COnnected securely If not 07 limit solved by the above Corl Temp Alm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal temperature alarm contact your sales agent 09 upper limit CPU TERR 00 Green Blink CPU module 1 CPU 1 internal error Contact your sales agent CPU TERR 01 Green Blink CPU module 1 CPU 2 internal error CPU TERR 20 Green Blink CPU module 2 CPU 1 internal error CPU TERR 21 Green Blink CPU module 2 CPU 2 internal error CPU T
104. Cs or server PCs Event notification function When trouble or other events are detected on NEC Express5800 ft series they will be notified to Windows Event Log and saved Therefore you can view the log items locally or remotely by a usual Windows procedure Since an NEC Express5800 ft series events use unique IDs they are easy to distinguish In service repairing You can repair or replace a failed module even if NEC Express5800 ft series is operating Partition structure On this product the first logical drive will be in the following state when the setup by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is complete Partition for operating system The size varies depending on the specification at setup CHECK The partition for operating system is not mirrored at the time of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER setup completion Mirror the partition separately Windows OS and media The Windows OS media used on NEC Express5800 ft series are not specifically processed for it The standard operating methods of Windows are same as general 2 6 General Description HOW THE OPERATING SYSTEM SEES THE CPU MODULES On NEC Express5800 ft series the CPU modules are redundantly configured but only the processors installed on the primary side are shown How CPU modules appear on Device Manager Device Manager shows as many CPUs as the number of physical CPUs E ox SS od File Action View Help File Action view Help 7 gt 5 74 92 a e
105. D mirroring may not be completed properly 1 Click Start All Programs RDR RDR Utility and start the RDR Utility 2 Remove the failed HDD referring to How to Locate Failed Disks in this chapter IMPORTANT Record the slot number to replace the HDD 3 Insert anew HDD to the same slot IMPORTANT The HDD to insert to the slot must be new or physically formatted and have the same capacity as the HDD inserted to the corresponding slot Be sure to record the number of the slot where the new HDD is inserted 4 The RDR setting will be automatically made to the inserted HDD Confirm the Disk LED in the corresponding slot changes as shown below Transition of the Disk LED Replaced HDD Green gt Amber gt Green The HDD in the corresponding slot Amber gt Green Windows Setup and Operation 3 31 1 If the HDD has no partition volume the LED remains illuminating green The Op State State status of both HDDs shown in the RDR Utility changes to Duplex 5 After the Disk LED of both HDDs are illuminated green and the Op State State status changes to Duplex right click the HDD inserted in the step 3 in the RDR Utility and execute the Resynchronize This Disk command IMPORTANT Be sure to execute the command to the HDD inserted in step 3 because it may cause the loss of the data in the disk when you execute the command to the other disk See the figure b
106. DER Top Menu for details Booting starting the server from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the consoleless state 7 bi If the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is started from the CD ROM drive in the server with the keyboard mouse and or display unit not connected to the server the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Tools Menu shown on the right appears on the screen of the management computer PC connected to the server through LAN or COM serial port Installing and Using Utilities 5 3 Then operate the server remotely from the management PC by using the items in the menu IMPORTANT m Don t use this CD ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800 ft series with which it is packaged including other NEC Express5800 models Otherwise a breakdown may result m To use the consoleless feature make sure that keyboard is not connected to the server When a keyboard is connected the consoleless feature is disabled because the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console The menu will not be displayed on the management PC See Consoleless Menu described later for details m Inserting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM after Windows startup The Master Control Menu see figure below starts automatically after you place the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER in the CD ROM drive A dialog box called Master Control Menu will appear For this dialog see Master Control Menu described later NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5
107. ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 1 Coexistence with the Oracle products The installation of the Oracle products may change Startup Type of SNMP Service into Manual If so change the setting back to Automatic and set up correctly according to the description of the Oracle product Change of SNMP Community If the security setting of the SNMP Service of a system where the NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed is changed from the default public to a community name change the community settings of the NEC ESMPRO Agent too Double click the NEC ESMPRO Agent icon in Control Panel 2 Select a desired community name from the SNMP Community list box in SNMP Setting of the General sheet The community names to recetve SNMP packets from are listed in the SNMP Community list box 3 Click the OK button to terminate the operation Installing and Using Utilities 5 23 Disk Maintenance While NEC ESMPRO Agent is Running The following works to disks hard disk drive or magneto optical are not allowed while NEC ESMPRO Agent is running To format or delete a partition by Disk Administrator or by other means To request programmatically to remove media from removable disks such as MO Zip and PD Connect the machine using Web UI Click the Maintenance Click the Terminal Service Log on as an administrator Select the Start Settings Control Panel Open the Service Select a service named ESMCommonSe
108. Even in such cases failed disks can be 16 94 GB 4 01 GB NTFS Online Healthy System recovered by following the steps below ZDisk 2 Dynamic New olume F 34 18 GB 8 00 GB NTFS Online Failed Redundanc 3 Remove the hard disks from Slot 2 of 4 gt E Unallocated BB Mirrored volume Group 1 and Slot 3 of Group 2 3 26 Windows Setup and Operation 4 Right click a volume that has and remove mirror 5 After checking to see the Missing disk is selected click Remove mirror At Drive F Mirror and Failed Redundant will change to Simple and Healthy 6 Right click a disk with x and select Remove Disk computer Management SJ File Action view window Help e Ame Computer Management Loca volume Layout Type File System Efi System Tools GANew Volume E Mirror Dynamic NTFS Failed Ri Event Viewer Mirror Nunamie NTRS Failed Ri Shared Folders E Local Users and Groups E Performance Logs and Alerts SEM C Qpen Explore Device Manager B f Storage Break Mirrored Volumen Ej Removable Storage Srne Later ae Disk Defragmenter Eomaia Disk Management 2 Ee Services and Applications Repair volumer Reactivate Volume Delete Volume Properties Help 8 00 GB NTFS Failed Redundancy 4 gt BB Unallocated i Mirrored volume 26 18 GB Unallocated i 2x Removi
109. From TUNE 3038 mgr_TUNE 3038 T Do not display a further notification message General SNMP Report Status E3 STRATUS_MSG_STATE_REMOVED ke AlertYiewer File Edit View Tools Help From TUNE 3038 mar_TUNE 3038 Address 140 0 0 38 Slta x S aj Received Tuesday July 03 2001 03 22 PM Generated Tuesday July 03 2001 03 22 PM your time z ail Alert generation time Tuesday July 03 2001 03 22 PM t 09 00 Device 1 is now REMOVED_FROM_SERVICE Severity fam Component fan z D ak fo ae It i information Minor Wi major 7A 3 Items 2 Unread Collective Management of Distributed Servers The excellent GUI provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager allows servers on a network to be managed collectively The management screen is designed in the Explorer format to indicate the components in a server hierarchically for effective server management NEC ESMPRO Manager manages servers by using the following three types of GUIs a Operation Window S Operation Window 2nd_Development_Division comm Elo Edt View Tools Orion top The operation window is used to create the e elele xia 21 aaa map of servers connected to network to Sma manage them The map can be multi layered depending on the installation areas organizations and objects ai Branch aii Sen_Fanciees lak New_York la Mom ai APAN te ec NetWereServer Installing and Using Utiliti
110. ID 0 1 fo orvacor2 Znas m DImMMcD 0 3 Ea DIMM ID 074 IDPROM update function is not DIMMcID 0 5 supported dule ID 2 1 o 0 460943 o E CPI E CI Mor wE scsi Enclosure E Mirror Disk Jump Switch Brees the Hump Switch button to switch ee For Help press F1 O Normal __ Warning INN Abnormal Update screen of CPU module CPU Module Update 5 Select Specify the file path to update enter the directory in which the updated firmware specified in the Wiima HEI input box in step 1 is saved and click the Execute Select a method for updating button C Copy online BIOS image to Offline es Perform the firmware update a The update result can be confirmed by the state on the M target component screen indication of Firmware m Carcel Hoo update completed The result of the update processing is reported by the NEC Express5800 ft series as an alert 6 After the BIOS for a single CPU module is completed click the Jump Switch button The module completely updated is started and the active module is stopped Installing and Using Utilities 5 57 7 Start the other module stopped Starting the module causes the firmware to be updated automatically However if the Enable automatic firmware update property is invalid update the module in the procedure as follows 1 Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen If
111. IMM e Replace the CPU module board 0235 Multiple bit ECC error DIMM is faulty e Replace DIMM e Replace the CPU module board 0250 System battery is dead Replace and run SETUP NvRAM battery is dead Replace the PCI module board 0251 System CMOS checksum bad Default configuration used NvRAM is faulty e Re configure using the Setup menu e Replace the PCI module board 0252 Password checksum bad Password cleared NvRAM is faulty e Re set the password in the Setup menu e Replace the PCI module board 0260 System timer error PCI module board is faulty Replace the PCI module board 0270 Real time clock error RTC is faulty Replace the PCI module board 0271 Check date and time setting Date and time of RTC are incorrectly set e Set the correct date and time in Setup menu e Replace the PCI module board 0280 Previous boot incomplete Default configuration used Configuration error in Setup menu Check configuration in Setup menu 02B0 Diskette drive A error Floppy drive A is faulty Replace the floppy disk drive A 02B2 Incorrect Drive A type run SETUP Configuration error in Setup menu Specify the correct drive type in Setup menu 02D0 System cache error Cache disabled e CPU is faulty e CPU module board is faulty e Replace the CPU e Replace the CPU module board 0B1B PCI System Error on Bus Device
112. If an Ethernet adapter is not used not connected to cable set it to Disable in Network Connections from Control Panel If an Ethernet adapter you are about to disable has dual LAN settings AFT function remove the dual LAN settings before disable it Monitoring in Sleep State NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot monitor the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine in the sleep state system standby or system halt state While NEC ESMPRO Manager monitors server shutdown the relevant NEC ESMPRO Agent machine may be entered into the sleep state If so the report server access disabled is issued and the status color of the server icon becomes gray This cannot indicate whether the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine is shut down or entered into the sleep state Keep these in mind when operating the system where systems to be monitored may enter the sleep state Printer Information s Available Time When you add a new printer install its driver and make its settings if you do not make settings for the available time from Add Printer Wizard the printer s available time From and To in Printers and Faxes are 00 00 on the other hand Manager s time are 9 00 To display them properly make the settings of printer from Printers and Faxes The procedures are as follows 1 Start Printers and Faxes and open the printer properties you want to make settings for Select the Printers and Faxes right click and select Properties 2 Select the Advanced
113. Inc a Compaq SCSI Tape Adapter Unknown Manufacturer SF This driver is digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important 6 Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the Ear xi CDROM dive and click Browse spect ila aaa man drive WINNT DRIVERS QL2300 folder in the Copy manufacture s files from column and then click OK Copy manufacturer s files from Q AWINNT DRIVERS SOL23005 kd 7 Select Qlogic QLA23xx PCI Fibre C Hardwarc ag a Adapter on model list and then click Neri device driver you want to install for this hardware ey Select the manufacturer and model of your hardware device and then click Next If you have a disk that contains the driver you want to install click Have Disk Have Disk Eh This driver is digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important System Upgrade 8 45 Update Driver Warning E xi Installing this device driver is not recommended because Windows cannot verify that it is compatible with your hardware If the driver is not compatible your hardware will not work correctly and your computer might become unstable or stop working completely Do you want to continue installing this driver 8 A warning message tells that you are about to update a driver Click Yes to continue The driver will be installed Please wait while the wizard installs the software om During the processing the mouse cursor may not yy be mov
114. LED Replaced HDD Green gt Green The HDD in the corresponding slot Amber gt Green Op State State and Op State Reason of the HDDs and the RDR Virtual Disk viewed from the RDR Utility Op State State Op State Reason Replaced HDD Duplex None The HDD in the corresponding Duplex None slot RDR Virtual Disk Duplex None Windows Setup and Operation 3 33 CHANGE DRIVE LETTER To add change or delete drive letters follow the steps below Before making any changes thoroughly read the NEC Express5800 ft series specific precautions and general precautions for Windows Select Start Control Panel Administrative Tools and open Computer Management In the console tree of Computer Management click Disk Management Right click a target partition logical drive or volume and click Change Drive Letter and Paths Perform one of the following To assign a drive letter click Add a drive letter to use then OK To change a drive letter click the drive letter to change Change a drive letter to use then OK To delete a drive letter click the drive letter to delete then Remove D NS IMPORTANT lt NEC Express5800 ft series specific precautions gt One CD ROM drive for each PCI module total of two CD ROM drives is installed in NEC Express5800 ft series If those CD ROM drives N codes are different the drive letter assig
115. LED of PCI Module 2 will start to blink When the BMC status LED goes off the clear information of the PCI Module 1 is reflected to the PCI Module 2 CHECK The BMC status LED blinks to show that synchronous processing is being performed between the two modules When this process is complete CMOS has also been cleared on PCI Module 2 TIPS m For the location of the AC inlet A the AC inlet B see NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS in Chapter 2 m For the location of the BMC status LED see NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS in Chapter 2 m For description of the BMC status LED see LEDs in Chapter 2 System Configuration 4 43 How to Clear Passwords 1 Power off NEC Express5800 ft series and unplug the both power cords 2 Remove the both PCI modules 1 and 2 from the NEC Express5800 ft series see page 8 29 Removing PCI Module 3 Open the top cover of the PCI Module 1 Make setting of jumper switch for clearing the password Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11 12 and place them on the jumper pins 3 4 on the PCI Module 1 5 Mount the PCI Module 1 to NEC Express5800 ft series see page 8 31 Installing PCI Module 6 Plug the both power cords and when the POWER Switch LED turns on press it to power on NEC Express5800 ft series 7 When the following POST screen appears after the startup press the POWER Switch to turn off the power Unplug the both
116. MNSASICL TC KAU As some components may become very hot during system operation give ample time to allow cooling as well as use precaution when handling internal components immediately after powering down BRED THN FY CRM BADIYH RY FORYURUOBRBEBRA lt RAL Some intemal components may still be operational on battery power Refer to instruction for this system as well as options prior to maintenance Precautions for Use 1 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY This section provides precautions for using the server safely Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the server For symbol meanings see SAFETY INDICATIONS described in the previous section General A WARNING 9S o gt e Do not use the equipment in an operation where human lives are involved or high reliability is required This equipment is not intended for use in controlling or use with facilities or systems where human lives are involved or high reliability is required including medical devices or nuclear aerospace transportation and traffic control facilities NEC assumes no liability for any accidents or damage to physical assets resulting from the use of this equipment in such systems or facilities Do not continue to use the equipment if you detect smoke odor or noise If the equipment emits smoke odor or noise immediately flip off the POWER switch unplug the cord and contact your sales agent There is a risk of a
117. Management Online Healthy System Unallocated m f Services and Applications ZADisk 2 Dynamic Foreign NDisk 3 Dynamic Foreign gt r Unallocat Import Foreign Disks RES Before using these disks add them to your system configuration Windows Setup and Operation 3 11 5 In the Foreign Disk Volumes dialog box check 2x a The following list shows the type condition and size of volumes on these foreign the volumes to import and click OK disks Click OK to add these disks E Mirrored volume 6 The disk import is completed if SE 1 File Action view window Help PETES the disk status changes from sjqia aegs Foreign to Online Computer Management Local E System Tools Sew V Mirror Dynamic NTFS Healthy 3 91GB 3 88 GE E E Event viewer SIEM C Mirror Dynamic NTFS Healthy System 6 01 GB 3 63 GE ic x Shared Folders amp Local Users and Groups a Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager amp Storage a Removable Storage fev aea OEM C steht dled 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB DekMansoemend Healthy System Unallocated Ej Ta Services and Applications Disk 2 Dynamic New Yolume E 17 09 GB 3 91 GB NTFS 13 18 GB Online Healthy Unallocated Disk 3 TT Dynamic New Yolume E 17 09 GB 3 91 GB NTFS 13 18 GB Online Healthy Unallocated 3 12 Windows Setup and Operation Extending D
118. Models that support the RDR Rapid Disk Resync function Skip to Disk Operations Using the RDR Rapid Disk Resync Function page 3 15 Windows Setup and Operation 3 3 Disks Operations Using Disk Management Disk Management NEC Express5800 ft series which does not support the RDR function ensures reliability by executing software mirroring to hard disk volumes using Windows Use Windows Disk Management to manipulate volumes Refer to the online help for the operating procedures of Disk Management Steps to refer to the help of operating procedures 1 Click Start Help and Support 2 Select Disks and Data from the topics on the help 3 Select Managing Disks and Volumes Disk Management How To then check the operating procedures Hard Disk Configurations that can be built on the NEC Express5800 ft series In the NEC Express5800 ft series all volumes need creation of mirror disks You can create mirror disks only on the dynamic simple volume as shown in the table below Volume type Can cannot be built Dynamic simple volume y Dynamic span volume Dynamic mirror volume a Dynamic stripe volume Dynamic RAID5 volume E Create mirror disks by selecting disks that are in the same slot of the SCSI enclosure For example if the hard disks are positioned as shown in the table below define hard disks 0 and 3 hard disks 1 and 4 and hard disks 2 and 5 as m
119. NEC Express5800 ft series SERVICE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ossee 3 45 Chapter 4 System Configuration cccccceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneneeeeee 4 1 SYSTEM BIOS SETUP s sc3 manie a n Sea ae ane E a iaaea 4 2 Starting SETUP Utility vcs sci cic aide ana dati dane hea EEEN ea oa uE E ant 4 3 Description of On Screen Items and Key Usage cceeceeescseeeceseeeeeseceeeseceeeecsseeeeeaesaeeeeens 4 4 Configuration Examples nasser ee oacste evi Gi a a E a a e Saaremaa area 4 5 Menu and Parameter Descriptions ariere n ea ie a ena En Aap EA EEEa i 4 8 SCSFBIOS Fast UTI S sc eee er oeras eeart na Ea Eoaea saaa Ea Eaa E RE SOE EEEE RATE EE is 4 29 SIET a ARER E EETA E A E 4 29 Configuration Settings siei eir kaera ia EE Ea EE E EEA E a EE E E ae 4 32 San SCSL s 10 AE E E TTT 4 36 SCSI Disk Utilitycs reata eea e ra re E a Eaa Ea p EEE aE EREE Ee E VE AREOSA 4 36 Select Host Adapter p st stes essre tacesbessnssagisidessssbeshensstiassbassnasa pected Eo rR EEEE E E SETS asike 4 36 Exit Fast UTIL Termination and Storage of Fast UTIL 0 ce eecseescesssseceecreeeecnereeeneeeees 4 37 Setting List for Optional SCSI Device 0 0 ee ecesesccsseeseeseceeeeceeeessecnaeeecsaeceessecaeeseeneseeeeaees 4 37 FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR eecceceescsseseceseceeesecseesecnaeccsaececesecneesecnaeseeeesneseeeaees 4 38 Forced SHUtdO Wi iesiri nr nesne cata ons arees KENEEN SENE queiees SENE EENET EEEE a 4 38 Clear CMOS Password C
120. Number 66MHz Capability Bus Width am cu Unknown Am DIMM H E PCI Module H E SCSI Enclosure fe Mirror Disk GaStatus M Empty zi For Help press F1 MB Normal Warning W Abnormal 7 Installing and Using Utilities 5 73 NEC MWA MANAGEMENT WORKSTATION APPLICATION NEC MWA is an application that enables the remote management of the server through a management PC over the network A management PC is a computer running NEC ESMPRO Manager Refer to MWA First Step Guide in the following directory of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM for details of its functions and operation CD ROM drive mwa doc mwa_fsg pdf TIPS How to install NEC MWA is described in online documents See MWA Installation Guide for details Servers to be remotely managed by NEC MWA The server with RomPilot or BMC can be managed by NEC MWA This product has both RomPilot and BMC IPMI1 0 PRECAUTIONS MWA First Step Guide is common to all the managed servers The following denotes notes and restrictions for this product m The Console Redirection feature with WAN or direct connection cannot be used when the server is operated remotely from the other management PC by using the RomPilot feature via LAN To use Console Redirection with WAN or direct connection set RomPilot Support in Advanced menu of BIOS setup utility to Disabled See Chapter 4 SYSTEM BIOS SETUP for details m ESCD information
121. Off Off Off On standby AC power After turning on the power is supplied through the wait for the OS to start When cord but the system the OS starts and duplex has not been powered mode is established the on yet indications will return to normal If they do not get back to normal remount the CPU module If the problem persists contact your sales agent Green Off Off Off The PCI module 1 is Wait for the OS to start When performing diagnosis the OS starts and duplex Diag mode is established the indications will return to normal Off Off Green Off The PCI module 2 is Wait for the OS to start When performing diagnosis the OS starts and duplex Diag mode is established the indications will return to normal 3 Status LED of only PCI module 1 is red PCI 1 PCI 2 Status DISK Status DISK er LED 2 Access LED 2 Access Description Acuon LED LED Off Off Amber Amber The PCI module 1 is on Start the PCI module 1 from ft standby The PCI server utility See pages 3 39 module 1 has not been through 3 41 powered on yet Remount the PCI module 1 The PCI module 2 If the problem persists operates in simplex contact your sales agent mode Green Off Amber Amber The PCI module 1 is Wait for the PCI module 1 to performing diagnosis start When the PCI module 1 Diag starts and duplex mode is The PCI module 2 established the indications operates in simplex will return to normal mode Off Off
122. Off line Maintenance Utility provides the following features m IPMI Information Viewer Provides the functions to view the system event log SEL sensor data record SDR and field replaceable unit FRU in IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface and to make a backup copy of them Using this feature you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part m BIOS Setup Viewer Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility to a text file 6 10 Maintenance m System Information Viewer Provides the functions to view information on the processor CPU and the BIOS and export it to a text file m System Information Management Provides the function to make a back up copy of your data Without the backup data the system specific information and or configuration may not be restored TIPS For information on making backup copy of system information see the separate volume User s Guide Setup Only the authorized personnel are allowed to restore the backup data Maintenance 6 11 RELOCATING STORING THE NEC Express5800 ft series Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server Users should not attempt to remove the rack mountable server from the rack assembly A WARNING Do not attempt to remove the server To avoid the risk of personal injury users should not attempt to remove the server from the rack assembly
123. POWER switch only once does not turn off the power in this case The server is not found on the network O_ Is the LAN cable connected Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server Also make sure to use the LAN cable that conforms to the network interface standard O Is BIOS configuration correct The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility lt Menu to check Advanced Option Rom gt On Board LAN gt O Have the protocol and service already configured Install the distinctive network driver for the server Make sure that the protocol such as TCP IP and services are properly specified O Is the transfer speed correct Open the Network Property dialog box in Control Panel to specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Transfer speed can be fixed by PROSet II Select an adapter to modify the setting from the tree on the left for 100Base adapter click the Advanced tab and make settings at Link Speed amp Duplex For 1000Base T adapter click the Link Config tab Select Enabled Auto Negotiation and specify the transfer speed at Negotiable Speed and Duplexes Only check the transfer speed to use Icon of drive A is changed to that of removal disk Does not cause any problem WMI log is recorded in the
124. Resynchronize This Disk In the Success dialog box click OK 3 The Op State State of the disk becomes Syncing and resynchronization starts Windows Setup and Operation 3 23 4 When Op State State becomes Duplex the resynchronization is completed Verifying RDR disks Follow the steps below to check if the disk synchronization by RDR is being performed normally TIPS m The verification process is automatically performed every 12 hours m The duration may vary depending on the disk size or load but the verification process completes in a few seconds 1 Start RDR Utility and right click RDR Virtual Disk x x 1 2 3 in the left frame and click Verify RDR Virtual Disk 2 Inthe Success dialog box click OK Disk verification starts and Status of the RDR Virtual Disk becomes Verify x percent x 0 25 50 75 4 When Status becomes None the verification is completed Setting priority for resynchronization Priority of synchronization can be specified for disk mirroring by RDR By changing the priority I O load during synchronization can be reduced 1 Start RDR Utility right click RDR Virtual Disk x x 1 2 3 in left frame to change the priority and click Set Resync Priority 2 When a dialog box appears select Low Normal or High a default is Normal and click OK 3 In the Success dialog box click OK 3 24 Windows Setup and Operation Replacing Failed Hard D
125. S for a single CPU module is completed click the Jump Switch button The module completely updated is started and the module under operation is stopped 8 Start the other inactive module Starting the module causes the firmware to be updated automatically However if the Enable automatic firmware update property is disabled update the module in the procedure as follows 1 Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen If Choose update method the component is operating stop the Copy firmware from Online module to Offline one component G z 2 Click the Firmware Update button in the Enter the file location of the new firmware Update screen for the target component Browse 3 Select the update method in the Firmware TET e Update dialog box and click the Run m button 4 Start the module Even if you do not have the image data of firmware for update the firmware can be copied from the other module By starting the module the firmware will be updated automatically However when the Enable automatic firmware update property is disabled follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 Start the system using the module of the firmware copy source See the current status by the Status indication on the target component screen of the copy destination and confirm that it is stopped 2 On the Update screen of the target component click Firmware update
126. SI BIOS may not be changed by using this utility IMPORTANT m Leave the settings for the SCSI controller to which built in hard disks are connected as they are at shipment If any of the settings are changed see the description in this document to return to the settings at shipment The controllers installed in each module must be configured individually m Fast UTIL of the latest version is installed in the NEC Express5800 ft series Accordingly the setting screen may be different from that described in this document See the online help or contact your sales agent for the setting items different from those in this document Start The procedure of starting Fast UTIL is described below Notes Note the following before starting Fast UTIL m Settings for built in hard disk Leave the settings for the built in hard disk as they are at shipment The built in host adapter is specified as QLA12160 Ultra3 2000 in the Select Host Adapter dialog box m Settings of built in SCSI controller installed in each group Mount only the PCI module which has the built in SCSI controller that you want to check the settings and start Fast UTIL Remove the other PCI module from the system Do not change the factory settings of the built in SCSI controller Although there may be descriptions that the SCSI BIOS of the host adapter needs to be configured in manuals for tape devices etc this server does not require modifications to the
127. SMPRO is installed on the system as a server management solution NEC ESMPRO a GUI based management tool allows you to monitor view and configure NEC Express5800 ft series This tool also supports both local and remote management of NEC Express5800 ft series 2 4 General Description NEC Express5800 ft series mainly provides the following advantages m Highly fault tolerant processing and I O subsystems NEC Express5800 ft series use redundant hardware and software to assure server operation even if one module suffers trouble with its processor memory I O including trouble related to the I O controller disk drive or Ethernet adapter Continuous network connection NEC Express5800 ft series maintains continuous network connection by detecting any trouble with the network adapter connection etc If trouble occurs the standby network connection will take over all network traffic processing and thus securely maintain the network system connection of NEC Express5800 ft series without losing network traffic or client connection m Support of multiple network connections Since NEC Express5800 ft series can support multiple Ethernet connections you can add network redundant control or network traffic control m Industry standard hardware platform NEC Express5800 ft series uses IA Intel Architecture based system hardware m Noneed to modify applications You can run Windows Server 2003 compliant applications on NEC Express5800
128. Stratus AA U57000 Fiber Gigabit Adapter N8104 103 NEC 8490XT Copper Gigabit Adapter 3 36 Windows Setup and Operation 7 Click OK The Intel R PROSet II dialog box closes after a while and the settings become effective Fil Network Components Network Components El fgk Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode E Member Adapters Elements In This Folder f Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter Team 2 Adaptive Load Balancing Mode E B Team 2 Adaptive Load Balancing Mode aq Member Adapters Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Ad Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Ad Folder Information Network Components list of all supported network components in the system IMPORTANT m The Digital signature not found dialog box may appear several times If it appears click Yes m After the settings of dual configuration Intel R Advanced Network Services Virtual Adapter will appear on the Network and dialup connection or Device Manager dialog box Therefore 6 adapters that consist of two Virtual two 100Base and two 1000Base adapters will appear on the Network and dialup connection or Device Manager dialog box Do not disable the status of this Virtual Adapter If you enable it again the system may become unstable and you may need to restart it m Set IP address for Virtual Adap
129. TINUE 10 11 12 System Configuration 4 41 TIPS A message informing you of the completion of CMOS clear and prompting you to clear CMOS will appear for 10 seconds Note that even if you do not do anything the process goes on and the server will be rebooted automatically If the message Non volatile memory cleared appears after rebooting and during POST turn off the power by pressing the POWER switch and unplug the both power cords EN All Rights Res Non volatile memory cleared This message indicates that CMOS is cleared properly IMPORTANT If the message Non volatile memory cleared appears at normal startup the jumper switch is set for clearing CMOS Change back the jumper switch setting Remove the PCI Module 1 from NEC Express5800 ft series see Removing PCI Module on page 8 29 Reset the jumper switch setting Remove the clips from the jumper pins 1 2 and place them on the jumper pins 11 12 on the PCI Module 1 TIPS If you place clips on other pins the server may malfunction Mount the PCI Module 1 again to NEC Express5800 ft series see Installing PCI Module on page 8 31 and plug the power cord to the AC inlet B for Group1 Likewise mount the PCI Module 2 to NEC Express5800 ft series and plug the power cord to the AC inlet A for Group2 4 42 System Configuration 13 Shortly after you connect the both power cords the BMC status
130. Trip 00 Green Blink CPU module 1 CPU 1 thermal change error upper limit CPU T Trip 01 Green Blink CPU module 1 CPU 2 thermal change error upper limit CPU T Trip 20 Green Blink CPU module 2 CPU 1 thermal change error upper limit CPU T Trip 21 Green Blink CPU module 2 CPU 2 thermal change error upper limit CPUO 12ss Alm Amber Blink CPU module 1 12 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPUO 12ss Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit 7 8 Troubleshooting Indication _ ea ei Explanation Procedure CPUO 12ss Alm Amber Blink CPU module 1 12 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent 07 upper limit CPUO 12ss Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU0 12v Alm Amber Blink CPU module 1 12 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU0 12v Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU0 12v Alm Amber Blink CPU module 1 12 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU0 12v Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 12 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPUO 1 5v Alm Amber Blink CPU module 1 1 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU0 1 5v Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal1 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU
131. a K 4 gt W Unallocated I Simple volume IMPORTANT m If the status of the disk is Not Initialized right click the disk and initialize it m If Foreign appears right click the disk and execute Convert to Basic Disk 3 6 Windows Setup and Operation 4 Select and right click a disk and C Comp anageme Epix SI File Action View window Help 18 xil then execute Convert to e gt Ame aeg Computer Management Local Eh System Tools HE Event Viewer a Shared Folders amp Performance Logs and a Device Manager Sy Storage fez Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter fa Services and Applications Dynamic Disk On the Convert to Dynamic Disk dialog box select the disk and click OK Disk Management Local Users and Groups 90EM C Simple Dynamic NTFS Healthy System 6 01 GB 3 64 GB Alerts Disk 0 Dynamic 34 18 GB Online OEM C 6 01 GB NTFS Healthy System Disk 1 gt BB Unallocated I Simple volume 5 Right click the volume of the a Action View Window Help dynamic disk to mirror and click Add Mirror Computer Management Local fi System Tools pw E Event Viewer ce Fa Shared Folders E 1 2 Performance Logs and z Device Manager ij Storage ic Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Gp Disk Management fa Services and Applications Local Users and
132. a list or TS Click Nest to continue Cancel Select Don t search I will choose the pggeerterssrms install and then click Next Please choose your search and installation options 7 S C Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed CD ROM Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Corea 8 44 System Upgrade fo ind New Hardware Wizard 4 Select SCSI and RAID controller a click Next Hardware Type xs Select a hardware type and then click Next Common hardware types Personal identification devices AF Ports COM amp LPT Printers S Processo IEEE 1394 Devices XS Smart card readers Sound video and nama nnntrollare Found New Hardware Wizard 5 Do not select a driver listed on the modebiliSte device driver you want to install for this hardware Click Have Disk Select the manufacturer and model of your hardware device and then click Next If you 7 have a disk that contains the driver you want to install click Have Disk Compaq Sof Compaq Drive Array non pnp we ESF Compaq Fibre Channel Host Controller non pnp Stratus Technologies
133. ack up data before initialization Missing Missing appears when a If there is a volume on the missing Dynamic dynamic disk is damaged or disk break the mirror on that disk 6 01 GB removed Then right click the Missing disk and Offline perform Remove disk isk 2 Not Initialized appears Right click the disk and perform lake when the disk is not signed Initialize Disk The disk will become 33 87 GB available Not Initialized Primary PCI module s status LED2 and DISK ACCESS LED illuminate amber after startup O Is the mirroring of the hard disks broken See Disk Management and if the mirror is broken reconfigure it For mirroring configuration see DISK OPERATIONS in Chapter 3 Windows Setup Operation Other than disk failure the mirror may be removed at startup after the following operations e Started the server after shutdown with the PCI module in simplex mode e Started NEC Express5800 ft series when the BMC status LED was blinking The duplication process of Baseboard Management Controller BMC is executed 7 32 Troubleshooting immediately after turning on the AC power or mounting a PCI module The mirror of a disk may be removed if you turn on the power and start the server before or during the duplication process Make sure to start the server after the duplication process of BMC is completed You can check the status of the duplication process from BMC status LED of PCI modul
134. actually remains on the hard disk If data is not erased completely it could be restored by certain software and be used for unexpected purposes You are strongly recommended to buy a special type of software or service to avoid such trouble For details contact your sales agent NEC shall not be accountable for such data leakage caused by your failure to take necessary measures Included Software When you transfer or sell the included software to a third party you must meet the following conditions m Transfer all of the software included with the system Do not retain any copies m Meet the conditions of transfer described in each software license agreement m Uninstall untransferable programs if any from the server before the transfer 1 18 Precautions for Use DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES m When you dispose of the main unit hard disk drive floppy disks CD ROMs optional boards etc you need to observe your local disposal rules For details ask your municipal office IMPORTANT For disposal or replacement of batteries on the motherboard consult with your sales agent If data remains on the hard disk backup data cartridges floppy disks or other writable media such as CD R and CD RW it could be restored and reused by outsiders The customer is responsible for wiping out such data before disposal You need to exercise sufficient care to protect privacy and confidential information m Some of
135. ailable in consoleless operation are extracted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu See the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu described earlier for each function Of H ance Utilit 1 See the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu 2 Shows detailed explanation of each function 3 Terminate the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER IMPORTANT m The following functions differ from the Tools Menu in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu Contents and operations of System Diagnostics see SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS in Chapter 6 for details Disk type created in Created Support Disk m System Diagnostics Utility When no keyboard is connected to the server the System Diagnostic window is not displayed on the local console Make sure to connect the keyboard to the server if you work on this utility from the local console 5 10 Installing and Using Utilities Master Control Menu The Master Control Menu is used to e Read documentation e Install the management software and e Install the viewer application Adobe Acrobat Reader TIPS E Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 or later or Windows NT 4 0 or later E To read documentation HTML and PDF files in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM the HTML browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 0 or later or Netscape Communicator Version 4 0 or later and Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4 05 or later are required in your system GP LXPRLSSBUILDLR Master Control Menu
136. ake a selection for Thermal Sensor Wake On Event and Console Redirection first select a desired option and press Enter to display its submenu See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting AC LINK Stay Off Last State Power On Specify the AC LINK feature by selecting the status of the power supply unit of the server when the AC power supply restarts See the table on the next page for details Do not select the parameters other than Stay Off when Enabled is selected for Wake On Lan Waiting time for AC LINK 0 10 3600 Set maximum waiting time in second for AC LINK If either of ACs is not supplied in time the system will be turned on as simplex config Value 0 means the system waits eternally Range 0 or 10 3600sec Error Log Initialization Enter Press Enter to initialize the error log The message Error Log Cleared appears upon successful completion If failed the message Error Log Not Cleared appears Factory set IMPORTANT It is recommended that Waiting time for AC LINK be 3600 when you use UPSs in the redundant configuration 4 21 4 22 System Configuration The table below lists how selections for AC LINK determine the power status of the server when the power supply to the server restarts Parameter pile berota powered off Stay Off Last S
137. al In operation Temperature 10 to 35 C requirements Humidity 20 to 80 RH non condensing In storage Temperature 10 to 55 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH non condensing A 2 Specifications This page is intentionally left blank Appendix B I O Port Addresses The factory set I O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows Address Chip in Use 00 1F 8 bit DMA control register 20 21 Master 8259 programming interface 2E 2F Configuration 40 43 8254 programming interface 60 Keyboard amp mouse 61 NMI status register 64 Keyboard amp mouse 70 71 NMI enable register real time clock 80 8F 16 bit DMA control register AO A1 Slave 8259 programming interface CO DF DMA controller page register E0 E9 Base address register FO Register IRQ13 F1 FF Logical device configuration 170 177 or BAR2 EDMA2 compatible mode primary command block register 278 27F Parallel port 3 2F8 2FF Serial port B 370 377 Floppy disk drive 2 IDE 2 378 37F Parallel port 2 3B0 3BB VGA 3BC 3BE Parallel port 1 3C0 3DF VGA 3F6 or BAR1 EDMA2 compatible mode primary command block register 3F0 3F7 Floppy disk drive 1 IDE 1 3F8 3FF Serial port A 40B DMA1 expansion write mode register 4D0 Master 8259 ELCR programming 4D1 Slave 8259 ELCR programming 4D6 DMA2 expansion write mode register 580 58F SMBus control C00 PCI IRQ mapping index register C01 PCI IRQ mapping data regist
138. alignment remarkably as time goes by though the system clock adjustment is performed contact your sales agent 4 10 System Configuration Advanced Move the cursor onto Advanced to display the Advanced menu There is no configurable item on the Advanced menu screen below Display each sub menu and make settings on the sub menu screen Select an option with the gt mark and press Enter to display its submenu AY ETI Security System Hardware Boot System Configuration 4 11 Advanced Select Advanced on the Advanced menu to display the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced lem Specific Hep Display the diagnostic screen during POST instead of the Logo The boot time diagnostic screen is redirection or rompilot is enabled Boot time Diagnostic Screen RomPilot Support POST Error Pause Disabled Disabled Enabled F1 Help Esc Exit t Select Item lt Select Menu Change Values Enter Select gt Sub Menu F9 Setup Defaults F10 Save Changes amp Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Boot time Diagnostic Screen Disabled Enabled Specify whether to display the Power On Self Test POST screen at start up If Disabled is selected the NEC logo appears while POST is in progress To display POST check results press Esc If RomPilot Support is set to Enabled or
139. ample when the Status item of a module changes to fault it may be caused by another module s error Therefore you need to check the status of the other modules based on alert information Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk When creating a new mirror the status of the hard disk and its upper component SCSI enclosure will continue to change frequently after you mount a hard disk until the mirror is completed During this process the status color may turn to abnormal but when the mirror is created successfully it will return normal LAN Monitoring Report The LAN monitoring function defines the line status depending on the number of transmission packets and the number of packet errors within a certain period Thus the LAN monitoring function may report a line fault or high line load only in a temporary high line impedance state If a normal state recovery is reported immediately temporal high line impedance may have occurred thus there is not any problem LAN Monitoring Threshold Because the NEC Express5800 ft series detects hardware faults on the network in the driver level NEC ESMPRO Agent does not monitor line faults Thus the value set for Line fault occurrence rate of a LAN tab of NEC ESMPRO Agent properties in the control panel is not used Status during CPU Module Diagnosis While diagnosing a stopped CPU module the CPU is no longer in the duplex mode and the CPU and the memory cannot be used Howeve
140. ance Allows the start stop MTBF information clear and diagnosis of the PCI modules to be provided See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for the start stop and MTBF information clear of the CPU modules paspart nm meeega ed Update Allows the device identification information of the PCI modules to be viewed The detailed device identification information can be checked by selecting ESMPRO tree gt Hardware tree Field Replaceable Unit tree Installing and Using Utilities 5 31 Monitoring PCI Slots and Devices on PCI Module To monitor the PCI slots and devices on the PCI modules see the PCI slot tree To see the information on the PCI slot tree select PCI Module PCI module containing PCI slot to be seen gt PCI slot of the FTServer tree You can see the following information on the PCI slot and the devices on the PCI slot in the PCI slot tree m General Allows the PCI slot configuration information to be viewed Maintenance Allows a device on the PCI slot to be started This function is not supported in the current version m PCI Device General Allows the information of devices on the PCI slot to be viewed 5 32 Installing and Using Utilities m PCI Device Detailed information Allows the detailed information of a device on the PCI slot to be viewed m PCI Bridge General Allows the information of bridges on the PCI
141. apacity and must be new or physically formatted For physical format refer to SCSI BIOS Fast UTIL in Chapter 4 System Configuration and perform Low Level Format using SCSI Disk Utility 3 16 Windows Setup and Operation 5 The disks which RDR has been set can only be used in the system with the ft control software ver 3 0 or later 6 If the system is shut down or restarted while the mirror is broken or a long time 30 hours or longer has passed after the mirror is broken the mirror resynchronization target will be the entire disk For example if the mirroring has been broken due to a PCI module failure when you shut down the system and replace the PCI module in such a state the entire area of the disk needs to be resynchronized 7 Insert or replace the HDD while the server is powered on if the RDR function is used If anew HDD non formatted HDD on Windows OS is inserted to the slot corresponding to the slot with the disk you specified RDR when the server is powered off the OS may not be able to start or the HDD mirroring may not be completed properly Configuring and Removing Duplexed Setting of Disks by the RDR Function This section describes how to make disks duplex and how to remove the settings by using the RDR function To use the RDR function use RDR Utility About RDR Utility Starting RDR Utility From Start select All Programs then RDR and click RDR Utility to start RDR Utility
142. application event log When you view the Application Event Viewer log on your computer one or more of the following events may be logged This has no effect on the functionality of VERITAS Volume Manager Source WinMgmt ID 41 Description WMI ADAP was unable to create object index 2902 for Performance Library vxio because no value was found in the 009 subkey Troubleshooting 7 29 Failure in CPU module duplication If the simultaneous replacement of the CPU and PCI modules causes the CPU and PCI modules to control duplication the CPU module duplication may fail with the following message saved in the system event log If so the system can be recovered from the failure starting the CPU module with ft server utility or by reinserting the CPU module Source srabid ID 16474 Description Diagnostics failure of 2 CPU Get Chipset Info 0xf026 0x0 0x0 Disk information is not correct on VERITAS Enterprise Administrator after system starts If the primary PCI cannot access the FC disk the disk information may not be displayed correctly In this case run Action Update or Action Rescan If the information is not displayed correctly even after the above step check the connection between the module and disk Stratus Fault Tolerant Virtual 69000 Video is displayed on Remove Hardware dialog box If you double click an icon Remove Hardware on the system tray two Stratus Fault Tol
143. apters el lt Empty gt 4 Select Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter from Network Component Tree The pop up menu appears Select Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode from Add to Team and add the adapters Remove 2 Fthernet Address Add to Team Create New Team Add VLAN Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Network Driver Stq Network Status You will see the warning message when you add the team You can ignore this warning message by clicking OK This warning message is to inform you that only one adapter is added to the team 5 Select Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter 2 from Network Component Tree in the same manner as for 4 The pop up menu appears Select Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode from Add to Team and add the adapters IMPORTANT Do not set Preferred Primary or Preferred Secondary to each adapter 6 Make settings of dual configuration for Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 1000Base as well Perform 3 to 5 in the same manner replacing Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter with Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter In 3 you can also select Load Balancing In this case Team X Adaptive Load Balancing Mode will be added When the option boards are used perform 3 to 5 in the same manner replacing Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter with the following N8804 001P1 Stratus AA U51500 10 100 Enet Adapter N8 104 84
144. ary high load on the system In this case wait for the system load become low enough before restarting SNMP Service A CPU PCI module cannot be integrated When a component fails and is reintegrated the following message may be recorded to the system event log and the process is stopped Such event indicates that the component s MTBF is below the threshold and it is judged that repair is necessary Thus the reintegration process cannot be completed Generally replacement of the component will be required so contact your sales representative If reintegrating the component without repair is required for some Troubleshooting 7 31 reason consult your sales agent It is possible to perform reintegration forcefully Source srabid ID 16395 Description is a device number x is now STATE_BROKEN REASON_BELLOW_MTBF x An unavailable disk is displayed on Disk Management Follow the instructions on the table below Disk status Description Action ZADisk 3 Foreign appears when To use the disk s data Dynamic loading a dynamic disk Referring to Chapter 3 Windows which has been used in a Setup and Operation import the disk Foreign different system To change the disk to an available disk To use this disk it needs to be initialized It will become available after initialization lt Note gt Initialization erases all data on the disk If there is important data b
145. ata Volume Size This section describes a procedure to extend a volume size using Disk Management IMPORTANT m It is not possible to extend boot volume m As it is not possible to extend mirror volume a mirror volume is order Remove Mirror Extend Volume Add Mirror extended in the following 1 Remove the mirror of the volume you want to extend and make it a simple volume In the case below the mirror of the volume E is removed to extend the volume E C Computer Management slol xj E omputer management Fe ain yew dow to aloj z Fe ain yow idw o e Ame DX EaR e mae OS Comgnter Mangane Loca IG Sron Toci Ey Evert Viewer gg Dwed Fotos 8 WD Local Users and Groups Gy Evert viewer a Pwed Peles 2 Local Users and Groups Performance Logs and Alerts Performance Logs and Alerts BB Device Manager BB Device Hanae Gj Storage Gy Storage GP Rewrovabsn Stor age E GP Renewable Stor age Dusk Detragmenter Disk Detragmentier Ouk Disk Management Management P BP Sorva and Apokcations P fa Soves ond Apokcabons New Vohame E 3 91 GB NTFS heathy Comguter Marwgament Loca Vime ayo Type Fie Sytem Ratus Capocty 1G Sree Tots Drie vame E Serge Dyn NTFS masat 39168 Dom Mro Ormae NIPS Hesty System 6 01 G0 MEET iaz 2 Right click the volume to be extended and ea eee TE click Extend Volume t 85 Bxesae Com
146. below lists the NEC Express5800 ft series management tasks using NEC ESMPRO and system functions NEC Express5800 ft series NEC ESMPRO function or tool NEC ESMPRO function or tool management task on managed NECS on management manager Express5800 ft series Monitoring of major NEC ESMPRO Manager component states data viewer Diagnosis and start stop of NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager major components and F W ft server utility data viewer update BMC F W update NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager BMC F W update utility BMC F W update utility Confirmation of alert or Event Viewer NEC ESMPRO Manager confirmation of fault Alert Viewer occurrence event information Confirmation of H W error NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager log When the administration manager is also the managed NEC Express5800 ft series or NEC ESMPRO Manager is installed on the managed NEC Express5800 ft series all functions of the administration manager can be used on the managed NEC Express5800 ft series The report of a fault occurrence in the NEC Express5800 ft series alert is immediately sent to the NEC ESMPRO Manager When the NEC ESMPRO Manager receives the alert a popup message appears The alert contains the detailed information of the fault and the proper countermeasures You can take the appropriate action for the alert 5 16 Installing and Using Utilities Gi STRATUS_MSG_STATE_REMOVE
147. c 2 2steccsan anea pee E R ER i ae e ER ER E 8 34 Removing PCI Board isien onera e AT ERE K EE AE R RE aed feed 8 39 Replacing PCL Board iiaee Ma E E EE TR ET a 8 40 Setup of Optional PCI Board sicscccescecustscceteuscedugsecaienetessesatan cue AE EASE KEAN ESE EEK s 8 41 Appendix A Specifications ccccseccseceeeeseeeeseeseseeeeneeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeeeeeesseaeenseeeeeseaeas A 1 Appendix B I O Port Addresses sscsseceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaesaseaeeaseeeeeeeeeseaeseneeeeeeeneeas B 1 Chapter 1 Precautions for Use This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of the server 1 2 Precautions for Use WARNING LABELS Warning labels are placed in certain parts of the system so that the user stays alert to possible risks Do not remove or damage these labels If some label is missing about to peel off or illegible contact your sales agent Tower Model The figures below show locations of the labels on the tower model server Label B Label C Label A ARIARI AKAI fi y P Label E Label D Precautions for Use 1 3 Label A BRPRKORBNVHVETOT EYA M T TFWD RY TFRUALACOU TERY RUMABSEBRA lt LE In order to prevent electrical shock or fire hazards disconnect all cables connected with the module to be serviced Label B A 3 CAUTION BERARU HOVRULSUSSCRML TFS Exercise caution when handli
148. ch a message may appear at the system startup or when a PCI module is replaced and incorporated into the system This is due to the server s operating specifications and does not pose any problem Fail to access read or write to the floppy disk O Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks O Is the floppy disk write protected Place the write protect switch on the floppy disk to the Write enabled position O Is the floppy disk formatted Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk Troubleshooting 7 27 Fail to access to the CD ROM O Is the CD ROM properly set in the CD ROM drive tray The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD ROM Make sure that the CD ROM is placed properly in the holder O Is the CD ROM applicable to the server The CD ROM for Macintosh is not available for use O Is the CD ROM on the PCI module whose POWER switch is on primary module Although there are two CD ROM drives you can only use the one located on the primary module whose POWER switch is on Fail to access the hard disk O _sIs the hard disk applicable to the server Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed O Is the hard disk properly installed Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever o
149. ch the front bezel m It is not recommended to use the server with its bezel detached Tower Model Insert the security key into the slot and turn it to release the lock Hold the handle on the left side of the bezel and pull it After closing the front bezel lock it with the key for security Release General Description 2 29 Rack mount Model The rack mount model server is equipped with a detachable front bezel Detach Follow the steps below to detach the front bezel 1 Insert the security key into the slot and turn it with a little pressure to release the lock Release 2 Hold the right side of the front bezel lightly and pull it open 3 Detach the bezel from the main unit by sliding it to the left a little to disengage the tabs from the frame Attach To attach the front bezel engage the tabs on the frame on the left side of the main unit After attaching and closing the front bezel lock it with the key for security 2 30 General Description Power ON To power on NEC Express5800 ft series press the POWER switch located on the front panel Follow the steps below to turn on the power A rack mount model is shown here for convenience of explanation However the steps are the same for a tower model except that the modules are mounted vertically 1 Power on the display unit and other peripheral devices c
150. column The LAN monitoring function report a line fault or high line load The LAN monitoring function defines the line status depending on the number of transmission packets and the number of packet errors within a certain period Thus the LAN monitoring function may report a line fault or high line load only in a temporary high line impedance state If a normal state recovery is reported immediately temporal high line impedance may have occurred thus there is not any problem LAN monitoring threshold is not used Because the NEC Express5800 ft series detects hardware faults on the network in the driver level NEC ESMPRO Agent does not monitor line faults Thus the value set for Line fault occurrence rate of a LAN tab of NEC ESMPRO Agent properties in the control panel is not used The remote shutdown and threshold change functions cannot be used via NEC ESMPRO Manager Depending on your OS type or its version settings for community SNMP service s security function are not made or default settings of authority are different To enable the remote shutdown and threshold change functions via NEC ESMPRO Manager make settings of community and set its authority to READ CREATE or READ WRITE NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot monitor in Sleep State NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot monitor the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine in the sleep state system standby or system halt state While NEC ESMPRO Manager monitors server shu
151. cord is supplied to the PCI connected correctly module 1 Check the condition of breaker The PCI module 2 and UPS operates in simplex Check if the power unit of the mode PCI module 1 is connected correctly Remount the PCI module 1 If the problem persists contact your sales agent Amber Amber Off Off AC power is not Check if the power cord is supplied to the PCI connected correctly module 2 Check the condition of breaker The PCI module 1 and UPS operates in simplex Check if the power unit of the mode PCI module 2 is connected correctly Remount the PCI module 2 If the problem persists contact your sales agent General Description PCI 1 PCI 2 Status DISK Status DISK inti LED 2 Access LED 2 Access DescHption Agan LED LED Green Green Amber Green i There is an error in Make sure that the option PCI Off Off the option PCI board or board is properly mounted and 5 the PCI module board cables are properly connected connected or mounted to the connecters of the PCI on PCI module 1 module or the option PCI ii There is an error in board the devices connected Remount the PCI module 1 to the option PCI board If the problem persists contact connected or mounted your sales agent on PCI module 1 including the cable disconnection iii The LAN cable connected or mounted on PCI module 1 is disconnected Amber Green Green Green i There
152. ct this option to restore all default values factory set values of the SETUP utility The following screen appears Setup Confirmation Load default configuration now Yes No Select Yes to restore default values Select No to return to the Exit menu screen IMPORTANT The default value slightly differs from the factory set value Check all setting values before restoring the default value Load Previous Values Select this option to discard the current configuration data and restore the previous configuration data The following screen appears Setup Confirmation Load previous configuration now Yes No Select Yes to discard the current configuration data and restore the previous one m Save Changes Select this option to save the current configuration data into the CMOS non volatile memory and stay on the SETUP utility The following screen appears Setup Confirmation Save configuration changes now Yes No Select Yes to save the current configuration data into the CMOS non volatile memory System Configuration 4 29 SCSI BIOS FASTIUTIL For several settings of the SCSI controller on the motherboard the SCSI BIOS utility Fast UTIL is used The SCSI BIOS utility can be started by simple keystrokes during execution of POST without use of a special start disk The SCSI BIOS built in the server is set to the optimum at the shipment Accordingly the SC
153. ction occurs in Save the dump if requested in the system the system by maintenance personnel Save the dump if Save the dump if Executable in the following requested by requested by module state maintenance maintenance e Only the red LED is on personnel personnel However this function Executable in the Executable in the operates only in a fault following module following module state An execution error state this canbe state occurs in any other cases _ Viewed on manager e When only the Only the red LED is on when Screen green LED is on and the module is in one of the e Duplex the module is in following states redundant e Removed configuration state e Broken Only the green LED is e Shot on when the module is Firmware in the following state Completion of update e Duplex e No fault found by diagnosis Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support Installing and Using Utilities 5 61 Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager The Dump button of NEC ESMPRO Manager performs the function of saving dump during system operation 1 Select CPU Module in the FTServer tree 2 3 Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen Click the Dump button in the Maintenance screen for the target component A certain time is required for the dump saving The
154. ction of error If a fault occurs NEC ESMPRO Agent detects the fault and reports the occurrence of the fault to NEC ESMPRO Manager alert report NEC ESMPRO Manager displays the received alert in the alert viewer and also changes the status colors of the server and server component in which the fault occurs This allows you to identify the fault at a glance Further checking the content of the fault and the countermeasures you can take appropriate action for the fault as soon as possible m Types of reported faults The table below lists the typical faults reported by NEC ESMPRO Agent Component Reported information CPU e CPU load is over the threshold e CPU degrading etc Memory ECC 1 bit error detection etc Power supply e Voltage lowering e Power failure etc Temperature Temperature increase in cabinet etc Fan Fan failure decrease in the number of revolutions etc Storage File system usage rate etc LAN e Line fault threshold over e Send retry or send abort threshold over etc Prevention of Server Fault NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function forecasting the occurrence of a fault as countermeasures for preventing faults from occurring NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent can set the threshold for each source in the server If the value of a source exceeds the threshold NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the alert to NEC ESMPRO Manager The preventive maintenance functio
155. d Do not use any damaged cord Replace it with a new one of the same specifications For replacement procedures contact your sales agent 1 10 Precautions for Use Installation Relocation Storage and Connection A WARNING Disconnect the power cord s before installing or removing the equipment Be sure to power off the equipment and unplug its power cords from the wall outlet before installation relocation All voltage is removed only when the power cords are unplugged 4 CAUTION gt gt p Do not hold the front bezel to lift the equipment The equipment weighs around 70 kg depending on its hardware configuration Do not hold the front bezel or it may become detached causing an injury For lifting and moving the equipment remove the mounted modules from the main unit and carry them separately It takes at least two people to carry it hold the equipment firmly by its bottom Do not install the equipment in an unsuitable place Install the equipment in such a place as specified in this User s Guide Avoid the following or there is a risk of a fire a dusty place a humid place located near a boiler etc a place exposed to direct sunlight an unstable place Be careful not to hurt your fingers Exercise great care not to hurt your fingers on the rail when you mount dismount the equipment into from the rack Do not use or store this product in corrosive environment Av
156. d States and other countries Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries VERITAS is a registered trademark of VERITAS Software Corporation in the U S and other countries The VERITAS logo and VERITAS Volume Manager are trademarks of VERITAS Software Corporation Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc ROM DOS is a trademark of Datalight Inc Xeon is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation in the United States QLogic and its logo are trademarks of QLogic Corporation in the United States Fast UTIL is a trademark of QLogic Corporation in the United States All other product brand or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition operating system are called Windows Server for short Microsoft Windows 2000 Server operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system are called Windows 2000 for short Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system vers
157. d then start Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition After starting Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition the drivers are installed automatically IMPORTANT If the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box appears click the Yes button Build a dual LAN configuration See Setting Dual LAN Configuration in the separate volume User s Guide Setup IMPORTANT You can also select Load Balancing in step 3 in Setting Dual LAN Configuration In this case Team 1 Adaptive Load Balancing Mode is added to Network Component Tree Moreover select Stratus AA U51500 10 100 Enet Adapter instead of Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter in Steps 4 and 5 If you build a dual configuration by using two pairs of adapters in Step 5 add an adapter in the same way PCI Board Status LED Indications eae Description Action Green Duplex is specified however Specify duplex AFT ALB the server works in simplex Specify an appropriate driver mode Off PCI board is properly installed In non duplex mode no special problem and operates in non duplex occurs mode AFT ALB Does not depend on simplex or duplex PCI board is installed to operate The system is operating normally in duplex in the duplex mode mode The PCI board is not installed Mount the PCI board correctly yet the PCI board is installed If the PCI board was not mounted there is no incorrectly or the power i
158. d with the network card it will not operate properly PROSetII will not start TIPS To perform this procedure you have to log on the system as an Administrator or a member of the Administrators group After installing the OS follow the steps below to install a driver and establish a dual configuration 1 Mount the N8104 84 adapter to the slot with the same number in PCI module 1 and 2 and then start the Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition After starting Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition the drivers are installed automatically IMPORTANT If the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box appears click the Yes button 8 48 System Upgrade 2 Build a dual LAN configuration See Setting Dual LAN Configuration in the separate volume User s Guide Setup IMPORTANT m You can also select Load Balancing in step 3 in Setting Dual LAN Configuration In this case Team 1 Adaptive Load Balancing Mode is added to Network Component Tree m Moreover select Stratus AA U5700 Fiber Gigabit Server Adapter instead of Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter in Steps 4 and 5 PCI Board Status LED Indications ane Sioh Description Action Green Duplex is specified Specify duplex AFT ALB however the server works Specify an appropriate driver in simplex mode Off PCI board is properly In non duplex mode no special problem installed
159. date by using the ft server utility in the procedure below 1 Click the Properties button in BMC Firmware Update Service The BMC FW Update Service Properties dialog box appears C Program Files BmcT ool BmcFwUp D ata BmcU pLog txt Ta po ike View Browse Installing and Using Utilities 5 71 Refresh of View based on State Change Alert Setting Anew function is supported so that NEC ESMPRO Manager window will be updated on a system state change basis in other words whenever necessary This function is OFF by default See the Setting below about how to turn it ON NEC ESMPRO Manager window is updated by one minute interval polling by default Therefore there is some time lag for NEC ESMPRO Manager to recognize changes in NEC Agent By using this function the time lag can be reduced However it may consume a little bit more network band width since each state change will be notified to NEC ESMPRO Manager as some kind of alert Setting 1 Select All Programs gt Esmpro from the start menu and click Manager Settings E Manager Settings 21 x Polling Interval My Manager feo sec Neighbor Manager feo sec T Enable the State Change Alert Setting Agent Setting Cancel Help Manager Settings dialog box 2 Check Enable the State Change Alert Setting 3 Click the Agent Setting button State Change Alert Setting 21x Server List Server Name Status
160. ded there is no real problem on operation by the above errors or warnings Source iANSMiniport EventID 14 Description Secondary Adapter has rejoined the Team Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter Source iANSMiniport EventID 15 Description Adapter link up Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter Source iANSMiniport EventID 17 Description Team X An adapter has re established link Network connection has been restored ESMCpuPert related logs are recorded in the system event log If NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get performance information from the OS due to a temporary resource shortage or high load ratio on the system it will record the following event log However there is no real problem on operation In the description Y and Xrepresent alphanumeric characters Source ESMCpuPerf EventID 9005 Description Cannot get system performance information now YYYY Code xxxx If NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get information it will treat the load ratio as 0 So if NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get information continuously the CPU load ratio may appear lower than the actual value Troubleshooting 7 35 EvntAgnt log is recorded in the application event log This event does not have any influence on the system not on SNMP services Thus no measurement is required Source EvntAgnt ID 1003 Description TraceFileName parameter not located in registry Default trace file used is S
161. description of LED indications see LEDs in Chapter 2 and Setup of Optional PCI Board later in this chapter 8 40 System Upgrade Replacing PCI Board Follow the procedure below to replace the failed PCI board 1 10 11 Check the PCI board LED and identify the failed PCI board When the PCI board is failed or incorrectly installed the two LEDs associated with the PCI board slot are being turned off Remove the PCI module Remove the PCI module s top cover Remove the PCI board retainer bracket to dismount the PCI board In the case of a long board unscrew the guide at the other edge and slide it to the front of the board Replace the board and fasten it Install the PCI module s top cover Install the PCI module Do not close the release lever yet Connect the network cable and option cables Close the release lever The installed PCI module will start automatically Secure the release lever with the setscrew Check the PCI module status LED and PCI board status LED For description of LED indications see LEDs in Chapter 2 and Setup of Optional PCI Board later in this chapter System Upgrade 8 41 Setup of Optional PCI Board IMPORTANT m To enable the fault tolerant feature of the optional device the identical devices must be installed to the same slots in groups 1 and 2 respectively m A video board is already installed to slot 1 as standard configuration This b
162. device compliant with NEC Express5800 ft series Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed O Is the power on order correct When the server has any external devices connected power on the external devices first then the server O Did you install drivers for connected optional devices Some optional devices require specific device drivers Refer to the manual that comes with the device to install its driver Some optional devices connected to the serial port require settings for I O port address and operation mode Refer to the manual that comes with the device to configure the device lt Menu to check Advanced Peripheral Configuration gt O Is SCSI controller including options configuration correct If the sever has an optional SCSI controller board and SCSI devices are hooked up to the server make correct settings by the SCSI controller board s SCSI BIOS utility For details see manuals included with the SCSI controller board O Is SCSI device configuration correct If external SCSI devices are connected to the server you need to make settings of SCSI ID and terminal resistance For details see manuals included with the SCSI device CPU not in Dual mode Check if the memory configuration is correct Check if third party CPUs or memory DIMM are used Disk not in Dual mode Unless you perform mirroring including reconfiguration after failed disk
163. dition Error Messages scscssccssssceseecesecneeeeeneeeeeens 7 21 Server Management Application Error Message scscsscssescsseeeceseeeeesecaeeseeneeeeceaeseeeeeeaees 7 22 SOLVING PROBEEMS risma a a tise Nioae eves has E e Sari eR ait 7 23 Problems with NEC Express5800 ft Series ccsccesssssssecseeeeesecseeecseeeeceaseecsaecaeesecneteeenaeeees 7 23 BV Gn LOS enren a r a seu aseeesemsbeduet E A E A AE S 7 33 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ee eeieecseecseesecneeeeceseeeceeesaeeeesaecaeesecnereeenaeeees 7 36 Problems with Master Control Menu cseecessscsseeecssecseeeeceesecsaeeessecsaeeeesaecaeesesnereeenaeenes 7 37 Problems with NEC ESMPRO viat a E ponsi sea e A AE E E EEE E EA 7 38 COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS Kopirni n ETE E E E E 7 46 Collection of Event Lops ian paer e EE E aE KA E E E AEN 7 46 Collection of Configuration Information cece esessecseesecseeeecseeeessecseesecnersecsaeeeeeeenaeeees 7 47 Collection of Diagnostic Information by Dr Watson seecsescsseeeesseceesecnerseceeeeeeaeeaseees 7 47 COLLECTION OF THE MEMORY DUMP iorri intiera e o E E A e s 7 48 Chapter 8 System Upgrade ccccscccseceeeeeeeeeeeeceeseseeeenseeeeseaeseseaeenseeeeeeeeeseeseneeeenseeeees 8 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS neracia iai tenes nishichien Aric ates a E EAR EE aad 8 2 ANTES TATIC MEASURES patoi ich hier cestiies nantes seb a he hdtv A sui a a A sue n aea 8 3 PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE 10 ccecccssecssee
164. dump is stored as SystemDrive NECDump MEMORY DMP on the managed server The result of the dump saving is reported by the NEC Express5800 ft series as an alert Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager fie Ede yew Toots be amman af la 2 2 I mel SONI EMRO MIB 75 CPU ModdoliD 0 Bing Up Bang Down Pross the fring Up button to bring the CPU Beng Jodule up press the Bring Dew button to Lowour dover n Me bring the CPU Module Pross the Diagnostica baton to Disonostics TEE Nonna Warning MI Atrormal Maintenance screen of CPU module CPU Module Maintenance izj 5 62 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in ft server utility Select the target CPU module by using the ft server utility 2 Check the current state of the target CPU module with the LEDs Select the dump acquisition me Harvest button thod with Dump of the target CPU module and click the A certain time is required for the dump acquisition The dump is stored as SystemDrive NECDump MEMORY DMP on the server The result of the dump acquisit ion can be confirmed in the event log Sample screen of ft server utility MTOF Chea MTOP mormaer is cioara Bang Upiinng Doun CPU modda i brought up or dovan Diagroatiee intonation Sia chagrovince of CPU modde B Phoen ServeBIOS Veesion 200 PN 40 eet G20 Addtionaintonmation NEC MOS Version 011 0 Capes Jump Seats The pamary modde te veetihe G Save mamay A
165. e For maintenance use only AC inlet B for Group1 PC socket for plugging a power cord for Group1 If you desire to make the PCI module for Group1 primary use this inlet to connect the power cord first Serial port B connector Connected to a device that has a serial interface For maintenance use only USB connectors Tower model from top USB1 USB2 Rack mount model from left USB1 USB2 Connected to devices that support the USB interface Connect the keyboard with mouse to USB 1 connect the USB floppy disk drive to USB 2 AC inlet A for Group2 PC socket for plugging a power cord for Group2 If you desire to make the PCI module for Group2 primary use this inlet to connect the power cord first Monitor connector Connected to the display unit SCSI connector Used for connecting external SCSI devices PCI module status LED 1 See LEDs in this chapter for details PCI module status LED 2 See LEDs in this chapter for details PCI board slot status LED Slot1 See LEDs in this chapter for details PCI board slot status LED Slot2 See LEDs in this chapter for details PCI board slot status LED Slot3 See LEDs in this chapter for details LINK ACT LED See LEDs in this chapter for details LAN connector 1 A connector for 1000BASE T 100BASE TX and 10BASE T Connected to the network system on LAN 1000 100 10 LED See LEDs in this chapter for details LINK ACT LED
166. e OS Otherwise the OS will boot up after Specified boot timeout Boot Monitoring 1 10 20 Specify the boot monitoring time out period This Time out Period option is displayed only when Enabled is selected for Boot Monitoring If you specify a shorter period of time to Boot Monitoring Time out Period the time until rebooting can be reduced When there is no external device connected it is possible to set a shorter period of time but 3 minutes or longer is recommended Appropriate value for the setting varies depending on your environment Therefore when changing this setting evaluate it thoroughly after constructing the environment POST Pause Disabled Enable or disable the POST monitoring feature Monitoring Enabled during boot up restriction 4 16 System Configuration Option Parameter Description Your Setting POST Pause 1 8 20 Specify the POST monitoring time period during Monitoring boot up restriction Time out Factory set IMPORTANT When connecting a Fibre Channel disk array device change the set value of Boot Monitoring Time out Period depending on the wait time for the completion of the Fibre Channel disk array device initialization Ex If the wait time for the completion of the Fibre Channel disk array device initialization is 4 minutes change the value of Boot Monitoring Time out Period from 10 default to 14 minutes
167. e RDR function 7 46 Troubleshooting COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS In the event of trouble you can get information in the procedures described below IMPORTANT m You can perform the procedures described below only when you are asked by your maintenance personnel to get trouble logs m When the system restarts after the trouble it may show a message that there is a shortage of virtual memory However continue the system startup If you reset and restart the system you cannot get correct information Collection of Event Logs Collect the logs of various events that have occurred in the NEC Express5800 ft series IMPORTANT If a STOP error or system error has occurred or the system has stalled restart the system and then start collecting event logs 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel gt Administrative Tools Event Viewer 2 Select the type of the log to be collected Application Log contains events related to the applications that were active at occurrence of the events Security Log contains security related events System Log contains events that occurred in system components of Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition 3 Click Save Log File As in the Action menu r Event iewer Action View e mle System L 19 Fi New Log View Clear all Events Rename Refresh Export List Properties Help
168. e board PCI module board or added PCI board with new one Troubleshooting 7 21 Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Error Messages If a fatal error e g a STOP or system error occurs after Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition starts the screen of the display unit turns blue and displays detailed error messages STOP C000021A FATAL SYSTEM ERROR The Windows logon process System process terminated Unexpectedly with a status of 0x00000001 0x00000000 0x00000000 The system has been shutdown The screen crashdump initializing miniport driver background is blue crashdump dumping physical memory to disk Take notes of the messages displayed on the screen and call your sales agent If a fatal error occurs the server automatically executes memory dump processing and saves the memory dump data in an arbitrary directory See the end of this chapter The maintenance personnel of your sales agent may ask you to provide this data Thus copy the file into a medium e g DAT to be ready to pass it to the maintenance personnel IMPORTANT A message may appear indicating that virtual memory is insufficient when you restart the system after a STOP or system error has occurred Ignore the message and start the system TIPS Before copying the file into a medium start the Event Viewer to confirm that the Save Dump event log is included in the system event logs and the memory dump has been saved
169. e following table lists the meaning of beep codes and measures against them Beep code Meaning Action 1 2 2 3 ROM checksum Contact your sales agent to replace the CPU module error board 1 1 2 4 ROMEXEC code Check the installation of DIMM board error If the error persists contact your sales agent to replace 1 3 1 1 DRAM refresh test the DIMM or CPU module board error 1 3 1 3 Keyboard controller Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back on If the error error persists request your sales agent to replace the CPU module board 1 3 3 1 Failed to detect Check the installation of DIMM board memory If the error persists contact your sales agent to replace Or DIMM board the DIMM or CPU module board type is incorrect 1 3 3 2 Initial setting error of the POST memory manager 1 3 4 1 RAM address error 1 3 4 3 RAM low byte data error 1 4 1 1 RAM high byte data error 2 2 3 1 Illegal interrupt test Contact your sales agent error 2 1 2 3 Copyright check error 1 2 Failed to initialize Check the motherboard installation if nothing is the video BIOS displayed on the display unit If the error persists contact your sales agent to replace the CPU module Failed to initialize board the option ROM Check the PCI board installation if the Option ROM of Failed to expand the the added PCI board is not displayed If the error option ROM persists contact your sales agent to replace the CPU modul
170. e lever When the lever is locked you will hear a click sound IMPORTANT Be careful not to pinch your finger s between the lever and handle TIPS Check the hook of the lever is engaged with the frame Connect all the power cords Press the POWER switch to turn on the system power lt Tower model gt Close the front bezel and lock it with the security key lt Rack mount model gt Install the upper and lower panels and lock the front bezel with the security key A while after Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition is started New Hardware Detection wizard is displayed Select Make known drivers for this device displayed and select a driver from the list and click Next Check that Stratus Dual Initiated disk Device is displayed in the list and click Next repeatedly until Finish is displayed Set the dual disk configuration see Chapter 3 System Upgrade 8 9 Removing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Follow the procedure below to remove the hard disk IMPORTANT Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before starting installing or removing options 1 Shutdown Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition The system turns off automatically 2 Disconnect all the power cords from the power outlet 3 lt Tower model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it lt Rack mount model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remov
171. e on mounted side e Illuminating red Yet to be duplicated e Blinking in red In the process of duplication e Off Duplication is completed See LEDs in Chapter 2 General Description for details of the BMC status LED Memory dump debug information cannot be collected at a failure occurrence O Is there any available space at the memory dump storage location Specify a drive in which there is an available storage space of greater than a memory size on the server plus 12 MB more than 2048 12MB if a memory size is more than 2GB For details see Set Memory Dump Debug Information of Step 12 Set up Failure Management in Chapter 4 Windows Setup in the separate User s Guide for setup O Is Initial size of the paging file of the OS partition smaller than Recommended If a value smaller than the Recommended value is set for Initial Size of the paging file accurate memory dump debug information may not be collected Be sure to create the file in the above size in the OS partition For details see Set Memory Dump Debug Information of Step 12 Set up Failure Management in Chapter 4 Windows Setup in the separate User s Guide for setup Troubleshooting 7 33 Event Log Perflib related logs are recorded in the application event log when system starting When system is starting Perflib log may be registered to the application log The detailed informatio
172. e only optional devices and cables designated by NEC Repair of the server due to malfunctions failures or damage resulted from installing such devices or cables will be charged 8 2 System Upgrade SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly A WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of death or serious personal injury See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in A Chapter 1 for details gt O Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive Do not remove the lithium battery Disconnect the power plug before working with the server gt A CAUTION fp S Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of fire personal injury or property damage See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY A A in Chapter 1 for details Do not install or remove components by a single person Do not install the server leaving the cover removed Make sure to complete component installation Do not pinch your finger s High temperature System Upgrade 8 3 ANTI STATIC MEASURES The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity Avoid failures caused by static electricity when installing or removing any optional devices m Wear wrist straps arm belts or anti static gloves Wear wrist straps on your wrists If no wrist strap is avai
173. e the upper and lower panels 4 Push the lever of the hard disk to unlock the handle a aA 5 Hold the handle and hard disk to pull them off e is 6 Install the dummy tray in an empty tray according SS to procedures described in Installation Make sure to install the dummy tray in the empty slot to improve the cooling effect within the device 8 10 System Upgrade Replacing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk If the hard disk fails it should be replaced with new device with the server powered on IMPORTANT Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before starting installing or removing options You can replace disks during continuous operation Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 1 Locate the failed hard disk When a hard disk fails the DISK LED on the hard disk drive s handle illuminates green while the other mirrored disk illuminates amber The DISK Power Access LED of the amber lit disk also illuminates amber TIPS Even if a hard disk fails the DISK LEDs may not illuminate as described above See How to Locate Failed Disks in Chapter 3 to identify failed disks Referencing the steps in Removing the hard disk remove the failed hard disk No need to shutdown Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Refer to the steps in Installing the hard disk to install a new hard disk TIPS m The
174. e two CD ROM drives only the one on the active primary PCI module can be used the module with the lit POWER Switch LED 7 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay Slots for adding hard disks On a tower model they are called Slots 1 2 and 3 from the bottom On a rack mount model they are called Slots 1 2 and 3 from the left Slots of the same number are mirrored between the groups 1 and 2 8 DUMP switch A switch for outputting a memory image from the kernel to a file 9 DISK LED green amber An LED on the hard disk Blinks in green while the hard disk is accessed and turns amber when operating in simplex mode If one of the mirrored hard disks fails the failed disk s LED turns green and the other disk s LED turns amber CD ROM Drive 1 Status LED An LED that stays on while the loaded CD ROM is accessed 2 CD tray eject bution A button for ejecting the CD tray 3 Manual release hole When the eject button does not work insert a metal pin into this hole to forcefully eject the CD tray General Description 2 11 Rear View CPU module for Group1 PCI module for Group2 CPU module for Group2 PCI module for Group1 RA 7 haar O ys 7 th pau EET EZ CPU module for Group1 BS CPU module for Group2 amp w p Rack mount model 2 12 General Description 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Serial port A connector Connected to a device that has a serial interfac
175. ecneeeecsececesecaeeeceaecaeesecneveeeeaeeees 8 4 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE rrn adia eeeh eias Baldi bles antago eats 8 5 Installing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive sssi esisiini esensi desetini aeres cishi serei isikie 8 7 Removing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive eeesseseeseeeeeseeseresssesrereeresesestererretssrsesretreretsesenrereeeseees 8 9 Replacing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive eeeeeeesesecsseeeceeceeecseeseesecnessccsaeeeeaecaeesecnereeenaeeees 8 10 CPU MODULE annan ain astata ioa alah aeaa a a Ea die Meus d Ee E EEEE E 8 11 Removing CPU Mod le s cas scscesctes setiersetnsgs seevousenions gabsdesbvicotenn E duiteoreeedebtewsrases 8 12 Installing CPU Module iniuriis a a a A R R Sh 8 14 DIMM einn r a a E A E E ash RE E SNS 8 16 Trista ing DIMM srir orinn aa e E AE E R A R E E 8 18 Removing DIMM icrai a R E E e R EN 8 19 Replacing DIMM 5504 ciisseunsastensatiasesutertnnstbpvshesresesacth A R r A E A e N 8 20 PROCESSOR CPU ennir a N a A a RE ASES 8 21 Tristallat on ae ern r r e AE E E E SER E bier R ulteua ads 8 22 Removing CPU haenen eer a e a E denen hile A nie 8 25 Replacing2CPU oain e E E E E AA 8 26 viii PCI MODULE ai a a a e E E A e dite dahil T AS 8 27 Precautions antinen e a e A e E E A A E E EE 8 28 Removing PCL Module c cessssnibaniiciennimnuiondima T E AT 8 29 Installing PCL Module meoin pa ea aer diene abe aime deat hie 8 31 PEL BOARD jobs alaalihAnnisaintiondea tiie damn E E a EE e E EASES 8 33 Inst llins PCL Board ti
176. ect may fall off to cause injuries damage to hardware and or a fire Do not leave the CD tray ejected Dust may get in the equipment to cause malfunction The ejected tray may also become a cause of injuries Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the equipment Turn off your cellular phone or pager when you use the equipment Their radio waves may cause the equipment to malfunction 1 14 Precautions for Use Rack mount Model 4 CAUTION Do not attempt to install the server yourself To avoid a risk of injuries users should not attempt to install the equipment into a rack Installation should be performed by trained maintenance personnel lt For Maintenance Personnel Only gt Do not remove and carry the equipment with modules mounted When you remove this product from the rack and carry it remove all modules that are mounted first Do not install the equipment in such a manner that its weight is imposed on a single place To distribute the weight attach stabilizers or install two or more racks It may fall down to cause injuries It takes at least two people to mount doors and trays to a rack You may drop some parts to cause a breakage or injuries Do not pull a device out of the rack if it is unstable Before pulling out a device make sure that the rack is fixed by stabilizers or quake resistant engineering Do not leave two or more devices pulled out from the rack If you pull out tw
177. ed for 10 to 20 seconds Please wait Ke QLogic QLA23xx PCI Fibre Channel Adapter cocpyint dil To C AWINNT system32_ 9 Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New This wizard will start up as many time Hardware Wizard installed Fibre Channel controllers Re 1 to 10 The wizard has finished installing the software for lt QLogic QLA23xx PCI Fibre Channel Adapter Click Finish to close the wizard 10 Select Control Panel Computer Management FFE Administrative Tools FComip iputer Management Devig eet Ee 2 Local a H Computer and confirm that ther ae aey E z Disk drives jared Folders Ej Display adapters Qlogic QLA23xx PCI 4 ah Users and Groups H DVD CD ROM drives Channel Adapter sas Stir FF gtes and Alerts i Floppy disk drives Device Manager E E Human Interface Devices Fibre Channel Contro BEL 4 4 IDE ATA ATAPI controllers atts Storage a Keyboards SCSI and RAID cont oll js Defragmenter H Mice and other pointing devices isk Management E E Monitors E EJ Services and Applications H E Network adapters IMPORTANT m StoragePathSavior is required to connect m PortDuplexManager is required to conne N8803 031F eee 110F using E arty video and game RRA Yok a rf eesi So AE io m Insert Fibre Channel C htrollers after the installation of OS is com p leted Use Fibre Channel ControHersn patrsinsert a Fibre
178. ed in the event log Stop Stop before replacing components 1 Select the target component by using the ft server utility Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs 3 Click the Down button of the target component A certain time is required for the start The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component The result of the start operation is registered in the event log Sample screen of ft server utility Bi CPU Module 1D 0 ft server utility MTBF Clear MTBF information is cleared Bring Up Bring Down CPU module is brought up or down Diagnostics Information p Fiwmware Jump Switch Start diagnostics of CPU module Start firmware update Version Phoenix ServerBIO S Version 2 00 PB 4 0 rel 6 20 The primary module is switched Additionallnformation NEC BIOS Version 0 11 0 Express 5800 320Lb JumpSwitch Dump Save memory dump of the stopped module Harvest C Harvest memory dump of the current system without stopping it Ready Status Duplex Check and Clear of MTBF Information Installing and Using Utilities 5 49 The MTBF information of a component can be viewed or cleared initialized NEC Express5800 ft series manages the MTBF mean time between failure of each component If a fault occurs in a component the NEC Express5800 ft series calculates
179. ee this chapter before deciding that it is a breakdown Chapter 8 System Upgrade This chapter describes procedures to add options and precautions See also this chapter when you replace failed components Appendix A Specifications This appendix lists specifications of the product Appendix B I O Port Addresses This appendix lists factory assigned I O port addresses Additional symbols The following symbols are used throughout this User s Guide in addition to the caution symbols describe at the beginning IMPORTANT Important points or instructions to keep in mind when using the server or software z Something you need to make sure when using the server of CHECK software TIPS Helpful information something useful to know Accessories This product is shipped with various accessories See the attached list to make sure everything is included and check the individual items If some component is missing or damaged contact your sales agent Keep the accessories in a safe place You will need them when you perform setup addition of options or replacement of failed components To check NEC EXPRESSBUILDER components see the attached list Be sure to fill out and mail the software registration card that is attached to your operating system Make backup copies of included floppy disks if any Keep the original disks as the master disks use these copies in operation Improper use of an included floppy disk or CD ROM may alter your
180. een Remote Control Manager will appear 2 Select Environment Direct Connection Setting from the File menu of NEC MWA to display the Direct Connection dialog box Configure the following settings lt Direct Connection gt Port No COM port on the management PC to be connected Baud Rate 19200 Flow Control None 3 From MWaA s File menu select Configuration command to open Configuration dialog box Select New to display Select a model dialog box 5 Check Write to FD and select an applicable model to open Configuration for ft Server dialog box Ex The model name is printed on the front cover like NEC Express5800 320Lc or NEC Express5800 320Lc R 6 On the Configuration for ft Server dialog box specify register configuration information including the names of computers to be managed and then write the information to FD as the following filename lt Filename gt CSL_LESS CFG 7 Right click the server name to open the pop up menu and select Property command to open Property dialog box 8 When the Property dialog box appears specify the items as follows lt ID page gt Connection mode COM COM Direct cross cable 9 Right click the server name to open the pop up menu and select Open Remote Console to open MWA Remote Console After checking to see if the server window is open on MWA Remote Console click the Connect button 10 Hook up the manageme
181. elow regarding the correspondence between the slot and the RDR Utility lt Correspondence between the HDD slot and the RDR Utility gt Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Group 1 Group 2 El PCI module 1 PCI module Group1 E SCSI Enclosure Slot 1 Slott 2 HarddiskO LUN1 PLEX1 Slot2 E Slol Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 PLEX1 r Slot3 S Slot 3 Disk Harddisk2 LUN3 PLEX1 rh PCr modile 2 PCI module Group2 SCSI Enclosure Slot Slot 1 Slot2 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 PLEX2 Slot 2 i i Slot3 Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 PLEX2 Slot 3 Disk Harddisk2 LUN3 PLEX2 E Logical Disk Information RDR virtual Disk 1 RDR virtual Disk 2 RDR virtual Disk 3 3 32 Windows Setup and Operation 6 The mirroring between the HDDs in the corresponding slots will start Confirm the Disk LED and the HDD status change as follows The Disk LED of the HDD Transition of the Disk LED Replaced HDD Green gt Green The HDD in the corresponding slot Green gt Amber Op State State and Op State Reason of the HDDs and the RDR Virtual Disk viewed from the RDR Utility Op State State Op State Reason Replaced HDD Syncing None The HDD in the corresponding Simplex None slot RDR Virtual Disk Simplex None The mirroring is completed when the Disk LED and the HDD status have changed to the following status The Disk LED of the HDD Transition of the Disk
182. emory U Err 22 Green Blink CPU module 2 DIMM 2 2 bit error emory U Err 23 Green Blink CPU module 2 DIMM 3 2 bit error emory U Err 24 Green Blink CPU module 2 DIMM 4 2 bit error emory U Err 25 Green Blink CPU module 2 DIMM 5 2 bit error emory U Err 26 Green Blink CPU module 2 DIMM 6 2 bit error 0 OS shutdown Alm Off Shutdown due to a timeout Contact your sales agent error of the watch dog timer fatal error P Power off Off The DC power is turned off 5 S SSR Processing Off Reboot processing for DUMP is being collected recovery W WDT timeout Off Timeout error of the watch dog Contact your sales agent timer fatal error 7 14 Troubleshooting POST Error Messages Powering on the server automatically starts the self diagnostic program POST Power On Self Test When POST detects any error it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors Phoenix BIOS 4 0 Release 6 0 XXXX CPU Pentium III XXX MHz 0640K System RAM Passed 0127M Extended RAM Passed WARNING 02B0 Diskette drive A error press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to SETUP Message indicating a floppy disk drive error TIPS For error messages on optional PCI board refer to the manual provided with those options On screen error message Cause Action 0200 Failure Fixed Disk e Configuration error in Setup
183. en appears Installing and Using Utilities 5 5 Setup The setup program is exclusively used for your server to perform automatic setup operations within the range from the settings of internal parameters and states of hardware to the installation of Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition and several utilities Use the setup program if hard disks are used with a partition different from that at purchase or if OS is reinstalled This feature carries out the complicated setup IMPORTANT m To install Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition in your server use the setup program excluding the case of performing the setup for the first time after the purchase Any other methods cannot install Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition in the server m Because the setup is started from its first stage the execution of the setup causes the data in the hard disk to be erased 5 6 Installing and Using Utilities Tools The Tools Menu is used to start each of the several utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM individually for manual setup by operator Use the Tools Menu to provide settings that the setup program cannot do automatically or detailed settings Also use the Tools Menu when system diagnosis is performed or a support disk is created The items in the Tools Menu are described below NEC Express5800 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ver3 xxxx x Copyright C NEC Corporation 2004 Tools Menu RAID Board None
184. enance Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI enclosure electronics to be viewed or cleared See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for clearing the MTBF information on the SCSI electronics enclosure m SCSI Slot General Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI slot to be viewed IMPORTANT You need to be aware of the status of hard disk during the mirror creation For details see Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk in Supplement Installing and Using Utilities 5 35 SCSI Slot Maintenance Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI slot to be viewed or cleared See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for clearing the MTBF information on the SCSI slot Tow ten tme ILOA O0 0A we pa et aes wow one Monitoring Mirror Disk To monitor the mirror disk components see the Mirror Disk tree To view information on Mirror Disk tree select Mirror Disk under FTServer tree You can see the redundancy status of the mirrors and the device IDs of the SCSI slots into which these hard disk components are connected Mirror Disk 5 36 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring Hard Disk To monitor the hard disks and detect disk failures at an early stage use the NEC ESMPRO Manager and Agent You can see configurations and information of hard disk in the Data Viewer Monitoring Operations This section describe
185. endent maintenance program When you are unable to start the OS dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem the Off line Maintenance Utility can be used IMPORTANT mThe Off line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales agent The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility but do not attempt to use the utility by yourself Contact your sales agent and follow instructions mStarting the Off line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways NEC Express5800 ft series does not support the feature to start the Off line Maintenance Utility from the maintenance partition m From the CD ROM Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and reboot the system After the menu is displayed on the screen select Tools Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD ROM m From the floppy disk Set the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk The Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting Tools Create Support FD on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Features of Off line Maintenance Utility The
186. epeatedly output in one second when 10 sec a key is pressed Keyboard 0 25 sec Select a period before a key character Auto repeat Delay 0 5 sec starts repeated 0 75 sec 1 sec Factory set System Configuration 4 19 Security Move the cursor onto Security to display the Security menu WET Advanced System Hardware Boot Select Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password and press Enter to display the following pop up screen The screen below shows when Set Supervisor Password is selected Main Advanced System Hardware Boot Set Supervisor Password Enter new password Confirm new Password Set a password on this pop up screen Enter a password of up to seven alphanumeric characters and symbols from the keyboard 4 20 System Configuration IMPORTANT m User password setup is not available before Supervisor password setup m Do not set any password before installing the OS See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Supervisor Clear Indicates Supervisor password setup status view Password is Set only User Password Clear Indicates User password setup status view only is Set Set Supervisor Up to 7 Press Enter to display the supervisor password Password alphanumeric entry screen With the supervisor password all characters SETUP menus are available for access This op
187. er C14 PCI error status register C49 Address amp status control C4A Rise time counter control C52 General register GPMs C6C ISA wait register C6F Other control registers CA2 CA3 IPMI IMPI KCS interface 1F0 1F7 or BARO EDMA2 compatible mode secondary command block register BAR or 376 EDMA2 compatible mode secondary command block register B 2 I O Port Addresses Address Chip in Use CA4 CA5 IPMI SMI interface CA6 CA 7 IPMI SCI SW1 interface CD6 Power management index register CD7 Power management data register CF8 CFC PCI configuration space CF9 Reset control F50 F58h General chipset BAR4 00 0F EDMA2 PCI base address register 4 Expressed in hexadecimal digits T O port addresses of PCI devices are specified based on the type and number of PCI devices
188. er limit CPU2 12ss A Amber Blink CPU module 2 12 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 12ss A Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 12v A Amber Blink CPU module 2 12 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU2 12v A Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU2 12v A Amber Blink CPU module 2 12 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 12v A Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 1 5vA Amber Blink CPU module 2 1 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU2 1 5vA Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 1 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU2 1 5vA Amber Blink CPU module 2 1 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 1 5vA Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 1 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 2 5vA Amber Blink CPU module 2 2 5 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales 00 lower limit agent CPU2 2 5vA Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 02 alarm lower limit CPU2 2 5vA Amber Blink CPU module 2 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU2 2 5vA Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 2 5 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit Troubleshooting 7 11 Indication sausi E2 Se a Explanation Procedure CPU2 2 5VcAl m Amber
189. erance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhances the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Configuring dual LAN TIPS To set dual LAN configuration log on as Administrator or a member of the group Administrators 1 Display the Intel R PROSet II dialog box 2 Start one of the start menu modes below Standard start menu mode Click Intel R PROSet II in Control Panel from the Start menu Classic start menu mode 1 Select Control Panel from Settings of the Start menu 2 Double click the Intel R PROSet I icon 3 Select Network Components from Network Component Tree The pop up menu appears Select Fault Tolerance from Create Team Network Gamnanents Fault Tolerarce Load Balancing Fast EtherChanne Lirk Aggregation IEEE 802 3ad Create Team P 10100 Enet Adap Windows Setup and Operation 3 35 Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode is sans to iver Component Tree ll NEG emb on os 00 Enet Adapter gt NEG emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter 2 mk Team 1 Adaptive Fault Tolerance Mode a Member Ad
190. erant Virtual 69000 Videos will appear Do not remove them Otherwise the connected PCI modules will be disconnected forcefully and the system may operate normally Machine repeats rebooting at startup O Is CHKDSK executed at machine startup Open the utility of the BIOS setup at rebooting and change the following settings Change BIOS settings Change Advanced Monitoring Configuration Boot Monitoring to Disable For details see page 4 15 Monitoring Configuration After completion of CHKDSK restart the machine and change the above setting back to Enable and continue the operation CHKDSK is executed in the following conditions 1 CHKDSK is scheduled to be executed at next system startup 2 Corruption of file system is detected since the previous startup until shutdown 3 Inconsistency corruption of file system is detected while mouting at system startup O _sIs the value of Boot Monitoring Time out Period in the BIOS setting appropriate 7 30 Troubleshooting Change the value of Boot Monitoring Time out Period to suit your environment For details see page 4 15 Monitoring Configuration Mouse Does Not Move Smoothly And Drawing Graphics Takes Time O Is the hardware acceleration set to Full Set it to None Make sure to set the hardware acceleration to None in NEC Express5800 ft series Default None How to check and change the hardware acceleratio
191. error e Configuration error in SETUP e CPU PCI module board is faulty e Reset the setting by selecting Yes at Reset Configuration Data e Replace the CPU PCI module board 0B42 Resource Conflict Configuration error in SETUP Correct device configuration in SETUP 0B43 Warning IRQ not Configuration error in SETUP Correct settings in SETUP configured 0B44 Expansion Rom not Configuration error in SETUP In SETUP disable initialized decompression of expansion ROM on unnecessary optional PCI cards 0B45 System Configuration Data Write error e Configuration error in SETUP e CPU PCI module board is faulty e Reset the setting by selecting Yes at Reset Configuration Data e Replace the CPU PCI module board 0B47 Missing date and time synchronization The date and time are incorrect due to a communication error between BMCs e Restart the system e Re set the date and time in SETUP If the error persists replace the PCI module board 0B49 BMC Issued Reset Command but failed System Reset e System cannot be reset by BMC s reset command Replace PCI module board OB6E DIMMs are installed out of order e DIMM is faulty Replace DIMM 0B70 The error occurred during temperature sensor reading e SMBus device is faulty e SMBus is faulty Replace the CPU PCI module or back panel board Troubleshooting 7 17 On scree
192. es 5 17 Data Viewer The data viewer indicates the server source configuration information in the Explorer format In addition it changes the status color of the failed server component This enables you to identify the failed portion Be E E Enclosure B Software H N Network m Expansion Bus Device BIOS ocal Polling System ce ef Tune sos1 FTServer ce E3 JE CPU Module PCI Module SCSI Enclosure Mirror Disk For Help press F1 m Alert Viewer I O Device E Expansion Bus Device BIOS Enclosure Local Polling Software ka File System MMB Normal Warning MEM Abnormal 7 The Alert Viewer manages fault reports sent from servers together A fault occurred in a server is immediately reported to the Alert Viewer The Administrator can recognize all faults on the network instantly kee Alert iewer File Edit View Tools Help BEE HE 2 aie Severity All Component All z Server Recovery mgr_TUNE MISTRATUS_MSG_STATE_REMO saSTRATUS_MSG_STATE_ONLINE dsTRATUS_MSG_STATE_REMO JsTRATUS_MSG_STATE_DUPLEX STRATUS_MSG_STATE_EMPTY RATUS_MSG_STATE_ONLINE RATUS_MSG_STATE_EMPTY STRATUS _MSG_STATE_ONLINE CEEEEEEEEEEEE FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server FT Server Network FT Server mgr_TUNE mgr_TUNE mgr_TUNE mgr _TUNE mgr _TUNE mgr_TUNE mgr_TUNE
193. escribes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM that comes with your server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 5 2 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER integrated setup software can automatically detect the hardware connected to an NEC Express5800 ft series machine to advance the processing The hardware subject to setup with the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER should have the same configuration as that for operation Start Menu The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provides three procedures to start the server as described below The menus and items appearing on the screen vary depending on the procedures Booting starting the server from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM For the procedure insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the NEC Express5800 ft series and start the NEC Express5800 ft series from the system in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When the NEC Express5800 ft series is started by using this procedure the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu shown on the right appears Perform the NEC Express5800 ft series setup from this menu IMPORTANT m Don t use this CD ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800 ft series with which it is packaged including other NEC Express5800 models Otherwise a breakdown may result m The execution of Setup of the menu causes the OS installed previously to be erased OS must also be reinstalled See NEC EXPRESSBUIL
194. eserrrereteesesrereerse 2 28 Power QON sererai ie e paaa s a ra E EEE OA EEEE EKR ESEE AARE E E E 2 30 Power OFF aee e E A EE E E E EEE S EE a E oie 2 31 POST Check riaa eT EEE E EE hat E E O E E E E E E T AA 2 32 Floppy Disk Drive assists irei a EE E E E ala oh abi AEEA 2 35 CD ROM DAVE elre aiid eee AEE E ennai et E EEE E E T A 2 38 Chapter 3 Windows Setup and Operation cccsssccsseeeeeseeesseesesneeenseeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeees 3 1 DISK OPERATIONS grinci 8 ge Bhp neea Aaah E E pd asl Ra 3 2 Disks Operations Using Disk Management eseeesseeeeseseereeresesrseserreererssssesretreretesrseseerreesees 3 3 Disk Operations Using the RDR Rapid Disk Resync Function eeseeeeeeseeerereereerrrereen 3 15 vi Replacing Failed Hard Disk Drives 0 0 00 cceescsssecsseeecesecseeseesecaeesecneesecsaeeeesaecasesesneseenaeeees 3 24 CHANGE DRIVE LETTER orata a a E e a onan as 3 33 DUAL LAN CONFIGURATION intti t onae a a E E s 3 34 OVELVIEW te Tree aa T Anibal ine sian any aime A E EE RETES E EE 3 34 C nfie rne dyal LAN erossa aeiae e a Eae a aE E A E E A TE 3 34 Removing dual LAN eean esis or ai ee E E E E ERE N aa 3 37 CHECK THE DUPLICATING OPERATION OF MODULES eeeeeeeeeeeerrrrrererrersrereeesee 3 40 Evaluate Startup and Stop of PCI Modules 00 cece cessecseesecsseeecsseceeesecseveesaeeecsaeeaseseenetaes 3 40 Evaluate Start and Stop of CPU Modulles e ec ecesesccssecseesecneseecseeeceecsaseecaeeaeeseeneeeeenaeeees 3 43
195. esessseseesesrstserresrsrsrsesrerrereersesesreerereesseseere 6 2 Makine Backup Copies aeeie n e aa e e ear a e E a EE sotto e EE E EESE 6 3 vii Cleaning enn Btodaia tod aia le ate E EE A wien a E EE 6 3 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS apie eaa aE E A E a E E e 6 7 Test leM S irite ei poser ea E aea E e E EE TETEE E AE E e 6 7 Startup and Exit of System Diagnosis s ssssesseseseseseeeteresssrstsrerreretsseststeretssssesrsteeretesesrsrerreret 6 7 OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY rraian eaa e A a a 6 9 Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility sseseeeeeseeeeesesssrsesrerrererssesrsrerrsresssesesteerersrsesrerreree 6 9 Features of Off line Maintenance Utility 0 eee cceeeecseeeecneeeecsaeceeesecseesecneseesaeeeeeaecaeeeeens 6 9 RELOCATING STORING THE NEC Express5800 ft series 0 cccecssessessecseeeecneeeeceseeeeeeceaees 6 11 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ccccssecceeeeeeeseeeeceeseseeeenseeeeesaeseseeeneeaeseeeeeseaeseseenenseeeeas 7 1 TO LOCATE THE ERRORS aoei inove baa ia OE E e E E A edn aed dues 7 2 ERROR MESSAGES nrinn hatad beea ahe E Ee DE E E Mae ie ee 7 3 Error Messages by LED Indicatoare ieii ni etii ea Ene ea eei ea ie aane 7 3 Error Messages on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD 0 0 eeeceeceseeeceecseeseceeeeecnecneeseenaeeeeens 7 3 POST Error Messages sii reier e ea a a E e hisancomthids E E E ates 7 14 Error Notification by BEEP vasenta nr ei cea bees eare an eA EE Ra ereeeoateebeade 7 20 Windows Server 2003 Enterprise E
196. esult can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component The result of the diagnosis is registered in the event log 4 Start the component Sample screen of ft server utility PCI Module 1 R server utiity PCI Module Installing and Using Utilities 5 55 Firmware Update NEC Express5800 ft series can update firmware including BIOS if some hardware components operate in the online state in which the system continues the operation but the component trying to update firmware or BIOS is stopped To update firmware with NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Update tree of the component in the data viewer Open the tree of the component for which firmware is updated and select the Update tree To update the firmware of a component with the ft server utility use the utility screen of the component To update the firmware of a component the firmware image file of the firmware for update must previously be stored in the managed server On the firmware update screen specify the path to the firmware image file for update The table below shows the potential cases in which the firmware of a component is to be updated Firmware update Component Remote Local CPU Module When BIOS must be updated to When BIOS must be updated to new new one one Executable in any of the Executable in the following module following module states this can state pe Vviewed on managersereen e When the status LED 1 is red and t
197. et before cleaning or installing removing internal optional devices Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off powered Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug which may cause a fire A CAUTION High temperature Immediately after powering off the system system components such as hard disk may be very hot Wait for the server to cool down completely before adding removing components Make sure to complete installation Firmly install all power cords interface cables and or boards An incompletely installed component may cause a contact failure resulting in fire and or smoke Precautions for Use 1 13 During Operation A CAUTION gt Eee A 2 Do not pull out a device during operation Do not pull out or remove a device while it works There is a risk of malfunction and injuries Do not touch the equipment when it thunders Unplug the equipment when it threatens to thunder If it starts to thunder before you unplug the equipment do not touch the equipment and cables There is a risk of a fire or electric shock Keep animals away Animal s waste or hair may get inside the equipment to cause a fire or electric shock Do not place any object on top of the server The obj
198. ficult to remove the connector Slots to install the board PCI slot N code Name Group 1 Group 2 Remarks 1 2 3 1 2 3 N8104 103 1000BASE T Adapter v v vy Each PCI module can contain one board only vV Can be installed Installation of driver Cannot be installed The NEC Express5800 ft series uses a pair of N8104 103 boards in duplex mode After installing the drivers in the following procedure perform a dual configuration setup IMPORTANT Please use the CD ROM for NEC Express5800 ft series for installation If you use the floppy disk provided with the network card it will not operate properly PROSetII will not start TIPS To perform this procedure you have to log on the system as an Administrator or a member of the Administrators group After installing the OS follow the steps below to install a driver and establish a dual configuration 1 Mount the N8104 103 adapter to the slot with the same number in PCI module 1 and 2 and then start the Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition After starting Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition the drivers are installed automatically IMPORTANT If the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box appears click the Yes button 8 50 System Upgrade 2 Build a dual LAN configuration See Setting Dual LAN Configuration in the separate volume User s G
199. figuration SCSI connector external Configuration jumper pin Battery lithium battery Cooling fan connector Power connector IDE connector Power switch connector LED connector SCSI connector internal OANODOARWHN Chassis Board Layout Rack mount model Qaya O 7 ns Li ssstjast a T Hii a r Back panel Backplane Interface board Clock board General Description 2 17 LEDs This section describes indications and meanings of the LEDs on NEC Express5800 ft series Refer to pages 2 6 through 2 12 for the locations of each LED POWER LED The POWER switch of the PCI module also functions as a POWER LED When power is supplied to the modules POWER LED on the primary side will illuminate the switch also works on the primary side alone BMC Status LED The BMC status LED indicates the status of the Baseboard Management Controller BMC installed on NEC Express5800 ft series The LED stays green while the server is running normally If the LED is not green there is something wrong with the server The table below shows indications of the BMC status LED and their meanings TIPS m If the server has the NEC ESMPRO or Off line Maintenance Utility installed you can view the error log to identify the cause of a trouble m When you want to restart the server perform a shutdown if the OS allows you to shut down the system If not perform a reset or forced shutdown or
200. fore starting installing or removing options m Install two hard disks for dual disk configuration before starting Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Make sure to configure the hard disks as dual disk 1 Shutdown Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition The system turns off automatically 2 Disconnect all the power cords from the power outlet 3 lt Tower model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it lt Rack mount model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels 4 Identify the slot to which you want to install the hard disk Install a hard disk in an empty slot in the group starting from the left slot 5 Unlock the lever of the dummy trays and remove the trays by pulling the handles handles need to be brought forward to be pulled All the slots except Slot 1 have a dummy tray IMPORTANT Carefully keep the removed dummy tray 6 Unlock the hard disk to be added 8 8 System Upgrade 10 11 12 13 14 Firmly hold the handle of the hard disk to install and insert the hard disk into the slot TIPS m Engage the upper and lower frames of the tray with the left and right grooves on the 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay and insert the hard disk m Insert the disk until the lever hook touches a the server frame icf m Check the orientation of lever Insert the hard disk with the lever unlocked Slowly close th
201. ge alarm lower limit CPUO Vtt Alm 07 Amber Blink CPU module 1 1 25 V power voltage alarm upper limit CPUO Vtt Alm 09 Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 1 25 V power voltage alarm upper limit 7 10 Troubleshooting Indication _ ree Explanation Procedure CPU00 Temp Alm Amber Blink CPU module 1 CPU 1 temperature alarm Check to see if dust is 00 lower limit accumulated on the CPU00 Temp Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 CPU 1 fatal temperature internal fans Check also 02 alarm lower limit if the fan cables are CPU00 Temp Al m Amber Blink CPU module 1 CPU 1 temperature alarm Connected securely If 07 upper limit not solved by the above CPU00 Temp Alm Amber Lit CPU module 1 CPU 1 fatal temperature contact your sa esagent 09 alarm upper limit CPU01 Temp A Amber Blink CPU module 1 CPU 2 temperature alarm 00 lower limit CPU01 Temp A Amber Lit CPU module 1 CPU 2 fatal temperature 02 alarm lower limit CPU01 Temp A Amber Blink CPU module 1 CPU 2 temperature alarm 07 upper limit CPU01 Temp A Amber Lit CPU module 1 CPU 2 fatal temperature 09 alarm upper limit CPU2 12ss Alm Amber Blink CPU module 2 12 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales 00 lower limit agent CPU2 12ss Alm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage 02 alarm low
202. guration Settings Scan SCSI Bus SCSI Disk Utility Select Host Adapter Exit Fast UTIL 4 32 System Configuration Configuration Settings If you select Configuration Settings from the Fast UTIL Options menu the screen for setting the configuration appears Configuration Settings Host Adapter Settings SCSI Device Settings SCSI Bus Settings Autoconfigure SCSI Device Selectable Boot Settings Restore Default Adapter Settings Raw Nvram Data Host Adapter Settings If you put the cursor on Host Adapter Settings with keyboard cursors J and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter the screen for setting the information on the host adapter appears The table below shows the parameters of the setting items and their factory settings Submenu item Parameter Description BIOS Address View only BIOS Revision 7 View only Adapter Serial Number View only Interrupt level View only Host Adapter BIOS Enable Specify whether the BIOS extension of the host Disable adapter is enabled or disabled PCI Bus DMA Burst Enable Specify whether the DMA burst transfer on the PCI Disable bus is enabled or disabled CDROM Boot Enable Specify whether the start from CD ROM is enabled or Disable disabled Adapter Configuration Auto Specify whether the adapter configuration is set Manual automatically by BIOS manually or safely Safe Drivers Load RISC Enable
203. hard disk to be installed for replacement must have the same specifications as its mirroring hard disk m Use an unsigned hard disk to replace the failed one If you use a signed disk you need to restore the redundant configuration in the procedure of How to Restore Redundant Configuration Manually below The system will automatically restore its redundant configuration Since the redundant configuration is restored automatically you do not need to use VERITAS Volume Manager to restore it IMPORTANT The redundant configuration is not restored automatically in the following cases m If you use a signed hard disk m If you replace a disk that is connected to a fibre channel m If you replace a disk that has partitions or volumes If you replace a disk while the system is shut down System Upgrade 8 11 CPU MODULE Concerning the CPU module you can add or replace the following components or CRU customer replaceable units m CPU processor DIMM memory Remove the CPU module to install or remove these devices The figures used in this section show the rack mount model The orientation is the only difference from the tower model IMPORTANT m Ask your sales agent to replace the CPU module and components of the CPU module m Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before installing or removing options To install or remove CPU or DIMM first power off the se
204. he e Removed status LED 2 is off e Broken or forced stop ly th LED 1 illumi No fault founa by diagnosis Only the status illuminates red when the module is in one of the To update the module under following states operation bring down the e Removed module before the update e Broken or forced stop e No fault found by diagnosis Firmware Update Complete To update the module under operation bring down the module before the update Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support 5 56 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager 1 Save the image data of the update firmware in an arbitrary directory of the NEC Express5800 ft series Save the image data in any way Write down the path to the directory in which the image data is saved 2 Select the target component in the FTServer tree 3 Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen If the component is operating stop the component 4 Click the Firmware Update button in the Update screen for the target component Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager cis SONI DataViewer ERI Ele Edit View Tools Help CPU Module gt el gt aa eae EE P eI E SONI ESMPRO MIB SONI FTServer a PUM IDPROM Information Magic E E omm S a DIMM D 0 0 pty fn DIMM
205. he PCI board directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before starting installing or removing options m PCI 1 is a slot dedicated for video board which is standard equipment Do not replace this broad with any other board TIPS When a PCI board is installed or removed or the slot is changed use the BIOS setup utility SETUP to change the detailed settings such as interrupt line IRQ when necessary See Appendix B for details Wideo board PCl 2 Built in riser cards of PCI module Note the following to install or replace PCI board m To add a PCI board the system must be shut down m To make a dual PCI board configuration install the same type of board i e having the same specifications and performance to the same slot in another group When a PCI board is installed to one group another identical PCI board should be installed to the same slot in another group This rule is applied to the case of removal m Install the PCI boards starting from the one with the smallest number 8 34 System Upgrade Installing PCI Board Follow the procedure below to install the board to be connected to the PCI board slot TIPS To install the PCI board make sure the shape of the board connector matches with the shape of the PCI board slot connector 1 2 3 Remove the
206. he back of the server Insert a floppy disk into the drive firmly with the label side up and its protective shutter facing the drive TIPS m If you insert an unformatted disk you will see a message that the disk cannot be read or that needs formatting To format a floppy disk see your OS manual m If you power on or restart NEC Express5800 ft series with a floppy disk left in the drive the server will access the floppy disk to start the system Unless a system exits on the FD the server will be unable to start To remove a floppy disk from the drive press the eject button TIPS Before removing a floppy disk make sure that the access LED is off If you eject a floppy disk while the LED is on the stored data could be damaged General Description 2 37 Use of Floppy Disk You may need to store important data on floppy disks Since the floppy disk is a very delicate medium you must handle it with extra care Push the floppy disk gently into place Attach the label on a proper position Do not use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the disk Do not open the protective shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high temperatures e g near a heater Keep away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the floppy disk near water or chemicals Keep away from magnetic objects Do
207. he update of the BMC firmware BMC firmware update Component Remote Local BMC When an update to new firmware is When an update to new firmware is required required Executable in the following module Executable in the following module state state this can be viewed on e Only the green LEDs on all PCI modules manager screen are on e Duplex Executable in the following state when only the green LEDs on all PCI modules are on e Duplex Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support 5 68 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure of Update from NEC ESMPRO Manager Menu Update firmware in the procedure as follows 1 Select Tools BMC FW Update Utility from the Operation Window s menu The BMC FW Update dialog box appears zI 2 Enter the device name and click OK con Cancel About The Execution Check dialog box appears SERVER 3 Store the firmware in the directory specified by Location xi Please store update data in the next place achine RVER Location C Program Files BmeTootBmcFwUpiDa 4 gt Aclick of a OK button performs BMC FW update 4 Click OK m Run firmware update The advance of the update appears during BMC FW is updated update The storage area may be modified See Change of Update Data Storage Destination described la
208. her of the PCI modules or Secondary control the AC DC power before the LED At 0 5 second intervals stops blinking When DC power is on BMC 1 BMC 2 Status Lit in green Blinking in red Do not remove the PCI module on Primary Primary Secondary BMC side At 1 second intervals BMC Sync disabled Lit in green Lit in red Secondary Do not remove either of the PCI modules Primary During BMC Sync Lit in green Blinking in red Do not remove either of the PCI modules or Primary Secondary control the AC DC power before the LED At 0 5 second intervals stops blinking When you remove a PCI module the system will be powered off automatically If there is a CD ROM in the drive eject it before removing the module When you insert a PCI module while the system is off make sure that the newly inserted PCI module s BMC status LED is off and then press the power switch When replacing a PCI module and a CPU module replace one module and wait until dual configuration is established to replace the other module If you replace the both modules simultaneously dual configuration of either CPU modules or PCI modules may fail See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting To add a backup module stop the PCI module to connect and then connect the SCSI cable System Upgrade 8 29 Removing PCI Module Follow the procedure below to remove the PCI module 1 Stop the PCI module you want to remove
209. i File Action view Window Help x extended b e omea Computer Management Local a amp System Tools New Volume E Simple Dynamic NTFS Healthy 5 37 GB Gl Event Viewer S30em C Mirror Dynamic NTFS Healthy System 6 01 GB amp 2 Shared Folders E Local Users and Groups E3 y Performance Logs and Alerts 4 Device Manager i amp Storage E Removable Storage T Disk Defragmenter OEM C 7 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB DEK Managemen Healthy System Unallocated E Ta Services and Applications E New Yolume New Yolume 3 91 GB NTFS 1 46 GB NTFS 11 72 GB Healthy Healthy Unallocated 17 09 GB Unallocated 4 gt BB Unallocated I Simple volume I Mirrored volume 3 14 Windows Setup and Operation 7 Configure the mirror of the extended volume D Compaster Management Compater Managera Local aoe tavas E sytem Toos Dew Vome E Mirror i EY Event viewer Bown c Sheed Foiea E gad Dored Fobbers Local Users and Groups mas G Local Users and Groups Performance Logs and Alerts Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager Gj ory E GB Removatie a oem c 6 01 NIFS Heathy System New Volume New Volume LIIGBNIFS 1 4048 NIPS 11 72 G8 hy Hatte Unalocated Windows Setup and Operation 3 15 Disk Operations Using the RDR Rapid Disk Resync Function RDR Rapid Disk Resync Models sup
210. ial els SONI ESMPRO MIB Maintenance SONI FTServer Bring Up Bring Down Press the Bring Up button to bring the CPU Bring Up Module up press the Bring Down button to bring the CPU Module down JE CPU Module Press the Dump button to hold Dump Daa mam ej Pa cPUCD 0 21 S omm DIMM ID 0 0 DIMM D 0 1 DIMM ID 0 2 i cru Module 1D 0 MTEF Information Type Use Threshold DIMMCD 0 3 Threshold 600 Sec f DIMMCID 0 4 Current Em DIMMCD 0 5 Faults o e2 CPU Module ID 2 6 PCI Module f SCSI Enclosure Mirror Disk Time of last fault Press the MTBF Clear button to clear Clea the MTBF information BRS p Diagnostics Information Time of last run Result Message Test Number Press the Diagnostics button to ener diagnose the CPU Module z a For Help press F1 B Normal Warning WE Abnormal 7 Maintenance screen of CPU module CPU Module CPU Module Maintenance 5 48 Procedure in the ft server utility Start 1 Select the target component by using the ft server utility Installing and Using Utilities 2 Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs Click the Up button of the target component A certain time is required for the start The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component The result of the start operation is register
211. ibes alert reports and status shown by the Data Viewer while disks are replaced to restore mirroring 1 Detecting problem of a hard disk See 1 Confirm of hard disk failure above 2 Removing the hard disk Disconnect the hard disk with the problem At this time NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the following alert to manager And icons related to the hard disk with problem change the state of warning in the data viewer Since the hard disk has been removed the status of the SCSI slot will be EMPTY General SNMP Report Status Ej STRATUS_MSG_STATE_EMPTY From Sonic mgt_Sonic Address 192 0 0 75 Received Wednesday May 29 2002 03 04 PM Generated Wednesday May 29 2002 03 04 PM your time z Alert generation time Wednesday May 29 2002 03 0 PM 09 00 Invoke associated application Invoke TIPS You can identify the new hard disk by DevicePathID ex 10 40 1 When one hard disk with problem was disconnected SCSI slot changes the status to Warning Be Ed ww Touts teo aeaee OOO o aa ala T esmeno min SONIC FT Sarver Type Haed Disk Vendor Unknow Model Unknown Ason Unknown Sanu Kumbar Unknown For Help press F1 TE ema Wert MB Abroad SCSI Slot General IMPORTANT The status color of the SCSI slot differs depending on the connection of mirrored hard disks m If one of the mirrored disks was removed Warning m If both of the mirr
212. ies operation Do not stop these services When minimizing the number of operating service programs temporarily is required for system disk backup using backup software etc the following service programs may be stopped Services that can be stopped ESMFSService ESRAS Utility Service Services required to keep operating Stratus ftServer Maintenance and Diagnostics MAD Stratus ftServer Provider Manager Stratus ftServer Storage Manager BMC FW Update Service Windows Management Instrumentation SNMP Service Alert Manager Main Service ESM System Management Service ESMCommonService ESMPS Virtual Disk Service when using Windows Disk Management Make sure to restart the operations of stopped service programs immediately after the backup processes are completed Chapter 4 System Configuration This chapter describes Basic Input Output System BIOS configuration When you install the server for the first time or install remove optional devices thoroughly read this chapter for better understanding and correct setups 4 2 System Configuration SYSTEM BIOS SETUP The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server This utility is pre installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions Thus you don t need to use the SETUP utility in most cases However y
213. imeout OBD6 3rd SMBus device address not acknowledged Board is faulty e Check cable connection e Replace the board 7 18 Troubleshooting On screen error message Cause Action OBD7 3rd SMBus device Error detected OBD8 3rd SMBus timeout OBD9 4th SMBus device address not acknowledged OBDA 4th SMBus device Error Detected OBDB 4th SMBus device timeout OBDC 5th SMBus device address not acknowledged OBDD 5th SMBus device Error detected OBDE 5th SMBus timeout OBDF 6th SMBus device address not acknowledged OBEO 6th SMBus device Error detected OBE1 5th SMBus timeout OBE2 7th SMBus device address not acknowledged OBE3 7th SMBus device Error detected OBE4 7th SMBus timeout OBE5 8th SMBus device address not acknowledged OBE6 8th SMBus device Error detected OBE7 8th SMBus timeout Board is faulty e Check cable connection e Replace the board OBFO Vendor ID cannot be retrieved from BP IDPROM OBF1 System Structure cannot be retrieved from BP Back panel board is faulty Replace the back panel board IDPROM 0C00 Rompilot reports error e Configuration error in e Re configure Rompilot number xx SETUP e Replace the CPU PCI e CPU PCI module board is faulty module board 8600 No working DQS value found e DIMM is faulty e DIMM is not supported e Replace DIMM e Replace DIMM
214. imple volume I Mirrored volume I Adding a mirror to an existing volume provides data redundancy by maintaining multiple copies of a volume s data on different disks Select a location for a mirror of E New Volume Disks Z Disk 0 BB Disk 2 Z Disk 3 Add Mirror Cancel 3 30 Windows Setup and Operation O computer Management 13 Similarly make settings of Disk 2 and Disk 5 Upon completion of synchronous processing recovery is completed Volume New Volume E Sem c pisk 3 Se Delete volume mamic 16 94 GB Online Properties isk 4 Ead Dynamic New Yolume E 34 18 GB 8 00 GB NTFS 26 18 GB Online Resynching Unallocated 4 gt Unallocated I Simple volume I Mirrored volume Models supporting the RDR function This section explains the procedure for replacing a disk which is duplexed by the RDR function at disk level when a failure occurs to the disk IMPORTANT The display of the RDR Utility is not updated automatically Click Action A Refresh R or press F5 to update the display Notes for using the RDR function Insert or replace the HDD while the server is powered on if the RDR function is used If anew HDD non formatted HDD on Windows OS is inserted to the slot corresponding to the slot with the disk you specified RDR when the server is powered off the OS may not be able to start or the HD
215. indicate the following You must be careful especially when detaching modules Green Unmounting the module has no effect on the system operation Amber Unmounting the module cause a system down 2 26 General Description PCI Board Slot Status LEDs P1 P2 P3 To show the status of PCI board slots each PCI module has three status LEDs incorrectly just mount it correctly there is no problem To make the server fault tolerant attach a PCI board eee Description Action Off PCI board is mounted The system operates normally in duplex mode The PCI board is not If the PCI board is not mounted or is mounted mounted is mounted incorrectly or power Check the condition of power unit is not supplied If the problem persists contact your sales agent Amber PCI board is mounted Simplex mode is not a problem correctly and operates in simplex mode to a slot of the same on the other PCI module Red Although the PCI Remount the PCI board correctly board is mounted it Remount the PCI module correctly may be offline or not If the problem persists contact your sales agent be working For LED indications when option boards are attached see PCI Module in Chapter 8 Disk LED A DISK LED shows the status of a hard disk that is mounted in a slot of the 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay Combined the disk LEDs on PCI modules 1 and 2 show the status of the hard disks ee a c
216. ing clearing the passwords Place the clip on the two pins to clear the passwords Remove the clip from these pins to protect the passwords factory set m Pins for protecting clearing the CMOS data Place the clip on the two pins to clear the CMOS data Remove the clip from these pins to protect the CMOS data factory set The following describe the clearing procedure WARNING Q A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of death or serious personal injury See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 m Do not disassemble repair or alter the server How to Clear CMOS Power off the NEC Express5800 ft series and unplug the both power cords 2 Remove the both PCI modules 1 and 2 from the NEC Express5800 ft series see Removing PCI Module on page 8 29 3 Open the top cover of the PCI Module 1 4 Make setting of jumper switch for clearing CMOS Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11 12 and place them on the jumper pins 1 2 on the PCI Module 1 5 Mount only the PCI Module 1 to the NEC Express5800 ft series see Installing PCI Module on page 8 31 6 Plug the both power cords and when the POWER Switch LED turns on press it to power on the server 7 When the following message appears after startup press CONTINUE Warning CMOS Clear Jumper Installed CMOS data has been reset with default values Please remove the CMOS clear jumper CON
217. ingle CD ROM drive in NEC Express5800 ft series but only the CD ROM drive on the primary side can be used When you cannot eject a CD ROM When you cannot eject the CD ROM by pressing the eject button follow the steps below to eject it Manual release hole Press the POWER switch to power off the server 2 Use a metal pin of about 1 2 mm in diameter and 100 mm long alternatively you can use a fairly large paper clip after straightening Insert it gently into the manual release hole located to the right of the eject button until the tray is ejected IMPORTANT m Do not use a toothpick plastic pin or other breakable objects m If you cannot eject the CD ROM by following the steps above contact your sales agent 3 Hold the tray and pull it out 4 Take out the CD ROM 5 Push the tray back General Description 2 39 Use of CD ROM Observe the following when you use a CD ROM on NEC Express5800 ft series As for a disk such as a noncompliant copy protected CD we shall not guarantee that you can use a CD player to play it with this server Be careful not to drop the CD ROM Do not bend or place anything on the CD ROM Do not attach labels on the CD ROM Do not touch the signal side blank side Place the CD ROM gently on the tray with the printed side up Do not scratch or use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the CD ROM Keep away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the CD ROM in a place that is s
218. ion 3 51 4 0 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system version 3 51 4 0 are called Windows NT for short Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System is called Windows Me for short Microsoft Windows 98 operating system is called Windows 98 for short Microsoft Windows 95 operating system is called Windows 95 for short Names used with sample applications are all fictitious They are unrelated to any existing product names names of organizations or individual names To prevent voltage sag This product may be affected by voltage sag caused due to lightning To prevent voltage sag you are recommended to use an AC uninterruptible power supply UPS unit Notes 1 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of NEC Corporation 2 The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice 3 The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without prior written permission of NEC Corporation 4 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual If you find any part unclear incorrect or omitted in this manual contact the sales agent where you purchased this product 5 NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product nor any liability for incidental or consequential damage arising from the use of this manual regardless of 4 above PREFACE Welcome to the NEC Express5800 ft series NEC Ex
219. irrored pairs PCI Module 0 Ea EJ disk2 PGI Module 11 A m am disks jet _disk5 3 4 Windows Setup and Operation The pairs of mirror disks as shown above can be created by selecting hard disks whose target IDs are identical in the disk properties which are displayed through Disk View The following explains how to confirm the target ID 1 Click Start Administrative Tools gt Computer Management The Computer Management window appears 2 Click Disk Management under Storage in General Policies Volumes Driver the console tree lt 4 SEAGATE ST336807LC SCSI Disk Device 3 Right click the disk and point to Properties to confirm the target ID The target ID in the Device Une EREE ivs example shown here is ee 2 Manufacturer Standard disk drives Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 1 LUN 0 p Device status This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter Device usage Use this device enable KA 4 Similarly confirm the target IDs of the other disks Disk No Target ID Hard disk 0 0 Hard disk 1 1 Hard disk 2 2 Hard disk 3 0 Hard disk 4 1 Hard disk 5 2 When disk numbers and target IDs are matched as shown above define hard disks 0 and 3 hard disks and 4 and hard disks 2 and 5 as mirrored pairs and add mirror volumes BootVolume Vol
220. is an error in Make sure that the option PCI Off Off the option PCI board or board is properly mounted and 7 the PCI module board cables are properly connected connected or mounted to the connecters of the PCI on PCI module 2 module or the option PCI ii There is an error in board the devices connected Remount the PCI module 2 to the option PCI board If the problem persists contact connected or mounted your sales agent on PCI module 2 including the cable disconnection iii The LAN cable connected or mounted on PCI module 2 is disconnected Amber Amber Amber Amber DISKs are performing Wait for the mirroring to be mirroring when completed mirroring by Disk Management Amber Amber Green Green DISKs are performing Wait for the mirroring to be Off mirroring when completed a mirroring by the RDR Green Green Amber Amber function Off DISK ACCESS LED illuminates green when hard disk is accessed Tips When the status LED 1 is off the colors of the status LED 2 indicate the following You must be careful especially when detaching modules Green Unmounting the module has no effect on the system operation Amber Unmounting the module causes a system down 2 21 2 22 General Description 2 Status LED 1 of both PCI modules are red PCI 1 PCI 2 Status DISK Status DISK Inii LED 2 Access LED 2 Access Description Action LED LED Off
221. is not collected by NEC MWA If you attempt to collect it from NEC MWA ESCD data read error server report Plug and Play call error is generated m NO NEC MWA Agent is available on this product Use the BMC configuration tool to configure this product on Windows Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console If the main unit does not have a console such as keyboard you can operate tools on the server remotely using NEC MWA s remote console functions and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER s consoleless functions There are two ways of remote console connection depending on the condition of connection between the management PC and the main unit Connect from the management PC linked to the main unit through LAN Connect from the management PC directly linked through Serial port B to the main unit 5 74 Installing and Using Utilities Connect from the Management PC Linked through LAN On the management PC that is linked through LAN perform the steps below 1 Start the management PC where NEC MWA is installed From the Start menu select Program NEC MWA gt MWA When NEC MWA starts the initial screen Remote Control Manager will appear MWA Remote Contiol Manage Fle Sever Edt View Took Heb H 16 mc eae a Tee Gene Seve name Connect DC state DC state update ti IP Adders T elep Ready 2 Insert a formatted 1 44MB floppy disk into the drive From NEC MWA s
222. isk Drives Follow the procedure below to locate and replace the failed hard disk The failed hard disk should be replaced with new device with the server powered on How to Locate Failed Disks 1 From Start select All Programs RDR and click RDR Utility to start RDR Utility 2 From the tree on the left frame of RDR Utility select each disk and check the values of MTBF Current and MtbfThresholdStatus in the right frame TIP For RDR Utility see About RDR Utility on page 3 16 Description of each MTBF value Property name Description Normal value MTBF Current Mean time between failures Unknown MtbfThresholdStatus The status of comparing the MTBF value with the threshold level 1200 seconds Normal The normal value denotes the value of when no error has occurred If either of the values is different from the normal value the disk has an error Windows Setup and Operation 3 25 Procedures to Replace Failed Disks Models that do not support the RDR function When a failure occurs on a disk mirrored by volume using Disk Management follow the steps below to replace the disk IMPORTANT m To remove a disk due to a failure etc compare Disk Management and RDR Utility to determine the disk to remove For RDR Utility see About RDR Utility on page 3 16 m To reconfigure a mirror be sure to confirm the TargetID in the disk s Properties and
223. isplay POST check results To control from the HW console Remote operation via LAN Select Advanced Advanced gt RomPilot Support Enabled m Remote operation via WAN Select System Hardware Console Redirection and set each item System Configuration 4 7 Memory To check the installed memory DIMM status Select Advanced Memory Information and check the status indications Saving the Configuration Data To save the BIOS configuration data Select Exit Save Changes amp Exit or Save Changes To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data Select Exit Exit Without Saving Changes or Load Previous Value To restore the default BIOS configuration it may be different from the configuration at shipment Select Exit gt Get Default Values 4 8 System Configuration Menu and Parameter Descriptions The SETUP utility has the following six major menus Main Advanced Security System Hardware Boot Exit To configure detailed settings of functions select a submenu from the above menus Below describes configurable functions and parameters and the factory settings displayed in the screen for each menu Start the SETUP utility to display the Main menu lt Example gt Main Advanced Security System Hardware Boot System Configuration 4 9 Available options in the Main and descriptions are listed below Option Parameter Descri
224. k PCI module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit Corl 5 0vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 02 lower limit Corl 5 0vsAlm Amber Blink PCI module 2 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit Corl 5 0vsAlm Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 09 upper limit Corl 12vAl m 00 Amber Blink PCI module 2 12 V power voltage alarm lower limit Corl 12vAlm02 Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm lower limit Troubleshooting 7 7 Indication Sausi E2 S Explanation Procedure Corl 12vAl m07 Amber Blink PCI module 2 12 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent upper limit Corl 12vAlm09 Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm upper limit co rl Bus PERR Green Blink PCI module 2 PCI bus parity error cor 1 Bus SERR Green Blink PCI module 2 Fatal PCI bus error Corl CLK Alm 00 Amber Blink CLOCK board CI ock alarm lower limit Corl CLK Alm 02 fAmber Lit CLOCK board Fatal Clock alarm lower limit Corl CLK Alm 07 Amber Blink CLOCK board CI ock alarm upper limit Corl CLK Alm 09 fAmber Lit CLOCK board Fatal Clock alarm upper limit Corl FAN Alm 01 Amber Blink PCI module 2 Cooling fan1 alarm Check to see if dust is Corl FAN Alm 02 Amber Blink PCI module 2
225. k to see if dust is 00 limit accumulated on the CPU2 Temp Alm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal temperature alarm lower internal fans Check also 02 limit if the fan cables are CPU2 Temp Alm Amber Blink CPU module 2 Temperature alarm upper connected securely If 07 limit not solved by the above CPU2 Temp Alm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal temperature alarm contact your sales me upper limit agent CPU2 VccpAl m00 Amber Blink CPU module 2 CPU operating voltage alarm Contact your sales lower limit VCCP agent CPU2 VccpAl m 02 Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal CPU operating voltage alarm lower limit VCCP CPU2 VccpATm 07 Amber Blink CPU module 2 CPU operating voltage alarm upper limit VCCP CPU2 VecpAl m 09 Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal CPU operating voltage alarm upper limit VCCP CPU2 VttAlm 00 Amber Blink CPU module 2 1 25 V power voltage alarm lower limit CPU2 VttAlm 02 Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 1 25 V power voltage alarm lower limit CPU2 Vtt Alm 07 Amber Blink CPU module 2 1 25 V power voltage alarm upper limit CPU2 VttAlm 09 Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal 1 25 V power voltage alarm upper limit CPU20 TempAlm Amber Blink CPU module 2 CPU 1 temperature alarm Check to see if dust is 00 lower limit accumulated on the CPU20 TempATm Amber Lit CPU module 2 Fatal CPU 1 temperature internal fans Check also 02 alarm lower limit if the fan cables are CPU20 TempAlm Amber Blink
226. l amp System Tools fal Event Viewer 6 Shared Folders E z Local Users and Groups Performance Logs and Alerts 3 Device Manager m Sy Storage Basic Removable Storage 17 09 GB Disk Defragmenter Online Disk Management af i licati Disk 1 igs Services and Applications PTAR 17 09 GB Not Initialized icp roma__Help CD ROM D Properties Volume Layout Type File Syste amp OEM C Partition Basic NTFS isk 0 Sa ame OEM C 8 00 GB NTFS Healthy System 3 18 Windows Setup and Operation 3 Start RDR Utility IMPORTANT m If the inserted disk does not appear on the tree from the menu of RDR Utility select Action A and click Refresh R or press F5 to update the display after awhile m The display of RDR Utility is not updated automatically Therefore update it by clicking Refresh R from Action A or pressing F5 on the menu after performing operations described below 4 On the left tree of RDR Utility right click a disk to set RDR and click Add RDR Virtual Disk IMPORTANT Depending on the disk type RDR setting may take some time and RDR Utility may pause for a few minutes There is no error so wait until the process is completed FAROR Utility File F Action A Help H PCI module 1 E SCSI Enclosure DevicePathID E Slot 1 Op State State Slot 2
227. l to lift it The front bezel may get detached and fall off from the server causing damage to the server 6 12 Maintenance 8 Protect the server with the shock absorbing materials and pack it securely IMPORTANT Check and adjust the system clock before operating the server again after relocating or storing it If the server and the built in optional devices are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a short time condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used in such state When you start operating these equipments again after the transportation or the storage make sure to wait for a sufficient period of time to use them in the operating environment If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by though the system clock adjustment is performed contact your sales agent Chapter 7 Troubleshooting If the product does not work properly see this chapter before deciding that it is a breakdown 7 2 Troubleshooting TO LOCATE THE ERRORS Use NEC ESMPRO to monitor the occurrence of fault during the system operation Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window Data Viewer or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager Example Determine type and location of server workstation trouble Troubleshooting 7 3 ERROR MESSAGES If
228. lable touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body Touch the metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity m Select a suitable workspace Work with the server on the anti static or concrete floor When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated make sure take anti static measures beforehand m Use a worktable Place the server on an anti static mat to work with it m Clothes Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server Wear anti static shoes to work with the server Take off any metal accessories you wear ring bracelet or wristwatch before working with the server m Handling of components Keep any component in an anti static bag until you actually install it to the server Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or parts To store or carry any component place it in an anti static bag 8 4 System Upgrade PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE Note the following when installing or replacing devices to improve the performance of NEC Express5800 ft series m With the NEC Express5800 ft series devices can be replaced during the continuous operation Take extreme care for electric shock and damage to the component due to short circuit m Optional devices cannot be installed or removed during conti
229. lease lever The installed CPU module will start automatically IMPORTANT Unless the release levers are located inside the rack frame the module won t be mounted correctly 6 Screw the release levers 8 16 System Upgrade DIMM The DIMM dual inline memory module is installed to the DIMM socket in the CPU module on the NEC Express5800 ft series The CPU module board is equipped with six sockets Two standard 256MB DIMMs are mounted in DIMM 1 and 2 each The standard DIMM can be replaced with another DIMM DIMMs should be installed to these sockets starting from the lowest socket number TIPS m The memory capacity can be increased up to 6 GB six 1GB DIMMs m In the error messages and logs in POST NEC ESMPRO or Off line Maintenance Utility the DIMM connector may be described as group The number next to group corresponds to the connector numbers shown in the figure below IMPORTANT m The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on board parts with a bare hand or place the DIMM directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC Installing a third party DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as the server Repair of the server
230. lled on DIMMs 1 1 to 6 6 None indicates no DIMM installed view only DIMM 1 6 Speed Indicates the type of DIMM DDR200 DDR266 installed on DIMMs 1 0 to 6 6 None indicates no DIMM installed view only Factory set 4 14 System Configuration Peripheral Configuration Select Peripheral Configuration on the Advanced menu to display the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Peripheral Configuration Item Specific Help Serial Port A 3F8 IRQ 4 Disables serial port 1 Serial Port B 2F8 IRQ 3 or sets the base address IRQ of serial port 1 F1 Help t Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save Changes amp Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen IMPORTANT Make sure to avoid any conflict in the interrupt requests or the base I O addresses Option Parameter Description Your Setting Serial Port A Disabled Enable or disable the serial port A and Serial Port B 3F8 IRQ3 B or specify a base address and 3F8 IRQ 4 interrupt 2F8 IRQ 3 2F8 IRQ 4 1 Factory setting for the serial port 3E8 IRQ 3 A 3E8 IRQ 4 2 Factory setting for the serial port 2E8 IRQ 3 B 2E8 IRQ4 Auto Factory set System Configuration 4 15 Monitoring Configuration Select Monitoring Configuration on the Advanced menu to display
231. ltatas io Angee ba TCW Erisman EES MB ered Maintenance screen of SCSI enclosure SCSI Enclosure Maintenance Installing and Using Utilities 5 51 Procedure in the ft server utility Perform the procedure below before replacement of a component 1 Select the target component by using the ft server utility 2 Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs and event log 3 Click the Clear button in MTBF Clear of the target component The MTBF clearing result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component The result of the MTBF clearing operation is registered in the event log 4 Start the component Sample screen of ft server utility PCI Module 1 ft server utility Me E Bile View Window Help Ea FTServer E General Sst K Disk Failure Prediction MTBF information is cleared EB CPU Module B CPU Module 1 a 5 B CPU Module 2 EE RENN 8 PCI Module PCI module is brought up or down EG PCI Module 1 E SCSI Adapter 1 SCSI Bus 1 a Scar Pus 2 Diagnostics Infomation jernet Boar 3 W PCI Module 2 Start diagnostics of PCI module B SCSI Enclosure SCSI Enclosure 1 amp Electronics 1 SCSI Slot 1 SCSI Slot 2 SCSI Slot 3 2 SCSI Enclosure 2 5 BMC B Firmware PCI Module 5 52 Diagnostics The NEC Express5800 ft series provides the self check diagnosis function for some components If a fault occurs in a compone
232. me Logical Disk Manager x Logical Disk Manager could not update the boot file for any boot partitions on the target disk Verify your arcpath listings in File boot ini or through the bootcFg exe utility The mirror is broken and the volumes will be converted to simple volumes In the figure on the right the status of the volumes are as follows System Volume Volume OEM C Healthy System Broken Volume Volume OEM Healthy Status Status E Computer Management OOO B By ge Action view Window He dad Action View window Help e omena Computer Management Local E System Tools H E Event Viewer H E Shared Folders a Fd Local Users and Groups E Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager Volume Layout Type File System amp oEMm Simple Dynamic NTFS Sem C Simple Dynamic NTFS Healthy 6 01 GB Healthy System 6 01 GB a amp Storage a E Removable Storage DA J OEM C Disk Defragmenter 34 18 GB 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB Disk Management Online Healthy System Unallocated Ej E Services and Applications Zisk 1 E Dynamic OEM 34 18 GB 6 01 GB NTFS 28 17 GB Online Healthy Unallocated Scp romo CD ROM D No Media gt B Unallocated I Simple volume 3 10 Windows Setup and Operation Importing Data Disks This section describes a procedure to import a data
233. meala E SONIC N4U BY SONIC P6U H Computer m Computer E Disk drives E Disk drives Display adapters f 2 Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives 2 DVD CD ROM drives E 4 Floppy disk drives El CS Floppy disk drives gj Human Interface Devices gy Human Interface Devices yj IDE ATA ATAPI controllers H IDE ATA ATAPI controllers H Keyboards fm Keyboards 5 4 Mice and other pointing devices gt Mice and other pointing devices a Monitors m Monitors Network adapters H E Network adapters Y Ports com amp LPT E A Ports Coi amp LPT TntelR Xeon TM CPU 2 40GHz intel Xeon TM CPU 2 80GHz E SCSI and RAID controllers s Intel R Xeon TM CPU 2 80GHz Sound video and game controllers E amp SCSI and RAID controllers E System devices Sound video and game controllers Universal Serial Bus controllers amp System devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers System with one CPU System with two CPUs How CPU modules appear on Task Manager Intel Xeon processor introduces a new technology called Hyper Threading Technology It is a technology that makes the operating system see a single processor performing as two logical processors Task Manager shows logical processors using the Hyper Threading Technology As shown below information for the processors of twice the number of physical processors is displayed O windows Task Manager E o x File Options Yiew Help
234. mediately after the system starts up the tree or the state of a Data Viewer may not be displayed correctly due to high load of the system In about 20 minutes after the system startup when a pop up message below which prompt you to reconstruct a Data Viewer appears click OK The Data Viewer will be reconstructed and the tree and the status will be displayed correctly Data Viewer The system configuration of the host may have been changed Do you wish to reconstruct the tree Floppy Disk Drive Name After unplugging and plugging the PCI module of the primary side the floppy disk drive name of I O Device on Data Viewer may be different from the name that is recognized by the OS Example drive name on Data Viewer A drive name recognized by the OS B Check the floppy disk drive name on Explorer Floppy Disk Drive Information If you add or delete floppy disk drive connected with USB while the system is running the drive information under the I O Device in the data viewer will be updated at the next system startup Displayed BIOS Data Is Incorrect BIOS additional data may not be displayed properly in BIOS Information of a CPU Module of the ft server utility or in Ft Server CPU Module Individual CPU Module General BIOS Information of Data Viewer In this case see the data in ESMMIB BIOS of Data Viewer 5 26 Installing and Using Utilities Ethernet Adapters You Do Not Use
235. mended to use UPS uninterruptible power supply This equipment does not support the connection through an UPS serial port RS 232C or the control using PowerChutePlus Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions After transporting the equipment After storing the equipment After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed environment conditions Temperature 10 to 35 C Humidity 20 to 80 Check the system clock once in a month It is recommended to operate the system clock using a time server NTP server if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time accuracy If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by though the system clock adjustment is performed contact your sales agent When you store the equipment keep it under storage environment conditions Temperature 10 to 55 C Humidity 20 to 80 non condensing If NEC Express5800 ft series the built in optional devices and the media set for the backup devices tape cartridges are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a short time condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used in such state In order to protect important stored data and assets make sure to wait for a sufficient period of time to use the server or components in the operating environment Reference Length of the time effective at avoiding condensation in winte
236. mit CPU0 3 3vsAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 3 3 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPUO 3 3vsAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 3 3 V power voltage 09 alarm upper limit CPUO 5 0vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU0 5 0vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 02 lower limit Troubleshooting 7 9 Indication saui E2 AS Explanation Procedure CPUO 5 0vAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 5 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent 07 upper limit CPUO 5 0vAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 09 upper limit CPU0 5 0vsAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 5 V power voltage alarm 00 lower limit CPU0 5 0vsAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 02 lower limit CPU0 5 0vsAlm Amber Blink CPU module 1 5 V power voltage alarm 07 upper limit CPU0 5 0vsAlm Amber Lit CPU module 1 Fatal 5 V power voltage alarm 09 upper limit CPU0 broken Green Blink CPU module 1 CPU module breakdown CPU0 FAN Alm 01 Amber Blink CPU module 1 Cooling fan1 alarm Check to see if dust is CPU0 FAN Alm 03 Amber Blink CPU module 1 Cooling fan2 alarm accumulated on the CPU0 FAN Alm 04 Amber Blink CPU module 1 Cooling fan3 alarm internal fans Check also if the fan cables are connected securely If not
237. mounted on CPU 2 cover it with an anti dust sheet m After operation the cool sheet at the bottom of the heat sink may stick to the CPU because of heat When you dismount the heat sink turn it lightly to make sure that the heat sink is not sticking to the CPU Otherwise the CPU or socket may be damaged 1 aa oa Shut down OS The server will be powered off automatically Unplug the power cord Remove the CPU module Detach the CPU air duct Dismount the heat sink using the dismount tool included with the additional CPU Remove the CPU Affix an anti dust sheet on the CPU socket Place the adhesive part on the opposite side of the lever Any part of the sheet place off the socket Install the CPU module Connect the power cord Press the POWER switch to power on the module 8 26 System Upgrade 11 Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the massage and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 7 Replacing CPU Follow the steps below to replace a failed CPU cis SONI Data iewer LoL File Edit view Tools Help CPU Module a al ofa eal le eme E SONI ESMPRO MIB S E SONI FTServer fl CPU Module a EHE CPU Module ID 0 General Type Original OEM Processor E Update Model Name Family15 Madel2 Stepping E Maintenance QDF Number SLEEP ow ou Cartridge Revision ee Software Revision 0 a Part Number 8
238. mp of the wegen modse C Harvest memory dump of the cuers system vihous s oona Stature Dueten CPU Module Installing and Using Utilities 5 63 SCSI Bus Reset The SCSI bus can be reset Select FTServer tree PCI Module SCSI adapter SCSI bus screens with the ft server utility Open the tree of the component for which the SCSI bus is to be reset and select the SCSI bus tree The table below shows the potential cases in which the SCSI bus is reset Component Bus reset Remote Local SCSI Bus When a malfunction occurs in the SCSI bus to require the bus reset Provide the bus reset if requested by maintenance personnel Executable in the following module state e Only the green LED is on Only the green LED is on when the module is in the following state e Duplex Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility Not support Reset the SCSI bus with the ft server utility in the following procedure NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot reset the SCSI bus However because the ft server utility cannot check the setup of the SCSI bus check the bus state with NEC ESMPRO Manager in advance 1 Select the target SCSI Bus in the FTServer tree 2 Click the Reset button for Bus Reset in the SCSI bus screen The modification result can be checked in the event log Sample screen of ft server utility SCSI
239. n about an event log is described on Microsoft Product Support Services Please check the contents e INFO Events for Performance Monitor Extensions http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 226494 e Application Log Events Generated When You Start Performance Counter Query http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 296 187 e Event ID 2003 Warning Message Logged When Loading Performance Counters http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 26783 Visit the Microsoft Help and Support on regular basis where you can find other information than the above at http support microsoft com default aspx LN en us The NMS Service terminated unexpectedly is recorded in the system event log Although the following log may be recorded in the system event log when starting the system or after exchanging PCI modules there is no real problem on operation Change of a setup with PROSet II will become invalid if NMS service stops but you can change a setup normally because NMS service will be automatically started when PROSet II is started Source Service Control Manager EventID 7031 Description The NMS service terminated unexpectedly This has occurred 1 time s The following corrective action will be taken in 0 milliseconds No action iANSMiniport related logs are recorded in the system event log Although the following log may be recorded in the system event log when starting the s
240. n can be set for a variety of monitoring items including cabinet temperature and CPU usage rate 5 14 Installing and Using Utilities Management of Server Operation Status NEC ESMPRO Agent manages and monitors a variety of components installed in the server You can view the information managed and monitored by NEC ESMPRO Agent on the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager NEC ESMPRO Agent also manages and monitors all the components and conditions required to keep the server reliability at a high level such as hard disks CPU memory fans power supply and temperature Installing and Using Utilities 5 15 Monitoring Management of NEC Express5800 ft series NEC Express5800 ft series is a fault tolerant system It can continue the operation even if a major component fails NEC Express5800 ft series improves the system availability with the hardware NEC ESMPRO and system software functions If a major component fails the NEC ESMPRO fault report function can notify the system Administrator of the occurrence of the fault In addition the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager can monitor the system status and also identify the failed component NEC ESMPRO provides several maintenance functions such as the update of F W and BIOS in the NEC Express5800 ft series in the online state in which the system continues the operation but the components used to update F W or BIOS is suspended and the suspension of a specific component The table
241. n error message Cause Action 0B71 System temperature out of Range e Ambient temperature is out of range e Fan is faulty e CPU PCI module board is faulty e Check the setting in SETUP e Clean the fan e Replace the fan e Replace the CPU PCI module board 0B80 BMC Memory Test Failed 0B81 BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed 0B82 BMC core Hardware failure 0B83 BMC IBF or OBF check failed BMC is faulty Replace the PCI module board 0B90 BMC Platform Information Area corrupted 0B91 BMC update firmware corrupted BMC is faulty 0B92 Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted e SROM is faulty e BMC is faulty Replace the PCI module board 0B93 BMC SDR Repository empty 0B94 IPMB signal lines do not respond 0B95 BMC FRU device failure 0B96 BMC SDR Repository failure 0B97 BMC SEL device failure BMC is faulty Replace the PCI module board 0B98 BMC SEL Overflow SEL System Event Log overflowed Erase the unnecessary SEL OBBO SMBIOS SROM data read error 0BB1 SMBIOS SROM data checksum bad e SROM is faulty e Back panel board is faulty Replace the back panel board OBDO 1st SMBus device address not acknowledged OBD1 1st SMBus device Error detected OBD2 1st SMBus timeout OBD3 2nd SMBus device address not acknowledged OBD4 2nd SMBus device Error detected OBD5 2nd SMBus t
242. n its handle The hard disk is not connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed see Chapter 8 When the hard disk is properly installed the drive power LED for the hard disk is lit while the server is powered Fail to start the OS O Isa floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Take out the floppy disk and restart the server O Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM or the other bootable CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Take out the CD ROM and restart the server O Is the OS damaged Use the recovery process of the OS to attempt to recover the damaged OS OS behavior is unstable O Have you updated your system If you install a network driver after installing the OS the OS may become unstable For update procedure see the separate volume User s Guide Setup The system does not operate according to the configured settings of Automatic Restart at the occurrence of error The system may or may not restart automatically even if the Automatic Restart settings are made at occurrence of an error is set If the system does not restart automatically restart it in manual mode 7 28 Troubleshooting The power cannot be turned off while the blue screen of Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition is displayed The forced power off forced shutdown procedure is necessary to turn off the power with the blue screen displayed Keep pressing the POWER switch for 4 seconds Pressing the
243. n order to eee electrical shock or fire hazards disconnect all cables connected with the module to be serviced Label B A CAUTION WERARY HOICULSUADCEML TEAL Exercise caution when handling the system to avoid personal injuries OTH RUBS 0 gt cms FR 2 EUREC TOST RBRUCSTHCROL TNE As the hard disk drives may retain heat after powering down allow ample time for cooling prior to handling PUES 2 WF J2 MUHAORIOMS BRHLOACSTOI FROABBRT FVEMUT FAL In order to prevent accidents such as electrical shock disconnect all cables and external connections when servicing non hotewappable modules MRC GSIVN AY HYBUVRT FRORATPSMNSASCL TFS As some components may become very hot during system operation give ample time to allow cooling as well as use precation when handling internal components immediately after powering down DARI ETS 2 JETOCT HAAS ABVACSSUSS HCSE SL in order to aie phos circuits and fire hazards exercise caution and avoid dropping screws inside the system Label C Label D i WARNING Risk of electric shock do not open Qualified service personnel only No user servicable components inside Label E AN CAUTION This unit uses multiple power supply cords Disconnect all power supply cords prior to Servicing this system 1 6 Precautions for Use PCI CPU Modules PCI Module CPU Module Label A A amp caution AG MBMCSSIVR AY DYUET tHOBATPS
244. n setting Select the Start Control Panel Display Settings tab Advanced Plug amp Play Monitor and Stratus Virtual Video Properties is displayed Select the Troubleshoot tab and check the hardware acceleration setting CPU load ratio of SNMP Service snmp exe increases While monitoring the server from NEC ESMPRO Manager the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service on the NEC ESMPRO Agent side may increase at every monitoring interval default 1 minute NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent exchange information through SNMP Service If the server status monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager is on default ON NEC ESMPRO Manager regularly issues a request to NEC ESMPRO Agent to get the current status of the server In response NEC ESMPRO Agent checks the status of the server As a result the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service increases temporarily If you have trouble of terminating a movie player application turn off the server status monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager or extend the monitoring interval Hang of SNMP Service occurs SNMP Service has a module called SNMP Extended Agent This module may be registered when you install some software that uses SNMP Service If you start SNMP Service SNMP Extended Agent is also loaded at the initialization However if the initialization is not completed within a specified period SNMP Service will hang It may take time to complete the initialization due to tempor
245. n the screen of the display unit System bar Shows information including time of progress during the diagnostics Upon completion of the diagnostics descriptions on key operations to navigate the window are shown Title bar Shows items for diagnosis If an error is detected the bar is indicated in red Test window Shows the progress or result of diagnostics Target scope A cursor to select the test window Use the cursor keys on the keyboard to move it to another test window Move the target scope to a desired window and press Enter Now you can view detailed information on the selected window To return to the previous window press Enter once again Some system configurations do not display the target scope but change the color of test window s frame If an error is detected during the system diagnostics the title bar turns in red and error information is displayed in red characters Note down the error message and contact your sales agent Press Q and select Reboot from the menu The server restarts and the system is started from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server Plug the power cord This completes the system diagnostics Maintenance 6 9 OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY The Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS indep
246. nager site enter the same name as the community name newly set in the NEC ESMPRO Manager site To receive trap from NEC ESMPRO A gent at the NEC ESMPRO Manager machine both community names should be the same NEC ESMPRO Manager report alert from NEC ESMPRO Agent doubly Ifthe IP address or host name of the remote NEC ESMPRO Manager specified as the trap send destination in the setup of the manager report TCP IP the message warning the duplication appears The specification of the same NEC ESMPRO Manager causes to be reported doubly NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot monitor NEC ESMPRO Agent If you entered any community name other than public in the Community name box in the Traps property sheet add that name to Accepted community names refer to the users guide setup of a separate volume Unless you set the acceptable community s authority to READ CREATE or READ WRITE you cannot perform monitoring from NEC ESMPRO Manager NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot receive SNMP packets sent from NEC ESMPRO Manager Ifthe community name is changed the community of NEC ESMPRO Agent is changed and registered by starting from Control Panel Change registration in the following steps 1 Double click the NEC ESMPRO Agent icon in Control Panel 2 Select a desired community name from the SNMP Community list box in SNMP Setting of the General sheet The community names to receive SNMP packets from are listed in the
247. nance functions executable from NEC ESMPRO Dump Dump acquisition i Component acquisition during system Board switch operation R L R L R L CPU module y y y y V R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility V Support Not support Bus reset Change of primary SCSI bus Component R L R L SCSI bus y R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility v Support Not support Component BMC firmware update R L BMC y J R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility vV Support Not support The table below shows the support of the whole system setup functions Component Quick dump Auto firmware update Auto module start j R L R L R L Whole system y N N R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility vV Support Not support The table below shows the support of the preventive disk maintenance S M A R T setup function Preventive disk maintenance S M A R T setup R L SCSI disk 2 Component
248. ned to the CD ROM drive may be changed reassigned when the secondary PCI module becomes the primary module at startup In such case follow the instruction above to change back the drive letter It is recommended to specify D as the CD ROM drive s drive letter The change of drive letter due to the change of primary PCI module can be suppressed lt General precautions for Windows gt e Drive letter of system volume or boot volume cannot be changed e Up to 26 drive letters can be used on a computer A and B are drive letters for floppy disk drives Generally hard disk drives are assigned C to Z but for network drives drive letters are assigned in a reverse order Z to C e Because many of Windows programs refer to specific drive letters cautions are required for assigning drive letters For example the Path environment variable specifies a program name and a specific drive letter e For performing the procedure above you need to be a member of Backup Operators group or Administrators group or you need to have appropriate authorization 3 34 Windows Setup and Operation DUAL LAN CONFIGURATION The NEC Express5800 ft series builds a dual LAN configuration by using Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter 100Base and Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 1000Base mounted as standard on the PCI module Overview The dual LAN configuration is of two types Adapter Fault Tol
249. nent or connector to attach beforehand If you use a wrong cable or make a wrong connection there is a risk of short circuit that could lead to a fire You also have to observe the following prohibitions about handling and connecting interface cables m Do not use any damaged cable connector m Do not step on the cable m Do not place any object on the cable m Do not use the equipment with loose cable connections 1 12 Precautions for Use Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices A WARNING gt po BPO A Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Unless described herein never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the equipment There is a risk of an electric shock or fire as well as malfunction Do not look into the CD ROM drive The CD ROM drive uses a laser beam Do not look or insert a mirror inside while the system is on A laser beam is invisible if your eyes get exposed to it there is a risk of losing eyesight Do not detach a lithium battery yourself This equipment has a lithium battery Do not detach it yourself If the battery is exposed to fire or water it could explode When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment doesn t work correctly contact your sales agent instead of disassembling replacing or recharging it yourself Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power outl
250. ng a mirror from this volume removes one copy of the volume s data The volume will no longer contain redundant data Select a disk from which to remove a mirror of F New Volume Disks ZP Disk 2 c O computer Management file Action view Window Help e amens Computer Management Local ic EN System Tools a fa Event Viewer z Shared Folders Local Users and Groups g Performance Logs and Alerts GA New volume E Mirror New Volume F Simple EEM c Mirror Dynamic NTFS Dynamic NTFS Dynamic NTFS Device Manager amp Storage E Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management E Ba Services and Applications SSS New Yolume E 8 00 GB NTFS Failed Redundancy 2Missing Dynamic Bestival Det Offline Properties Unallocated J Bie Windows Setup and Operation 3 27 7 Similarly delete the other Missing disk Se Remove mirror 21x ev Ameng Computer Management Local E i System Tools Removing a mirror from this volume removes one copy of the s 5 H E Event Viewer new volume F volume s data The volume will no longer contain redundant ag Shared Folders omc Expl data Local Users and Groups e Mirror Break Mirrored Volume Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager Tae OEO nano DUN F Select a disk from which to remove a mirror of E New Volume ij Storage Change Drive Let
251. ng the system to avoid personal injuries HiT HROES ED tE N FFRIDD TOST BRUCK THCRELT lt Ke As the hard disk drives may retain heat after powering down allow ample time for cooling prior to handling PUED 2 WPPOED 2 MUAORIMS BSBHLOACLSTOI FRUABBRT TFVEMUT FAL In order to prevent accidents such as electrical shock disconnect all cables and external connections when servicing non hotswappable modules MBLSS IV N RY HYSBVRY tHCBATHSMNSLSCLT Fat As some components may become very hot during system operation give ample time to allow cooling as well as use precation when handling internal components immediately after powering down KULOMBICSSUESBVETOT SMB VACSSCUSSTHCSRFSL In order to prevent short circuits and hazards exercise caution and avoid dropping screws inside the system Label C Label D ES WARNING KAO Risk of electric shock do not open Qualified service personnel only No user servicable components inside Label E AN CAUTION This unit uses multiple power supply cords Disconnect all power supply cords prior to Servicing this system 1 4 Precautions for Use Rack mount Model The figures below show locations of the labels on the rack mount model server Label A Label B Label C ia Ogo oon gan gog ognon 1 OadOo aEs Label D Label E Precautions for Use 1 5 Label A BEPRED TRURO TEZI MD RU PFMUMLICOLITSRY RORE BE EBEZAN I
252. nization Indications of status LEDs during diagnosis LED CPU module 1 CPU module 2 Started Operating 1 CPU module status LED1 Red 2 CPU module status LED2 Green Amber v Indications of status LEDs after completion of duplication LED CPU module 1 CPU module 2 Operating Operating 1 CPU module status LED1 2 CPU module status LED2 Green Green IMPORTANT After duplication is completed the status of memory will be checked Wait until this process ends to perform the next step evaluation of start and stop of PCI and CPU modules When the process is complete the following event log will be output Source srabid Type Information Event ID 4137 Description Memory consistency check has completed memory scan Windows Setup and Operation 3 45 NEC Express5800 ft series SERVICE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NEC Express5800 ft series achieves the duplex system using the following service programs in addition to dedicated drivers Service program names shown in Services Stratus ftServer Maintenance and Diagnostics MAD Stratus ftServer Provider Manager Stratus ftServer Storage Manager BMC FW Update Service Windows Management Instrumentation SNMP Service Alert Manager Main Service ESM System Management Service ESMEFSService ESMCommonsService ESRAS Utility Service ESMPS The above programs are necessary for the NEC Express5800 ft ser
253. nnected to the PCI bus 2 Select Enabled for the graphic 3 accelerator board Always select Enabled for the SCSI PCI device to which the hard disk that contains OS is connected Select Disabled for Option ROM of PCI LAN device when the network boot feature is not used Factory set IMPORTANT For the slot which a graphical accelerator board is installed do not specify Disabled 4 18 System Configuration Keyboard Features Select Keyboard Features on the Advanced menu to display the following screen The NumLock submenu allows you to make keyboard settings Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Keyboard Features Item Specific Help NumLock Auto Selects Power on state Key Click Disabled for Numlock Keyboard Auto repeat Rate 10 sec Keyboard Auto repeat Delay 1 sec F1 Help t 1 Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save Changes amp Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting NumLock Auto Enable or disable the NumLock On feature at system start up If Auto is Off selected the NumLock feature will be enabled when an entry with the keypad is detected Key Click Disabled Enable or disable the key click sound Enabled Keyboard 2 sec Select the number of characters Auto repeat Rate 6 sec r
254. not clip disks Be careful not to drop Store floppy disks in a protective case where they are kept away from magnetic waves or dust To prevent data from being erased accidentally the floppy disk has a write protect notch When the disk is write protected you can read data but you cannot write the data or format the disk It is recommendable to write protect floppy disks that contain important data To write protect a floppy disk slide the write protect notch located on its back The floppy disk is a very delicate storage medium Dust or changes in temperature could cause data to be lost Data loss could also be caused by faulty operation and computer trouble To avoid such possible data loss it is recommendable to back up important data regularly Be sure to make back up copies of the disks that are included with NEC Express5800 ft series 2 38 General Description CD ROM Drive NEC Express5800 ft series has a CD ROM drive on the front panel It is a device used to read data from a CD ROM compact disc read only memory Compared to a floppy disk a CD ROM allows for larger volume and fast data readout A CAUTION A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of a burn injury or damage to physical assets For details see PRECAUTIONS S FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 a Do not leave the CD tray ejected About the CD ROM Drive of NEC Express5800 ft series Each PCI module contains a s
255. nt the NEC Express5800 ft series can diagnose the component to detect the fault Installing and Using Utilities To diagnose a component with the NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Maintenance tree of the component in the data viewer Open the tree of the component to be diagnosed and select the Maintenance tree To diagnose of a component with the ft server utility use the utility screen of the component The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be diagnosed Diagnosis component Remote Local CPU Module When a phenomenon causing the When a phenomenon causing the module to be down occurs or a module to be down occurs or a phenomenon supposed to be a phenomenon supposed to be a malfunction occurs malfunction occurs Executable in any of the following Executable in any of the following module states this can be viewed on module states manager screen 9 e When the status LED 1 is red and e Removed the status LED 2 is off Sei Only the status LED 1 illuminates red Sng when the module is in one of the e Firmware Update Complete following states To diagnose the module under e Removed operation bring down the module e Broken before the diagnosis e Shot e Firmware Update Complete no fault found by diagnosis To diagnose the module under operation bring down the module before the diagnosis PCI Module Same as above Same as above Remote Executable from remote management PC by u
256. nt PC directly to Serial port B of the computer to be managed 11 Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the drive of the managed computer and insert the floppy disk storing the configuration information CSL_LESS CFG into the FDD drive Installing and Using Utilities 5 77 12 Power off and on the main unit to reboot the system After one reboot the main menu will appear on the management PC s screen on which you can perform hardware setup and run utilities TIPS If the configuration information CSL_LESS CFG in the FD has already been loaded the main menu will appear without a reboot IMPORTANT For setting up MWA using Console Redirection via WAN or direct specify Onboard COM B to SerialPort Address from BIOS setup utility s System Hardware Console Redirection menu For details see SYSTEM BIOS SETUP in Chapter 4 13 Ifyou use other tools exit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and power off on the main unit IMPORTANT After completing the procedure for remote console connection click Disconnect on the MWA Remote Console window 5 78 Installing and Using Utilities This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 6 Maintenance This chapter describes the daily maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series and precautions when relocating or storing the server 6 2 Maintenance DAILY MAINTENANCE To use your NEC Express5800 ft series in best condition check and maintain reg
257. ntenance TIPS To start the NEC ESMPRO Agent ft server utility installed in the NEC Express5800 ft series select the items as follows Start Menu gt Programs NEC ESMPRO Agent gt ft server utility The maintenance functions that can be executed from NEC ESMPRO include three types those common to all components those specific to particular components and general system settings The maintenance functions common to all components are operated in the same way basically the operation procedure and typical examples of screen images are described below The table below lists the maintenance functions common to all components Component Start Stop eie cane ants R L R L R L R L R L CPU module se ie a Ves es de ee ls PCI module Vel ac a ea Caleb ah SAR eat ee PCI slot Z z _ Ethernet adapter y z SCSI adapter SE e pee S aika tl a Ill lE SCSI enclosure S A I e ENEN aS e esal SCSI electronics v v SCSI slot ea ean esa eae ie eo el e ee R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using ft server utility V Support Not support In ft server utility the MTBF clear of SCSI adapter and Ethernet cannot be performed to onboard devices 5 44 Installing and Using Utilities The table below shows the component specific mainte
258. ntly making comparisons with each other and detecting anomalous diversions in operation Mirrored E New fault tolerant technology L Standard product Even if one hardware module stops the server can continue operation with the other module After the failed module is replaced the new module will obtain information from the other and resume operation NEC Express5800 ft series is a highly fault tolerant Windows server that achieves continuous computing operations data storage mirror and continuous network connection It allows you to run Windows Server 2003 based applications NEC Express5800 ft series achieves continuous computing operations for the Windows server and server based applications with its redundant CPU processing and redundant memory It assures data redundancy through duplication of server data on an independent storage system These features eliminate server downtime that is usually caused by network disconnection or trouble with the I O controller Ethernet adapter or disk drive and support operation of the network and server applications continuously While being transparent to application software NEC Express5800 ft series achieves high fault tolerance NEC Express5800 ft series detects status changes errors and other events and notifies the Windows Event Log of these events If you use an alarm notification tool you can configure NEC Express5800 ft series to notify you when certain events occur NEC E
259. ntrols the UPS 1 Perform a normal shutdown from Windows Server 2003 The system will be powered off automatically Note the POWER LED on the primary side will remain illuminating when AC power is supplied 2 Power off all peripheral devices 2 32 General Description POST Check POST power on self test is a self test function stored on the motherboard of NEC Express5800 ft series When you power on the server POST will start automatically to check the motherboard ECC memory modules CPU modules keyboard mouse etc It also shows startup messages for various BIOS setup utilities According to the factory default settings the NEC logo appears on the display while POST is being performed To view POST s details press Esc TIPS m You can view POST details from the beginning without the need to press Esc when the BIOS menu is displayed select System Configuration Advanced and set Boot time Diagnostic Screen to Enabled see Chapter 4 m You can view the test items and details from a management PC where NEC ESMPRO Manager or NEC MWA is installed You don t always need to check POST details You will need to check messages when m You install a new NEC Express5800 ft series m A failure is suspected m You hear several beeps between the time of the power on and OS start up m The display unit or the LCD shows an error message For details see Error Messages on the Liquid Crystal Dis
260. nuous operation Normally shutdown Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition check that the server is powered off disconnect all power cords and interface cables from the server before installing or removing the optional devices m To remove the CPU or PCI module during the continuous operation disable the intended module place the module off line by using the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent or the NEC ESMPRO Manager from the management PC on the network After a new module is installed to the server enable the module using the ft server utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager TIPS The system is defaulted to automatically boot the module once installed For more information see Chapter 5 m Make sure to provide the same hardware configuration on both groups m Use the same slots and sockets on both groups Do not install those devices having different specifications performance or features m Before removing the setscrews from the CPU and PCI modules place the desired module off line using the ft server utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager System Upgrade 8 5 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE The 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay in front of the server contains six slots in which hard disks with the SCA2 interface are installed The figures used in this section show the rack mount model The orientation is the only difference from the tower model IMPORTANT m Do not use any hard disks that are not authorized by NEC Ins
261. o or more devices the rack may fall down You can only pull out one device at a time Do not install excessive wiring e OOD ODO O To prevent burns fires and damage to the equipment make sure that the rated load of the power branch circuit is not exceeded For more information on installation and wiring of power related facilities contact your electrician or local power company Do not assemble parts alone Precautions for Use 1 15 For Proper Operation Observe the following instructions for successful operation of the server Failure to observe them could lead to malfunction or breakdown Perform installation in a place where the system can operate correctly For details see the separate volume User s Guide Setup Before turning off the power or ejecting a disk make sure that the access LED is off When you have just turned off the power wait at least 30 seconds before turning it on again Once you have turned on the server do not turn it off until the NEC logo appears on the screen Before you move the equipment turn off the power and unplug the cord This server shall not assure reproduction of copy protect CDs using reproduction equipment if such disks do not comply with CD standards Clean the equipment regularly For procedures see Chapter 6 Regular cleaning is effective in preventing various types of trouble Lightning may cause voltage sag As a preventive measure it is recom
262. o the directory in which the image data is saved 2 Select the target component with the ft server utility 3 Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs If the component is operating stop the component 4 Click the Firmware Update button for the target component Sample screen of ft server utility CPU Module ID 0 ft server utility Ele view Window Help MTEF Clear MTEF information is cleared Bring Up Bring Down CPU module is brought up or down Diagnostics Information Start diagnostics of CPU module Fiwmware Start firmware update Version Phoenix ServerBIOS Version 2 0 PB 4 0 rel 6 20 Additionallnformation NEC BIOS Version 0 11 0 Express 5800 320Lb Jump Switch The primary module is switched JumpSwitch p Dump Save memory dump of the stopped module Harvest C Harvest memory dump of the current system without stopping it CPU Module 5 Select Specify new firmware for update enter the directory in which the updated firmware specified A i f p i Choose update method in the input box in step 1 is saved and click the Copy firmware from Online module to Offline one Run button ok Perform the firmware update Enter the file location of the new firmware 6 Check the update result with the event log Browse Cancel Installing and Using Utilities 5 59 7 After the BIO
263. oard and a mouse use USB interface Therefore it is not necessary to power off the server when connecting or disconnecting them Disconnect the keyboard from the server while the devices in the system the server and the peripheral devices remain turned on Wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth Then connect the keyboard to the server The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation To keep the mouse ball clean use the mouse in a place with little dust Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly 1 Disconnect the mouse from the USB hub of the keyboard while the server remains powered on 2 Turn the mouse upside down and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove it Take out the ball from the mouse Mouse 3 Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth Mouse ball If stains remain use a soft cloth to wipe them off Soak the soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with water or warm water and squeeze it firmly 4 Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with Mouse cover cotton swab Use the cotton swab soaked with alcohol if stains remain 5 Put the mouse ball back into the mouse If the mouse or rollers are wet in steps 3 and 4 put it back after fully dried 6 Place the mouse ball cover and rotate it clockwise until it is locked Rollers 7 Connect the mouse to the server the USB hub of the keyboard Maintenance 6 5
264. oard may not be removed or replaced with any other board m Change the BIOS settings For some optional PCI boards you may need to start up the BIOS setup utility to change the Boot Monitoring Time out Period configuration in Advanced Monitoring Configuration For more details see page 4 15 N8804 001P1 100BASE TX Adapter Set IMPORTANT Note the following about this product m For LAN cable s connector use the RJ 45 connector which is compliant with IEC8877 standard Using a different connector may make it difficult to remove the connector m Slots to install the board PCI slot N code Name Group 1 Group 2 Remarks 1 2 3 1 2 3 N8804 001P1 100BASE TX Adapter set vV vV Vv Vv vX Can be installed Cannot be installed m Installation of driver The NEC Express5800 ft series duplicates one or two pairs of 1OOBASE TX adapter sets N8804 001P1 before using After installing Operating System install the drivers in the following procedure and make dual settings of the PCI board TIPS To perform this procedure you have to log on the system as an Administrator or a member of the Administrators group After installing the OS follow the steps below to install a driver and establish a dual configuration 8 42 System Upgrade Mount the N8804 001P1 1OOBASE TX adapter to the slot with the same number in PCI module 1 and 2 an
265. odels Otherwise a breakdown may result m To use the consoleless feature make sure that keyboard is not connected to the server When a keyboard is connected the consoleless feature is disabled because the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console The menu will not be displayed on the management PC Starting Depending on the connection between the management PC and the main unit there are two ways for startup Startup from the management PC connected to LAN Startup from the management PC directly connected serial port B For startup procedures see Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console described later in this chapter IMPORTANT Do not change the boot device order in the BOOT menu of BIOS SETUP The consoleless feature cannot be used if the CD ROM drive is not the first device to launch the system m For LAN connection you can only use LAN port 1 m For direct connection you can only use Serial port B m For consoleless remote operation of the NEC Express5800 ft series you need to save configuration information to a floppy disk Prepare a formatted floppy disk TIPS BIOS will be set as follows m RomPilot Support Enabled m Serial Port B 2F8 IRQ3 m Serial Port Address On board COM B m Baud Rate 19 2K m Flow Control None m Console Connection Direct Installing and Using Utilities 5 9 Menu Items Only the menu items av
266. oe 2 Description Action x The hard disk drives are mirrored Green On Green on and operating normally Green Off Amber Mirroring the DISKs by the RDR Wait for the mirroring to be function completed Some trouble occurred on a hard Reconfigure the hard disk mirror disk of the PCI module 1 See DISK OPERATIONS in The hard disk drive in the PCI Chapter 3 Windows Setup and module 2 is running without Operation mirror If the problem persists contact your sales agent Amber Green Off Mirroring the DISKs by the RDR Wait for the mirroring to be function completed Some trouble occurred on a hard Reconfigure the hard disk mirror disk of the PCI module 2 See DISK OPERATIONS in The hard disk drive in the PCI Chapter 3 Windows Setup and module 1 is running without Operation mirror If the problem persists contact your sales agent Amber Amber Mirroring DISK by Disk Wait until the mirroring is finished Management The DISK LEDs becomes off blinks when the hard disk drive is accessed General Description 2 27 TIPS m When there are many accesses the access LED will blink frequently Check if the LED blinks in green when the number of accesses decreases or if it is green when there are no accesses anymore m When you power on NEC Express5800 ft series and the access LEDs do not illuminate green remount the hard disks LAN Connector LEDs Two LAN ports connectors located
267. of the occurrence This enables the system Administrator to take appropriate action against faults Importance of server management Constantly stable operation and less management workload are keywords in server management Stable operation of server Shutdown of a server immediately leads the customer to lose business opportunities and profits This requires servers to always operate in their perfect state If a fault occurs in a server it is necessary to detect the occurrence as soon as possible make clear the cause and take appropriate action The shorter the time taken from the occurrence of a fault to the recovery from the fault is the smaller the loss of profits and or costs is Load reduction of server management The server management requires many jobs In particular if the system becomes large or remote servers are used required jobs increase further The reduction of the load of the server management brings the decrease in costs and thus customer s benefit m What are NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are server management software used to manage and monitor NEC Express5800 series systems on the network The installation of NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent enables the server configuration performance and fault information to be acquired managed and monitored realtime and also the occurrence of a fault to be detected immediately by the alert repor
268. oid the usage or storage of this product in an environment which may be exposed to corrosive gases such as those including but not limited to sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide nitrogen dioxide chlorine ammonia and or ozone Avoid installing this product in a dusty environment or one that may be exposed to corrosive materials such as sodium chloride and or sulfur Avoid installing this product in an environment which may have excessive metal flakes or conductive particles in the air Such environments may cause corrosion or short circuits within this product resulting in not only damage to this product but may even lead to be a fire hazard If there are any concerns regarding the environment at the planned site of installation or storage please contact your sales agent Precautions for Use 1 11 A CAUTION SS gt Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power outlet before installing removing any optional internal device or connecting disconnecting any interface cable to from the server If the server is off powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source touching an internal device cable or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted from a short circuit Do not use any non designated interface cable Use only interface cables designated by NEC identify which compo
269. on PCI module 1 10 2 SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1 10 5 SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1 10 5 0 SCSI bus 2 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1 10 5 1 Ethernet Board 1 on PCI module 1 1000BASE 10 3 Ethernet Board 2 on PCI module 1 100BASE 10 6 Power supply unit on PCI module 1 10 100 PCI module 2 11 PCI slot 1 on PCI module 2 11 0 PCI slot 2 on PCI module 2 11 1 PCI slot 3 on PCI module 2 11 2 SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 2 11 5 SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 2 11 5 0 SCSI bus 2 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 2 11 5 1 Ethernet Board 1 on PCI module 2 1000BASE 11 3 Ethernet Board 2 on PCI module 2 100BASE 11 6 Power supply unit on PCI module 2 11 100 SCSI enclosure 1 10 40 SCSI slot 1 on SCSI enclosure 1 10 40 1 SCSI slot 2 on SCSI enclosure 1 10 40 2 SCSI slot 3 on SCSI enclosure 1 10 40 3 Electronics 1 on SCSI enclosure 1 10 40 120 Power supply unit on SCSI enclosure 1 10 40 100 Installing and Using Utilities 5 19 Device name Device ID SCSI enclosure 2 11 40 SCSI slot 1 on SCSI enclosure 2 11 40 1 SCSI slot 2 on SCSI enclosure 2 11 40 2 SCSI slot 3 on SCSI enclosure 2 11 40 3 Electronics 1 on SCSI enclosure 2 11 40 120 Power supply unit on SCSI enclosure 2 11 40 100 The figure below shows the actual locations of the device names displayed on the NEC ESMPRO screen In the case of the tower model modules are mounted vertically instead of horizontally PCI module1 SCSI enclosure1 SCSI
270. on at the time of maintenance General Description 2 35 Floppy Disk Drive A USB floppy disk drive is attached to the main unit It allows you to read and write save data using floppy disks The USB floppy disk drive accepts the following types of floppy disks m 2HD floppy disk 1 44MB m 2DD floppy disk 720KB Drive letter of floppy disk drive The drive letter will change when the primary PCI module is switched to the standby PCI module while the Windows operating system is in operation The drive letter of the floppy disk will be determined as follows A will be assigned to the floppy disk drive for the PCI module that is operating as the primary PCI module during Windows operating system boot up B will be assigned to the floppy disk drive for the standby PCI module Ex If a floppy disk drive was connected for the first time while the primary PCI module is group 1 Primary PCI module PCI module for group 1 A drive PCI module for group 2 B drive IMPORTANT In the event that the active PCI module switches to the standby PCI module due to a failure while the system is in operation the floppy disk drive letter will change at the point PCI module switches to the standby module 2 36 General Description Insert Remove Floppy Disk Before inserting a floppy disk into the drive make sure that NEC Express5800 ft series is on and that the drive s USB cable is connected to the USB connector at t
271. onfiguration If you wait for a few seconds POST will go on automatically To start the SETUP utility press F2 while the above message is displayed For setting and parameter functions see the section of BIOS setup When SETUP is completed the server will reboot itself automatically and perform POST A message appears prompting for startup of SCSI BIOS setup utility When a built in SCSI controller is detected a message will appear prompting for startup of SCSI BIOS setup utility If you wait for a few seconds POST will go on automatically If you press Ctrl Q the SCSI BIOS setup utility will start For setting and parameter functions see the section on SCSI setup You will need to use this utility for example when you have changed the server s internal SCSI device connections However you usually don t need to use it When SETUP is complete the server will reboot automatically and perform POST again If multiple SCSI controller boards are mounted on the PCI bus the SCSI BIOS startup message will appear for these boards in numerical order PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI 3 The screen shows SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices 2 34 General Description 7 Upon completion of POST the password entry screen appears prior to OS startup The password entry screen will appear after the normal termination of POST only if you have set a password in the BIOS setup utility SETUP You can enter a passwo
272. onfiguring Motherboard Jumpers ssscsscsesceeeesereeeeeees 4 39 Chapter 5 Installing and Using UtilitieS ccceeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneesenseeeeeees 5 1 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER siie Rah aa a sh Peete Sean eoeee be oe EE 5 2 Start Menu eare tudes Sosncbancomtta A a E E A 5 2 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Men saet a A a ap E eR E 5 4 Consoleless Men syiierrerneire nre ar coats A A sa S E 5 8 Master Control Men scere ssauapeesvesaes sess c6 p55 von ed oven cb sbacasavaban EE EE EEEE hehe aeseets 5 10 NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager 00 eienn er ebrenn Te ae E E S E EEEa EKO E EES 5 11 OVErVIEW siti eE e i AEE E EEE SEE AEE E E E EE TE A E ee 5 11 NEC ESMPRO Agent oepa a a E E E E E AE AE 5 18 NEC ESMPRO Mana ger pessit rasiaan e ee EE E S EA EEEE EEE 5 27 Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series csssecssesseeecesecseesecseeeeceaeeeceaeceeeeeeneeseenaeeees 5 43 NEC MWA MANAGEMENT WORKSTATION APPLICATION X esseere 5 73 Servers to be remotely managed by NEC MWA 0 0 cseeseeneecaeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenenseenaees 5 73 Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console cseeeseeeeeseeeeees 5 73 Chapter 6 Maintenance 22 c0ceccectcceesieseceteesecetesceensnneetecdoecceces stareaceceneenecdseadenncerecned 6 1 DAMY MAINTENANCE ereere ateena ar ed eanta a aara een ae e ES atest deterrents 6 2 OEA aiaa E h OES N NEE E N E E S EES 6 2 Checking STATUS LEDs and LCD Display s sssees
273. onnected to the server TIPS m If the power cord is connected to a power controller like a UPS make sure that it is powered on m When NEC Express5800 ft series is powered on BMCs between the two PCI modules are synchronized The BMC status LED on secondary module blinks See Chapter 2 LEDs for details of the BMC status LED Detach the front bezel or open it in the case of a tower model 3 Confirm that the BMC status LED on both PCI modules are off and press the POWER switch which illuminates green and located on the front panel After a while the NEC logo will appear on the screen POWER switches LEDs You can only use a power switch whose LED is on IMPORTANT m Do not turn off the power before the NEC logo appears m When powering on make sure that the BMC status LED on the both PCI modules are off and then press the power switch While the NEC logo is displayed on the screen NEC Express5800 ft series is performing a power on self test POST to check itself For details see POST Check described later in this chapter Upon the completion of POST the OS will start TIPS If the server finds errors during POST it will interrupt POST and display the error message See Chapter 7 General Description 2 31 Power OFF Follow the steps below to turn off the power If NEC Express5800 ft series is plugged to a UPS see manuals included with the UPS or the application that co
274. ons Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense SoBe ige PRM AE EER PRE Ay RE Be RON TH ERAF SO RRR This class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rigeu de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada CE Statement Warning This is a Class A product In residential environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EN55022 NOTE This product provides resistance against hardware faults with its redundant hardware modules However this does not mean complete fault tolerance is assured For example there is a risk of system down when A fatal fault occurs in software Both modules within a redundant hardware pair break down A fatal fault occurs in a non redundant component such as the clock generator circuitry or the interconnect backplane The entire system is cut off from AC power Trademarks NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC ESMPRO and NEC Express5800 ft series are trademarks of NEC Corporation Stratus is a registered trademark of Stratus Technologies Bermuda Ltd Microsoft Windows Windows NT and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Unite
275. or SCSI adapter on the tree of the Data Viewer If an error occurs on an Ethernet or SCSI adapter view the alert reports Unknown or incorrect information appears in CPU information If you select CPU Module CPU in the FTServer tree of the data viewer unknown or incorrect information appears in some information items The CPU information can be viewed by selecting System CPU in the NEC ESMPRO MIB tree The message prompting you to reconstruct the tree of the data viewer will appear Ifyou dynamically change the configuration of the CPU or PCI module in the relevant system during review of the server information by using the data viewer the message prompting you to reconstruct the tree of the data viewer will appear If you click the Yes button the tree is reconstructed in the data viewer to reflect the change of the system configuration on the data viewer Clicking the No button does not cause the tree to be reconstructed in the data viewer If so the information in the data viewer may be different from the current system information because the change of the system configuration is not reflected on the data viewer 7 40 Troubleshooting The incorrect information is displayed on SCSI slot information When the PCI module is detached and you select SCSI Slot General the displayed Hardware LED information may not be correct To check the status of SCSI slots see the string information in the Status
276. ored disks were removed Gray Installing and Using Utilities 5 41 Also at this time the redundant status of mirrored disks is changed to Warning Mirror Disk 3 Connect a new hard disk Next connect a new hard disk to the same SCSI Slot At this time NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the following alert to manager And icons related to the hard disk are changed to the state of normal in the data viewer When the hard disk is connected SCSI Slot changes the status to Normal General SNMP Report Status a STRATUS_MSG_STATE_ONLINE From Sonic mar_Sonic Address 192 0 0 75 Received Wednesday May 29 2002 03 04 PM Generated Wednesday May 29 2002 03 04 PM Device 10 40 1 is now ONLINE Invoke associated application Invoke Up Down Help Alert report TIPS You can identify the new hard disk by DevicePathID ex 10 40 1 5 42 Installing and Using Utilities When the hard disk is connected SCSI Slot changes the status to Normal SCSI Slot gt General Also at this time the state of the mirrored disks changes to Normal Mirror Disk Installing and Using Utilities 5 43 Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series NEC Express5800 ft series maintenance can be done in two ways one is to use NEC ESMPRO Manager for remote maintenance and the other is to use the NEC ESMPRO Agent ft server utility on the NEC Express5800 ft series for local mai
277. other edge of the board Screw Bends for fastening boards Install the top cover to the PCI module Install the PCI module Connect the network cable and option cables Close the release lever The installed PCI module will start automatically Secure the release lever with the setscrew Check the PCI module status LED and PCI board status LED For description of LED indications see LEDs in Chapter 2 and Setup of Optional PCI Board later in this chapter 8 38 System Upgrade 17 Use cable ties to fasten the extra length of cables Cable ties included with cabinet System Upgrade 8 39 Removing PCI Board Follow the procedure below to remove the PCI board 1 2 3 o N o o p o 11 12 Remove the PCI module Remove the PCI module s top cover Remove the PCI board retainer bracket to dismount the PCI board In the case of a long board unscrew the guide at the other edge and slide it to the front of the board Install the additional slot cover to the open slot Install the connector cover to the relevant slot Attach the PCI board retainer bracket Install the PCI module s top cover Install the PCI module Do not close the release lever yet Connect the network cable and option cables Close the release lever The installed PCI module will start automatically Secure the release lever with the setscrew Check the PCI module status LED and PCI board status LED For
278. ou erty vn fe rg TH Vida Pren the Puno baton to hoki Dump ow Tyee Use Threshois Theerholt be Omet Fas o Wwreawe edre Tma of lant eat Vanor Phoenix Served Verson 200 P8 0 s 620 Frets the ATIF Claw buton to ciw fons anan Meret Do Addtionalicdomelion NEC MOS Vecsion 0110 Ppress SBO0 220L5 Dagrowtcs Intermation Tome ol ant nae Amo Switch Rena The pemary modde s smiched Juw5m ch Duo Save memory damo ofthe stopped module Harvest C Hervent menory dum of the cumert syslen mthou siopprg amp Sas le NEC ESMPRO Manager ft server utility Select FTServer CPU Module gt CPU Select FTServer gt CPU Module gt CPU Module to be removed Maintenance gt Module to be removed Bring Up Bring Down Bring Up Bring Down gt Bring Down Down After the CPU module enters into off line status the status LED will change as follows Fail LED Red State LED Off lt Tower model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it lt Rack mount model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels Loosen the setscrews that secured the CPU module s release lever Hold the release lever of the CPU module and pull it off The CPU module is slightly pulled out toward you System Upgrade 8 13 5 Pull off the module halfway slowly Pushing down the latch lever on the side to unlock it pull the module off the rack
279. ou can remove the cover IMPORTANT Carefully keep the removed DIMM connector cover Insert a DIMM into the DIMM socket straight TIPS Pay attention to the orientation of the DIMM The terminal of the DIMM has a cutout to prevent misinsertion After the DIMM is completely inserted into the socket the levers are automatically closed Mount the CPU module Connect the power cords Press POWER switch to power on the module Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the massage and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 7 After starting the OS set the paging file size to at least the recommended value 1 5 times the installed memory size System Upgrade 8 19 Removing DIMM Follow the procedure below to remove the DIMM Make sure to power off the server before installation except when replacing DIMM TIPS Unless at least two DIMMs are installed the server does not work 1 Shutdown OS The system turns off automatically 2 Disconnect power cord from outlet 3 Remove the CPU module 4 Open the levers on the target DIMM socket The DIMM is unlocked and you can remove the device 5 Mount the CPU module 6 Connect the power cord Press the POWER switch to power on the module Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the massage and see the POST error messages listed in
280. ou might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below IMPORTANT m The SETUP utility is intended for system Administrator use only m The SETUP utility allows you to set a password The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system parameters of the SETUP utility With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited m Do not set any password before installing the OS m The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility Dialog boxes appearing on your SETUP utility thus may differ from descriptions in this User s Guide If you find anything unclear see the online help or ask your sales agent System Configuration 4 3 Starting SETUP Utility Powering on the server starts POST Power On Self Test and displays its check results If the NEC logo is displayed press Esc After a few seconds either of the following messages appears at bottom left on the screen depending on your system configuration Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Press lt F12 gt to Network You may see either of the following messages at bottom left on the screen when POST terminates Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to SETUP Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt SETUP lt F12 gt Network Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu If you have
281. ource EvntAgnt ID 1015 Description TraceLevel parameter not located in registry Default trace level used is 32 SCSI control error appears in the system event log There is sometimes a case that SCSI control error that has a source of sraq160 appears in the system event log This symptom occurs when the processing speed of HDDs is slower than the request from the operating system and the process will be continued properly by the retry function Since this does not affect any operations check the detailed data as described below and ignore that log if the data is either f0030004 or f0030015 However if the SCSI control error in the detailed data above repeatedly shows either f0030004 or f0030015 more than 10 times a week as an indication the HDD failure can be occurring Contact your maintenance service company 7 36 Troubleshooting Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM check the following O Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM during POST and restart the server If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM during POST and restart the server an error message will appear or the OS will boot O Is BIOS configuration correct The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server Use the BIOS setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the CD ROM drive first l
282. ove it is monitoring the server Actions to Take When Temperature Voltage Error Occurs on CPU PCI Modules At the time when a temperature or voltage error occurs on CPU PCI module necessary actions will differ depending on their status as shown below You can check the status of each module from the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility Duplex Stop the failed CPU PCI module Simplex Shut down the system Other than duplex or simplex TIPS m Ifthe status is Empty the module is not mounted Sensor monitoring is not conducted m If disks are mounted on PCI modules the status of both modules is Simplex while the disks are mirrored Temperature or voltage error occurring during disk mirroring will result in the Installing and Using Utilities 5 25 system to shut down Total Status of the PCI Module When each module s status is simplex the total status of the PCI module displayed on the Data Viewer is yellow warning and the status will be reflected to the server status The ft control software 3 0 or later does not display the information on Ethernet or SCSI adapter on the tree of the Data Viewer If an error occurs on an Ethernet or SCSI adapter view the alert reports CPU Information In CPU Information of Data Viewer s system tree the external clock is listed as Unknown When ft Server Tree Appears on Date Viewer in an Incorrect Manner If you open a Data Viewer im
283. parate volume User s Guide Setup Before going on to main chapters be sure to read Precautions for Use These precautions are very important for using the product safely Chapter 1 Precautions for Use This chapter describes precautions necessary to use the product safely and properly Be sure to read this chapter before using the product It also provides information on user support It will be helpful when you need maintenance service support etc Chapter 2 General Description This chapter describes what you should know about the product its component names functions operating procedures as well as handling of devices and other parts Chapter 3 Windows Setup and Operation This chapter describes setup and operation specific to the product when it is on Windows Chapter 4 System Configuration This chapter describes how to make settings of built in basic input output system It also describes factory shipped parameters Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities This chapter describes features and operating procedures of a standard utility NEC EXPRESSBUILDER It also describes procedures to install and operate various software programs contained in its CD ROM Chapter6 Maintenance This chapter describes maintenance procedures and use of maintenance tools If you need to move the product for maintenance purposes follow the steps provided in this chapter Chapter 7 Troubleshooting If the product does not work properly s
284. play LCD in Chapter 7 TIPS Although there is no LCD on the front of NEC Express5800 ft series you can check error messages using NEC MWA or NEC ESMPRO Manager For details see Chapter 7 General Description 2 33 Flow of POST This section walks you through how POST is performed 1 When you power on the system one selected CPU PCI module will start up POST will be performed on this selected CPU PCI module Memory check starts A message appears at the upper left of the screen to show that the basic and expanded memories are being counted The memory check may take a few minutes to complete depending on the server s memory size Likewise it may take about one minute for the screen to appear when the server is rebooted Note that if you have replaced the PCI module the server will perform a reset of the MAC address then reboot itself before the memory check The server starts processor check IO check and initialization Several messages appear they show the ID of the selected CPU PCI modules information on the processor detection of the keyboard and mouse etc A message appears at the lower left of the screen prompting for startup of the BIOS setup utility SETUP Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP You will need to start it when you want modify the configuration for using the server Unless this message appears together with an error message you don t need to start the utility to modify the c
285. porting the RDR function secure reliability by making disks duplexed per disk using the ft control software s RDR function Duplexing disks by the RDR function enables the disks to be resynchronized in a short period of time when their mirror has been broken due to causes such as PCI module replacement Setting RDR to disks duplicates the disks of paired slots as shown in the figure below and Windows ex Disk Management and Device Manager recognizes a paired disks as a single virtual disk Paired slots Group 1 Group 2 Slots used for mirroring process Corresponding slots Virtual disk name given by the RDR Utility PCI module 1 Slot 1 PCI module 2 Slot 1 RDR Virtual Disk 1 PCI module 1 Slot 2 lt PCI module 2 Slot 2 RDR Virtual Disk 2 PCI module 1 Slot 3 lt PCI module 2 Slot 3 RDR Virtual Disk 3 Note In the above table the PCI module names correspond to the following modules PCI module for Group1 PCI module 1 PCI module for Group2 PCI module 2 Cautions for using the RDR function 1 RDR can be set only to the disks inserted into the built in slots of NEC Express5800 ft series 2 Be sure to specify RDR to all disks inserted to the built in slots and make duplex settings 3 RDR can be set only to basic disks If a span volume or stripe volume is needed make settings of RDR to a basic disk and then change the disk to a dynamic disk from Disk Management 4 The disks to set RDR must have the same c
286. press5800 ft series is a fault tolerant ft server focusing on high reliability in terms of fault tolerance in addition to high performance scalability and general versatility provided by NEC Express5800 series In the event of trouble its dual configuration will allow the system to instantaneously isolate the failed parts to assure non stop running operation will be moved smoothly from one module to the other minimizing damage to it You can use this NEC Express5800 ft series in a mission critical system where high availability is required By the use of Windows2003 operating system it also provides outstanding openness for general purpose applications etc To make the best use of these features read this User s Guide thoroughly to understand how to operate NEC Express5800 ft series ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This User s Guide helps a user to properly setup and use the product Consult this guide to ensure safety as well as to cope with trouble during a system setup and daily operation Keep this manual handy This User s Guide is intended for users who have a good knowledge on the basic use of Windows2003 NT operating systems and general I O devices such as a keyboard and mouse How to Use This User s Guide This guide consists of eight chapters and appendices To help you find a solution quickly the guide contains the following information For descriptions on setting up this product see the se
287. ption Your Setting Processor Type Intel Xeon Processor Indicates the type of the installed CPU view only Processor Speed 2 80GHz Indicates the clock speed of the installed CPU view only Cache RAM 512KB Indicates the cache RAM size view only System Memory 584KB Indicates the total size of the basic memory view only Extended Memory Extended memory size Indicates the total size of the extended memory view only BIOS Version Version of BIOS Indicates the version of the system BIOS view only System Time HH MM SS Specify the current time System Date MM DD YYYY Specify the current date Language English US Select a language in which the Frangais SETUP is displayed Deutsch Only English US is supported Italiano currently Espanol Primary Master CD ROM Indicates device type connected to IDE Primary master View only Factory set IMPORTANT Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions After transporting the equipment After storing the equipment After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed environment conditions Temperature 10 to 35 C Humidity 20 to 80 Check the system clock once in a month It is recommended to operate the system clock using a time server NTP server if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time accuracy If the system clock goes out of
288. puter Management Loca Wohamas Layers type Fil System Stature amay H i Sytem Tools orien thy 3 91 Gj vore Viewer ey Sytem 6 01 GB P gg Prod Folders D AG Local Users and Groups Performance Logs and Alerts D 17 0968 Unallocated E Unatocoted If Sagie voume Il Merored voume 2 3 When the Welcome to the Extend Volume SASMMENMHHN Wizard dialog box of the Extend Volume Wizard appears click Next Welcome to the Extend Volume Wizard This wizard helps you increase the size of simple and spanned volumes on dynamic disks You can extend a volume by adding space from one or more additional disks To continue click Next Windows Setup and Operation 3 13 4 On the Select Disks dialog box enter the s bbtiushuce Select Disks amount of space to extend and click Next You can use space on one or mare dynamic diks to extend the volume In this case 1500MB is added Select the dynamic disks you want to use and then click Add Available Selected 28851 MB Disk 1 28851 MB Disk3 17500 MB eee lt Remove All Total volume size in megabytes MB 5500 Rea Extend Yolume Wizard 5 Check the settings on the Completing the Completing the Extend Volume Extend Volume Wizard dialog box and click Wizard Finish You selected the following settings To close this wizard click Finish 6 The size of the volume is SEZZSIOEIL a o x
289. r more than 10 C differences between room temperature and atmospheric temperature Disk devices Approximately 2 3 hours Tape media Approximately 1 day Make sure that the optional devices are attachable and connectable to the equipment There is a risk of malfunctions that could lead to a breakdown of the equipment even if you could attach and connect 1 16 Precautions for Use m Make sure that your options are compatible with the system If you attach any incompatible option there is a risk of malfunction that could lead to a breakdown m It is recommended to use NEC s genuine option products Some competitors products are compatible with this server However servicing for trouble or damage resulting from such a product will be charged even within the warranty period Precautions for Use 1 17 TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY When you transfer or sell the product or its included items you must observe the following Server Attach this User s Guide to the server you are transferring or selling to a third party IMPORTANT Data remaining on hard disk When you transfer your server you are responsible for erasing important data stored on its hard disk e g customer information accounting information you must be careful to prevent such data from leaking out to outsiders Even if you perform Empty trash on Windows or Linux operating system or execute a format command to erase data superficially the data
290. r or resetting does not work Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for over four seconds The power is forcibly turned off To turn on the power back again wait approximately 30 seconds after turning off the power forced shutdown lt Rack mount model gt oi af a o F Press it for over 4 seconds IMPORTANT If the remote power on feature is used power on the server and start the OS and turn off the power in the normal way System Configuration 4 39 Clear CMOS Password Configuring Motherboard Jumpers With the pre installed SETUP utility you can set desired passwords to protect data stored on the server from unauthorized user access If you forget the passwords you can clear them by following the procedure described in this section You can also use the same procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server IMPORTANT m Clearing the CMOS data restores the factory settings m To clear passwords or CMOS data power off the server To clear passwords or the CMOS data use the jumper switch on the PCI module board of the server The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location IMPORTANT Do not change any other jumper switch settings Any improper change may cause the server to fail or malfunction Use clips on pins 11 and 12 Pins for protecting clearing passwords Pins for protecting clearing CMOS data 4 40 System Configuration m Pins for protect
291. r the status of CPU and DIMM displayed under CPU module in the FTServer tree on a Data Viewer becomes Online and the status color becomes green 5 22 Installing and Using Utilities Hard Disk Drives Mirrored By the Rapid Disk Resync RDR Function The Data Viewer s Mirror Disk tree of FTSever shows a pair of hard disk drives constructing mirroring as one mirror Therefore the status of a volume such as span volume and striping volume over multiple hard disk drives created by the RDR function may not be displayed correctly Use the RDR Utility for checking the state of mirrored hard disk drives created by the RDR function Fault Time of SCSI Slots In the NEC Express5800 ft series with ft control software 3 0 Time of last fault in Maintenance under SCSI slot on a Data Viewer is not supported Therefore the time will not be displayed correctly Community Authority Depending on your OS type or its version settings for community SNMP service s security function are not made or default settings of authority are different To enable the remote shutdown and threshold change functions via NEC ESMPRO Manager make settings of community and set its authority to READ CREATE or READ WRITE Monitoring with NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 0 or Earlier Some items cannot be monitored with NEC ESMPRO Manager of version 4 0 or earlier NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 1 is registered in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Use the NEC
292. r moving a tower model unit 5 BMC status LED See LEDs in this chapter for details 6 PCI module status LED 1 See LEDs in this chapter for details 7 PCI module status LED 2 See LEDs in this chapter for details 8 DISK ACCESS LED See LEDs in this chapter for details 9 CPU module status LED 1 See LEDs in this chapter for details 10 CPU module status LED 2 See LEDs in this chapter for details General Description 2 9 Front View inside Tower model fj Yr apere e A a 0 Sr a 4i fe i So Rack mount model 2 10 General Description 1 PCI module for group 1 A module that includes a PCI board and LAN controller 2 PCI module for group 2 A module that includes a PCI board and LAN controller 3 CPU module for group 1 A module that includes a CPU processor and memory DIMM 4 CPU module for group 2 A module that includes a CPU processor and memory DIMM 5 POWER switch A switch for turning on off power to the system The POWER switch on the primary PCI module will be lit Press it once to turn on power Press it again to turn off power Depress the switch for more than four seconds to force the system to power down The POWER switch on the secondary PCI module will be unlit and will not respond until a failure in the primary PCI module causes the secondary PCI module to assume primary functionality 6 CD ROM drive Used for reading data from CD ROMs Although there ar
293. ration Maximum 6GB The standard DIMM must be replaced Expansion unit 2 DIMMs 256MB x 2 512 MB x 2 Memory module DDR200 SDRAM DIMM Registered Type Error check ECC Graphics VRAM CT69000 VRAM 2MB Auxiliary Floppy disk standard 3 5 inch drive x 1 USB input Hard disk standard None device Hard disk maximum 879 0GB 146 5GB x 6 The user area is reduced to a half of the physical capacity due to software mirroring CD ROM standard ATAPI interface x 1 Load on tray type x24 speed A ready drive is indicated by POWER LED of that PCI module File bay 5 25 inch None 3 5 inch 6 slots Additional PCI 6 slots slot 2 slots are used for graphics board LAN interface 1000BASE 1 100BASE TX 10BASE T 2 ports 100BASE TX 10BASE T 2 ports External USB 4 pin 2 ports 2 ports are used by keyboard and external USB interface FDD SCSI VHDCI 68 pin connector 2 ports Serial D sub 9 pin 2 ports Network RJ 45 4 ports Display MINI D sub 15 pin 1 port Cabinet design Deskside and mini tower Rack mount type External dimensions 222 width x 560 height x 795 depth mm 370mm if stabilizers included 480 width x 177 height x 790 depth mm Weight 68 kg Max 73kg 56 kg Max 61kg Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 10 200 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 1 Hz Power consumption 880 VA 870 W Environment
294. rd up to three times If you enter an incorrect password three times the startup will be unsuccessful In this case turn off the power and then turn it on again after waiting 30 seconds to boot the server IMPORTANT Do not set a password before installing the OS 8 Upon completion of POST the OS will start up Behavior at Occurrence of Error If POST or OS startup does not finish normally the server will reboot itself automatically At the time of reboot it will select the other CPU PCI module and run POST or OS startup In this manner the server retries POST or OS startup with different combinations of CPU PCI modules If POST does not finish normally with any combinations the server will stop with the state of DC OFF While performing retries the server displays or registers the error types For details of error messages see Chapter 7 Troubleshooting POST Error Messages When the server detects an error during POST it will notify you of the occurrence in the following manners m Displays an error message on the display unit m Displays an error message on the LCD m Makes a beeping sound For details see Error Messages on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD in Chapter 7 These notification methods are described in POST Error Messages in Chapter 7 IMPORTANT Before you contact your sales agent write down the error messages and patterns of the beeping sound They will serve as helpful informati
295. rd with a wet hand There is a risk of an electric shock Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe There is a risk of a gas explosion A CAUTION gt e amp e ee Do not plug the cord in a nonconforming outlet Use a wall outlet with specified voltage and power type There is a risk of a fire or current leakage Avoid installing the equipment where you may need an extension cord If the cord that does not meet the power specifications there is a risk of overheating that could lead to a fire Do not plug too many cords in a single outlet If the rated current is exceeded there is a risk of overheating that could lead to a fire Do not plug the cord insecurely Insert the plug firmly into an outlet There is a risk of heat or fire due to poor contact If dust settles on the slots and it absorbs moisture there is also a risk of heat or fire Do not use nonconforming power cords Use the power cords specified by NEC If the rated current is exceeded there is a risk of a fire You also have to observe the following prohibitions to prevent an electric shock and a fire caused by damages of the cords Do not pull on the cord Do not pinch the cord Do not bend the cord Keep chemicals away from the cord Do not twist the cord Do not place any object on the cord Do not use cords as bundled Do not alter modify or repair the cord Do not staple the cor
296. rder of SCSI IDs The information to be displayed includes the device manufacturer product name and firmware revision SCSI Disk Utility If you select SCSI Disk Utility from the Fast UTIL Options menu the utility menu which is used to format or verify the connected SCSI devices appears IMPORTANT m Devices can be processed in each SCSI bus and SCSI ID Be careful not to forget the selected bus and ID m When performing low level format select Advanced Monitoring Configuration Option ROM Scan Monitoring and choose Disabled in BIOS setup utility See SYSTEM BIOS SETUP page 4 2 for details of the setting m The selection of Continue With Format in Low Level Format causes all data in disks to be lost Low Level Format Formats the device selected in Continue With Format physically If you select Do Not Format Disk the previous menu appears again m Verify Disk Media Verifies the device selected in Continue With Verify If you select Do Not Verify Media the previous menu appears again m Select Different Disk Selects another SCSI device on the same SCSI bus Select Host Adapter If you select Select Host Adapter from the Fast UTIL Options menu the list of the host adapters installed in the main system is displayed Select an adapter to change its settings IMPORTANT The adapter QLA12160 Ultra3 2000 is used for built in hard disk Do not select it The utilit
297. ription of a danger action may not always be indicated SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS Attention Indicates a risk of an electric shock Indicates a risk of an injury due to heat Indicates a risk of catching your fingers Indicates a risk of a fire or smoke Indicates a general precaution or warning that is not defined herein Indicates a risk of losing eyesight due to laser beam Indicates a risk of an injury or damage to physical assets due to a hazardous material gt gt PPe gt Prohibited actions Indicates a general prohibition that is not defined herein Do not disassemble repair or modify the equipment There is a risk of an electric shock or fire OO Mandatory actions Unplug the server There is a risk of an electric shock or fire Indicates a general action to take that is not defined herein Make sure to follow the instructions SA NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communicati
298. rmation clear of the CPU modules res the Mra Upi taston he OU Bere lie promene eignaSy em Prens ta Dumei taaan Pad Darp D j o Frera te MTOM Cheat baaton to cha caw Sui ore an wie j Daagnoutncs todeaatnon Tame of mat nay Pana Installing and Using Utilities 5 29 m Update Allows the device identification information of the CPU modules to be viewed and BIOS of the CPU modules to be updated See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for the update of BIOS of the CPU modules The detailed device identification information can be checked by selecting ESMPRO tree Hardware tree Field Replaceable Unit tree m CPU Allows the information of the CPU on the CPU modules to be viewed DIMM Allows the information of DIMM on the CPU modules to be viewed 5 30 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring PCI Module To monitor the PCI modules and the components on the PCI modules refer to the PCI Module tree To see the information on the PCI Module tree select the target PCI module from PCI Module in the FTServer tree You can see the following information on the PCI modules and the components on the PCI modules of the PCI Module tree This section describes the general information screens of the PCI modules The components on the PCI modules are described later General Allows the configuration and other information of the PCI modules to be viewed Mainten
299. rotations and a threshold depending on a model exist Therefore keep in mind when an applicable sensor is referred to by NEC ESMPRO Manager displayed as follows e Astate is displayed to be unknown on a data viewer indicated by gray e The present value and number of rotations are displayed to be unknown on a data viewer e Astate is displayed in grey on the data viewer of a Web component e Nothing is displayed about the present value or number of rotations on the data viewer of a Web component Even if displayed as mentioned above monitoring is performed and there is no problem Temperature Voltage Error Occurs on CPU PCI Modules At the time when a temperature or voltage error occurs on CPU PCI module necessary actions will differ depending on their status as shown below You can check the status of each module from the Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or the ft server utility Status Actions Duplex Stop the failed CPU PCI module Simplex Shut down the system Other than duplex or simplex No action is required Monitoring of shutdown When monitoring shutdown all shutdown processing serves as the candidate for monitoring If there is application which uses a shutdown which is not accompanied by reboot of OS or power supply OFF set up the timeout time for a long time or turn OFF monitoring Troubleshooting 7 43 The external clock of CPU information is listed as Unknown
300. rssirrersresrsrrrerreressesrereerees 1 18 IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED neinar e a aE A e EEE 1 19 ABOUT REPAIR PARTS Serene n a a e a E E E anne 1 19 Chapter 2 General Description cceecceseeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeseseeeenseeeeeeeeeseaesaneenenseeeees 2 1 STANDARD FEATURES fiviacsciianiin 6 hinds adhd tel alvin A E a deh E a 2 2 HOW THE OPERATING SYSTEM SEES THE CPU MODULES cc eeeeceecseeeeceteeeeeteeseeees 2 6 How CPU modules appear on Device Manager sceceesescseeeceseeecesecseeeeceeeecaeeeeeseeaeeseens 2 6 How CPU modules appear on Task Managet cece eeeeceeeceescesecesecesecsecaecseeeseseseseeeennens 2 6 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS cccsssssssecseeesceseeeeeceseeecsaecaeesecneesesnaeeeeeas 2 7 Front View i iniseti ates toa catia abe isan EE E e AOE bila dtuaide anon s 2 7 Front Ve Ws Onside Jiane ce ook ike Pea hess Cot ca E E A Me ac Pose E E este es 2 9 CDROM Drive aa eh hh vekces oan ba heck aeeesen ehh wena dest eah aero Nk 2 10 RE av VIG W ives s seh r a a wi thet eE AAE A ARA Pecom AE STEES 2 11 CPU Modules c5 e sobs r e os lock snconpscunathy Rare TEAR TOS 2 13 PCD MO du le eis isnot a a r ea A ar E Ra E E E ER 2 15 Chassis Board Layoutanoi srn arae a n eA e a A RA EAA En A 2 16 DEEDS pssst E E E E E A 2 17 BASIC OPERATION 205 255 eee ar e a r diets tes A erie e on as eee eee oes S in 2 28 Locking and Unlocking the Front Bezel s eseeseeeesseeresesssesrereereressstststerretssss
301. rting installing or removing options m Handle the module fixing screw with your hand not by using any tool m If you have replaced the module attach an HDD ID label indicating the module number to the upper part of the screw fixing the module TIPS The primary PCI module is the one whose POWER LED is on 8 28 System Upgrade Precautions m If you remove a PCI module during operation dual configuration of its internal hard disks will be cancelled If you mount the module again the dual configuration will be restored automatically However do not perform a system shutdown or remove any of the PCI modules before the dual configuration is completed Otherwise hard disk data could be corrupted m Removing the primary active module will cause unexpected trouble Be sure to remove the secondary inactive module m When the secondary BMC is not in synchronous condition removing the PCI module on the primary BMC will lose the SG data system data If one of the STATUS LEDs is blinking in red do not remove the PCI module associated with another STATUS LED When DC power is off BMC 1 BMC 2 Status Off Primary Blinking in red Do not remove the PCI module on Primary Secondary BMC side At 1 second intervals BMC Sync disabled Off Primary Lit in red Secondary Do not remove either of the PCI modules During BMC Sync Off Primary Blinking in red Do not remove eit
302. ructions to use the server safely Failure to follow A these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 ASO A e Do not disassemble repair or alter the server e Do not look into the CD ROM drive e Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server Cleaning the NEC Express5800 ft series For daily cleaning wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth Follow the procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces IMPORTANT m To avoid altering the material and color of the server do not use volatile solvents such as thinner or benzene to clean the server m The power receptacle the cables the connectors on the rear panel of server and the inside of the server must be kept dry Do not moisten them with water 1 Make sure that the server is powered off 2 Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet 3 Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth 4 Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or warm water and squeeze it firmly 5 Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4 6 Soak a soft cloth in water squeeze it firmly and wipe the server with it once again 6 4 Maintenance 7 Wipe the server with a dry cloth 8 Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse IMPORTANT A keyb
303. rver before removing the CPU module The procedures described below are for replacement of DIMMs Removing the module being operating may cause unexpected trouble Use the management software e g ft server utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager to identify the module to be removed so that the module is removed when it is stopped without fail Then remove the relevant module after verifying the status LED on the CPU module For information on the status LEDs see LEDs in Chapter 2 m Handle the module fixing screw with your hand not by using any tool m If you have replaced the module attach an HDD ID label indicating the replaced module number to the upper part of the fixing screw of the module m When replacing a PCI module and a CPU module replace one module and wait until dual configuration is established to replace the other module If you replace the both modules simultaneously dual configuration of either CPU modules or PCI modules may fail See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 8 12 System Upgrade Removing CPU Module Follow the procedure below to remove the CPU module 1 Stop the CPU module you want to remove To this end use the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to your server or the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager For the detailed procedure see NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series in Chapter 5 Bwy Up Bing Oon Prens Pa Berg Up tutor
304. rvice and click the Stop Confirm that ESMCommonService stopped and close the Service Do the disk related works Open the Service again select ESMCommonService and click the Start 2 OF Ao Oe eS h ek Confirm that ESMCommonService is active and close the Service and Control Panel About the warning event of CPU load Monitoring If NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get performance information from the OS due to a temporary resource shortage or high load ratio on the system it will record the following event log However there is no real problem on operation In the description Y and X represent alphanumeric characters Source ESMCpuPerf EventID 9005 Description Cannot get system performance information now Y YYY Code xxxx If NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get information it will treat the load ratio as 0 So if NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get information continuously the CPU load ratio may appear lower than the actual value Connection with Hard Disk Drive The preventive hard disk drive maintenance function may not work properly when a hard disk drive which was used in a system where NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed is connected to other systems Make sure not to connect such hard disk drives 5 24 Installing and Using Utilities Change Settings of File System Monitoring Function New settings in thresholds of monitoring interval and free space monitoring are not reflected immediately after they
305. ry PCI module from the FTSever tree on the left pane and click Down of Bring Up Bring Down When you stop the operation of the primary PCI module a failover occurs and the secondary PCI module becomes the primary module 5 PCI Module 1D 10 ft server utility 15 x File View Window Help 2 E e FTServer General I Disk Failure Prediction CPU Module MTBF al MTBF Clear ur information is cleared Clear feo PCI Module ID 10 MB PCI Module ID 11 j SCSI Enclosure BMC MTBF Type Use Threshold C Never Restart C Always Restart Apply Bring Up Bring Down PCI module is brought up or down Up Diagnostics Information Start diagnostics of PCI module Diagnostics Status Duplex The following events or changes occur when stopping the primary PCI module and the module fails over The screen temporarily blacks out and then displayed again The following message will appear from the taskbar Windows FT Orphaning A disk that is part of a fault tolerant volume can no longer be accessed The message denotes that the mirror volumes of the hard disk stored in the disconnected PCI module are released The message will not appear if disks are duplicated by the RDR function Indications of PCI modules status LEDs change as follows Indications of status LEDs LED Secondary Primary 1 BMC status LED Green and blinking 2 P
306. s 1 Install the top cover to the PCI module TIPS Check the left right and upper tabs on the top cover are certainly engaged with the PCI module Secure the top cover to the PCI module with the three setscrews 3 Firmly hold the PCI module with both hands and insert it into the server 4 Hold the module in such a way that its back panel connector faces the back of the rack and engage the guides of the module and chassis to insert it slowly 5 Hold the release lever to push the module as far as it goes Do not close the release lever yet Release lever 6 Connect the network cable and option cables 8 32 System Upgrade 7 Close the release lever The installed PCI module will start automatically IMPORTANT Unless the release levers are located inside the rack frame the module won t be mounted correctly 8 Screw the release levers The hook is located before the frame Correct The hook is located behind the frame System Upgrade 8 33 PCI BOARD Up to three PCI boards can be installed to the PCI module however one video board is already installed in each module in standard configuration IMPORTANT m The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board Do not touch the PCI board terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place t
307. s are replaced in correct order the mirror may not be re configured Check if the steps were correct 7 26 Troubleshooting The keyboard or mouse fails to operate O Is the cable properly connected Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server O Are the keyboard and mouse are compliant with NEC Express5800 ft series Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed O Is BIOS configuration correct The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility lt Menu to check Advanced gt Keyboard Features gt O Does the server have drivers installed Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse drivers are installed These drivers are installed along with the OS Some OS s allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings Refer to manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct O Are you using a PS2 USB conversion connector The PS2 USB conversion connector is not supported Use the keyboard and mouse that are specified by NEC Screen freezes keyboard and mouse don t work If the amount of memory is large it takes time to copy the memory in dual mode and the system stops working during the copying It s not system trouble Message New Hardware Found appears Su
308. s how to maintain hard disks 1 Confirmation of hard disk failure If NEC ESMPRO Agent detects some problem with a hard disk it will report an alert of the problem to NEC ESMPRO Manager Please check the alert viewer in the manager regularly Ex If a hard disk in SCSI Slot 10 40 1 is broken agent reports the following alert Device 10 40 1 is now BROKEN And manager displays the problem information of the hard disk in the SCSI enclosure SCSI Slot General of the data viewer Oe Oe yew lo toe E 5E Encim a o l a a Of sim e Fer Viele eres FL C Perma Warrires IB MAbriormal SCSI Slot gt General Installing and Using Utilities 5 37 Confirmation of mirror status To check the redundancy status of the failed mirror disk open Mirror Disk screen under FTServer On this screen you can check the redundancy status of the mirror and the status of the mirrored hard disks ell SONIC gt Dataviewer Cle Q3 yer Tooke ipo EO ol O E SE E MN Aircenal Mirror Disk ee Heip press P1 IMPORTANT The mirroring redundancy status will change depending on the status of the two hard disks that make up a mirror as follows Status of hard disk 1_ Status of hard disk 2 Status of mirror volume Duplex Duplex Normal Simplex z Others Warning Simplex Duplex Simplex Normal Others Warning Others Duplex Warning Simplex Warning
309. s not problem supplied Check the condition of power unit Remount the PCI module Red In the process of configuring or Wait for a while until the indication changes If canceling the duplex mode the indication unchanged check the PCI board slot status using NEC ESMPRO Manager Although the PCI board is Make the slot of the board installed from NEC mounted it may be offline or not ESMPRO Manager online be working Mount the PCI board correctly System Upgrade 8 43 N8803 031F Fibre Channel Controller m Slots to install the board PCI slot N code Name Group 1 Group 2 Remarks 1 2 3 1 2 3 N8803 031F Fibre Channel V v vy vy Each PCI module can Controller contain one board only Only one of them can be mounted cannot be mounted together vV Can be installed Cannot be installed Installation of driver 1 When you start the system after instal EEE N8803 031F Fibre Channel Controller wizard to detect new hardware will automatically start up Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Fibre Channel Controller Select Install from a list of specific loq Advanced and then click Next If your hardware came with an installation CD 3 or floppy disk insert it now Whatdo you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended install from
310. s not required Skip to the next step and check the duplex status FAROR Utility File E Action amp Help H PCI module 1 Name E SCSI Enclosure DevicePathID Slot 1 Op State State Disk Harddisko Luni q OP State Reason vendor F Slot 2 ProductID Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 4 productRevisionLeve PEE ET Slot 3 SerialNumber Success PCI module 2 SCSI Enclosure Slot 1 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 f ObjectName O ConfigState l Add RDR operation was successful MTEF Current MTBF ThresholdSta j Add RDR Virtual Disk Deactivate RDR Virtual Dis RDR Yirtual RDR Virtual Clear MTBF Resynchronize This Disk 7 Click Logical Disk Information and then RDR Virtual Disk x x 1 2 3 to confirm that the synchronization is started EA RoR vees File F Action amp Help H Name Value El PCI module 1 E SCSI Enclosure DevicePathID 38 2 Slot 1 Op State State Simplex Disk Harddiska Lun1 q OP State Reason None Vendor Stratus Slot 2 ProductID Data Duplex LUN Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 f productRevisionLevel 4 Slot 3 SerialNumber 50891937 A96D 4D64 8 E PCI module 2 ObjectName Harddisk1 SCSI Enclosure Caption RDR Virtual Disk 2 Slot 1 DevicePath 1 10 40 2 1 DevicePath 2 4 Disk Harddisk0 LUN1 E ResyncLUNPriority a E Slot 2 Status Resync 0 percent Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 Slo
311. sertion After pressing the CPU softly against the socket close the levers to fasten it Remove the film of the cool sheet that is affixed on the heat sink Place the heat sink on top of the CPU Fasten the heat sink with its clip Engage the clip holes with tabs on the sides of the retention engage one hole first and engage the other holding the first hole Ve ves A 8 24 System Upgrade 13 Check to see if the heat sink is mounted parallel with the motherboard IMPORTANT m If the heat sink is not parallel to the motherboard dismount and remount it You cannot mount the heat sink correctly due to the following CPU is not mounted correctly The heat sink clip is not engaged correctly E Do not hold the fastened heat sink to move the CPU 14 Attach the CPU air duct TIPS Check to see if the air duct is attached securely with its projected parts inserted into the chassis 15 Install the CPU module 16 Connect the power cord 17 Press the POWER switch to power on the module 18 Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the massage and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 7 System Upgrade 8 25 Removing CPU Follow the steps below to remove the CPU Except when you replace the CPU with a new one power off the server IMPORTANT m Do not remove the CPU unless it is faulty m If a CPU is not
312. settings Do not change the settings 4 30 System Configuration Start Procedure Start Fast UTIL in the procedure below 1 Turn on the power of the server The start message appears on a screen in the middle of POST Press Q and Ctrl together Fast UTIL is started IMPORTANT Press these keys before message QLogic Adapter using IRQ number x or later appears lt Example gt QLogic Corporation QLA 1216x PCI SCSI ROM BIOS Version X XX Copyright C QLogic Corporation 1993 2001 All rights reserved www qlogic com Press lt CTRL Q gt for Fast UTIL ISP12160 Firmware Version xx xx xx QLogic Adapter using IRQ number X Device Device Adapter SCSI SCSI Vendor Product Product Number Type Number ID LUN ID ID Revision 81 Disk 0 0 O SEAGATE ST32550 7394 3 Highlight Select Host Adapter using the cursor keys and press Enter Fast UTIL Options Configuration Settings Scan SCSI Bus SCSI Disk Utility Select Host Adapter Exit Fast UTIL System Configuration 4 31 Select the proper adapter IMPORTANT The adapter QLA12160 Ultra3 2000 is used for built in hard disk Do not select it Highlight the displayed item with the cursor keys and press Enter Select Host Adapter Adapter Type I O Address QLA12160 Ultra3 The display returns to Fast UTIL Options The name of the selected host adapter appears at the upper left corner of the screen Fast UTIL Options Confi
313. sing NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Not support Executable on local server by using ft server utility Installing and Using Utilities 5 53 Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager Select the target component in the FTServer tree 2 Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen If the component is operating stop the component 3 Click the Diagnostics button in the Maintenance screen for the target component The diagnosis result can be confirmed by Result of the diagnosis on the target component screen The result of the diagnosis is reported by the NEC Express5800 ft series as an alert The result of diagnosis executed last is displayed in the Diagnosis Information column In addition if a fault is detected by the result of the diagnosis the state of the General Information tree of the component is changed Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager Ce Eiht wew Tots tib Ce ES alas f 1 Press Ihe Clear MTI baaton to Cow MATEA evomann wt Maintenance screen of PCI module PCI Module Maintenance 5 54 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in the ft server utility 1 Select the target component by using the ft server utility 2 Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs If the component is operating stop the component 3 Click the Diagnostics button in the Diagnosis Information on the target component The diagnosis r
314. ss5800 ft series contact your maintenance personnel CPU Information If you select CPU Module CPU in the FTServer tree of the data viewer unknown or incorrect information appears in some information items The CPU information can be viewed by selecting System CPU in the NEC ESMPRO MIB tree Change of Installation States of CPU and PCI Modules If you dynamically change the configuration of the CPU or PCI module in the relevant system during review of the server information by using the data viewer the message prompting you to reconstruct the tree of the data viewer will appear If you click the Yes button the tree is reconstructed in the data viewer to reflect the change of the system configuration on the data viewer Installing and Using Utilities 5 21 Clicking the No button does not cause the tree to be reconstructed in the data viewer If so the information in the data viewer may be different from the current system information because the change of the system configuration is not reflected on the data viewer SCSI Slot Information When the PCI module is detached and you select SCSI Slot General Information the displayed Hardware LED information may not be correct To check the status of SCSI slots see the string information in the Status column Impact When Module Status Changes PCI modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other For ex
315. t 3 E Logical Disk Information RDR Virtual Disk 1 RDR Virt 2 IMPORTANT m The time required for synchronization varies depending on the partition size on the disk For 18GB partition it takes about 16 minutes When there is no partition synchronization may be completed in a short period of time after RDR is set and the status may change to what is described in the step 8 m The percentage changes from 0 to 25 50 75 depending on the synchronization process progresses 3 20 Windows Setup and Operation m Ifthe system is rebooted during synchronization the process cannot be completed Do not restart the system until the synchronization is completed 8 When the Op State State of RDR Virtual Disk x x 1 2 3 becomes Duplex and Status becomes None the disk synchronization is completed FAROR utility File E Action amp Help H PCI module 1 B SCSI Enclosure E Slot 1 B Slot 2 Slot 3 PCI module 2 E SCSI Enclosure E Slot 1 f Slot 2 Slot 3 E Logical Disk Information RDR Virtual Disk 1 RDR Virtual Disk 2 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 Disk Harddisk1 LUN2 Name DevicePathID o Op State State Duplex Op State Reason None vendor ProductID Data Duplex LUN ProductRevisionLevel 4 SerialNumber 50891937 496D 4D64 8 ObjectName Harddisk1 Caption RDR Virtual Disk 2 DevicePath 1 10 40 2
316. t Menu to check Boot gt When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress the following message appears After this message appears check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the error codes listed in the table below This machine is not supported This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this server Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server NvRAM access error An access to the nonvolatile memory NVRAM is not acceptable Hard disk access error The hard disk is not connected or it is failed Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected An error message will also be displayed when an error was detected during system diagnosis Take a note or print the error message displayed and contact your sales agent Troubleshooting 7 37 Problems with Master Control Menu Failed to read online documentation O Is HTML browser installed properly Online documentation is an HTML format file Install the HTML browser Internet Explorer 5 x or later in your operating system O Is HTML file properly associated to the browser software Online documentation accesses the local files in CD ROM If the extension of HTML file htm or html is not associated to your browser correctly the local HTML file may not be browsed from Internet Explorer or the other applications Initialize your browser and set the association of extension htm or html correc
317. t function 5 12 Installing and Using Utilities m Effects of using NEC ESMPRO Manager and Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent have sufficient effects on a variety of needs in versatile and complicated system environments Detection of server fault NEC ESMPRO Agent collects a variety of fault information on NEC Express5800 series systems to identify the states of the systems If a server detects a fault the server provides NEC ESMPRO Manager with the proper alert report Prevention of server fault NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function predicting the occurrence of a fault in advance as countermeasures for preventing faults from occurring It can previously detect the increase in the cabinet temperature and the empty capacity in a file system Management of server operation status NEC ESMPRO Agent can acquire the detailed hardware configuration and performance information on NEC Express5800 series systems The acquired information can be viewed at any point through NEC ESMPRO Manager Collective management of distributed servers NEC ESMPRO Manager provides the GUI interface that allows servers distributed on the network to be managed efficiently Installing and Using Utilities 5 13 Detection of Server Fault NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent detect errors causing faults to occur at an early stage and notify Administrators of fault information real time m Early dete
318. talling a third party hard disk may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk Purchase hard disks of the same model in pair Contact your sales agent for hard disk drives optimum for your server m The OS starts from the hard disk that is mounted in Slot 1 of the primary module whose POWER LED is on A SCSI controller error having sraql160 as its source may sometimes be recorded in the system event log This error is likely to be issued when the hard disk drive processing cannot keep up in time with requests of the OS but the processing is carried on normally thanks to the retry function So this does not affect the operation at all In case such an error is issued check the detailed data indicated below and if it is f0030004 or f0030015 just ignore that log If however a SCSI controller error whose detailed data is f0030004 or f0030015 is recorded repeatedly ten times or more in a week time as a rough guide a hard disk drive failure is suspected Contact the maintenance personnel in such a case Event Properties 2 x Event Date 07 11 2001 sae Cots t Description Time 23 44 Category T The driver detected a controller Type Error EventID 11 error on Device Scsi sraql160x a x is a numeral as 1 or 2 for Computer SANDS x is a numeral as 1 or 2 fo example Description The driver detected a controller error on Device Scsissragl1 602 Data C Bytes Words 0010000f 006a0001 00000 0028000
319. tate Power On In service Off On On Out of service DC power Off Off Off On Forced shutdown Off Off On Pressing the POWER switch for over four seconds shuts down the power to the server Thermal Sensor Select Thermal Sensor on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility System Hardware Item Specific Help Determines if BIOS will disable boot if the 48 temperature is not within safe range Thermal Sensor Thermal Sensor Enabled Upper Limit Lower Limit 5 Fl Help Esc Exit Select Item t Change Values gt Sub Menu F9 Setup Defaults lt gt Select Menu Enter Select F10 Save Changes amp Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Thermal Sensor Enabled Disabled Enable or disable the thermal sensor monitoring feature Upper Limit 7 48 80 Specify the upper limit temperature for boot up restriction in Celsius Use and or keys to specify a value by adding a number greater than 7 to the value specified for Lower Limit Lower Limit 0 5 73 Specify the lower limit temperature for boot up restriction in Celsius Do not specify 4 degrees or lower Use and or keys to specify a value by deducting a number greater than 7 to the value specified for Upper Limit Factory set System
320. tdown the relevant NEC ESMPRO Agent machine may be entered into the sleep state If so the report server access disabled is issued and the status color of the server icon becomes gray This cannot indicate whether the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine is shut down or entered into the sleep state Keep these in mind when operating the system where systems to be monitored may enter the sleep state Troubleshooting 7 41 Some items cannot be monitored with NEC ESMPRO Manager Some items cannot be monitored with NEC ESMPRO Manager of version 4 0 or earlier NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 1 is registered in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Use the NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 1 The incorrect information appears on the printer information s available time When you add a new printer install its driver and make its settings if you do not make settings for the available time from Add Printer Wizard the printer s available time From and To in Printers and Faxes are 00 00 on the other hand Manager s time are 9 00 To display them properly make the settings of printer from Printers and Faxes The procedures are as follows 1 Start Printers and Faxes and open the printer properties you want to make settings for Select the Printers and Faxes right click and select Properties Select the Advanced tab Enter values in the available time From and To and click OK in the Advanced and Properties dialog boxes Now
321. tenance Utility System Diagnostics Utility FD The support disk for starting the system check program is created System Management Function FD The support disk for system management functions is created Installing and Using Utilities 5 7 BIOS FW etc Update The program which is necessary for the update work is transferred to the floppy disk which the various update modules of BIOS FW were stored in After the reboot an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk and various BIOS FW s are updated IMPORTANT During the execution of the update program do not turn off the power of the system If the update is interrupted halfway the system will not be able to be started System Management functions Allow you to make settings of BMC Baseboard Management Controller to use its report functions and remote control from the management PC Help Indicates the descriptions on several features of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Return to the Top Menu Indicates the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu 5 8 Installing and Using Utilities Consoleless Menu The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER contains the consoleless feature that enables configuration of the server by remote operation from the management PC even if a console device such as keyboard is not connected to the server IMPORTANT m Don t use this CD ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800 ft series with which it is packaged including other NEC Express5800 m
322. ter At the termination of update the update result is displayed 5 Click OK G Update was ended normally Installing and Using Utilities 5 69 Procedure of Update from ft server utility Update the firmware in the procedure as follows 1 Click the Firmware button in the Firmware tree The BMC FW Update dialog box appears E yes yrd to Frenne hae S Fievensee Ariori an BMC Fervsave Update Service The setting of UMC firmare update service u changed Dwe 2 Enter the device name and click OK xl Please specify the machine name which updates BMC FW Cancel fre About 3 Store the firmware in the directory shown in Location LS jx Please store update data in the next place The Execution Check dialog box appears hine RVER Location C Program Files BmeTootBmcFwUpDa 4 E A click of a OK button performs BMC FW update Cancel The storage area may be changed See Change of Update Data Storage Destination described later 4 Click OK Execute the firmware update BMC FW Update executing The progress of the update appears during the update BMC FW is updated The update result appears after the update is terminated i Update was ended normally 5 Click OK 5 70 Installing and Using Utilities Change of Update Data Storage Destination Perform the firmware up
323. ter after the settings of dual configuration Do not set IP address for 100Base Adapter or 1000Base Adapter m Use a hub for dual configuration Use a repeater hub or a switching hub for AFT function Use a switching hub for ALB function Connect the network cables to the both primary and secondary PCI modules After the settings of dual configuration if one network cable is disconnected from a PCI module or a hub the status of the PCI modules becomes simplex In such case if the network cable is connected to the PCI module or the hub again the status of the PCI modules becomes duplex Windows Setup and Operation 3 37 Removing dual LAN TIPS To set dual LAN configuration log on as Administrator or a member of the group Administrators 1 Display the Intel R PROSet II dialog box 2 Start one of the start menu modes below Standard start menu mode Click Intel R PROSet II in Control Panel from the Start menu Classic start menu mode 1 Select Control Panel from Settings of the Start menu 2 Double click the Intel R PROSet IT icon 3 Remove all adapters from Duplication Right click the following adapters on the control tree which is located on the left side of the Intel R PROSet I dialog box and select Remove from Team Ey Netwrerk Components Bh Team BT Adaptive Pout Tolerance Mode mi ey Member Adacners Team Contguraton Advarced Netw Diner Adachors in Tom
324. ter and Paths l E E Removable Storage eatin Disk Defragmenter Disks Disk Management Repair Yol p A Services and Applications Reactivate Volume EB Disk 4 Delete Volume P oc Missing Properties Help New Volume F 8 00 GB NTFS 26 18 GB Healthy Unallocated 4 gt I Unatccated B Simple volume l Mirored volume Remove Mirror Computer Management olo 2 hes Computer Management Local ic s System Tools z Event Viewer Shared Folders new Volume E Simple Dynamic NTF new Volume F Simple Dynamic NTF EEM c Mirror Dynamic NTFS Local Users and Groups ic Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager a amp Storage zz Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management E Te Services and Applications New Yolume E 8 00 GB NTFS Healthy Missing Dynamic Offline Reactivate Disk E Unallocated J omputer Management 3 File Action view Window Help 8 Insert new disks They will appear on Disk Management If any uninitialized disk is inserted right click the disk and initialize it Computer Management Local E System Tools 1c a Event Viewer H I Shared Folders Local Users and Groups 3 Performance Logs and Alerts S3New Volume E Simple Dynamic E amp New Volume F Simple Dynamic SIEM C Mirror Dynamic Device Manager iS amp Storage Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management
325. the MTBF of the component again If the calculated value is lower than the pre defined threshold the NEC Express5800 ft series disables the component to be used Contact your maintenance personnel if such a symptom as above occurs IMPORTANT A disabled component with the MTBF lower than the threshold can be forcibly enabled by clearing the MTBF However contact your maintenance personnel for the forced use of such a component To clear the MTBF information of a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Maintenance tree of the component of the FTServer tree of the data viewer Open the tree of the component whose MTBF information is to be cleared and select the Maintenance tree To clear the MTBF information of a component with the ft server utility use the utility screen of the component The table below shows the potential cases in which the MTBF information of a component is to be cleared Contact your maintenance personnel for clearing MTBF information Component MTBF clear Remote Local CPU Module To start the module forcibly after To start the module forcibly after replacing replacing a module or if MTBF became a module or if MTBF became lower than lower than the threshold due to the threshold due to malfunction and malfunction and disabled the module disabled the module Executable in the following module Executable in the following module state state this can be viewed on manager A Den g e Only
326. the NEC Express5800 ft series enters the abnormal state the error is posted by various means This section explains the types of error messages Error Messages by LED Indication The LEDs on the front and rear panels of the NEC Express5800 ft series and near the handles of hard disks inform the user of the various server statuses by the colors and the patterns of going on going off and flashing If trouble seems to have occurred check the LED indication For the LED indication and meanings see Chapter 2 Error Messages on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD The LCD on the front panel of the NEC Express5800 ft series displays the NEC Express5800 ft series status all the time If an error occurs the LCD displays the error message The following tables show the messages that are to be displayed on the LCD and explain the meanings and procedures IMPORTANT Although NEC Express5800 320Lc R does not have an LCD on its front you can check error messages from NEC MWA or NEC ESMPRO Manager as follows m NEC MWA On a desired server select Start BMC dialog from the Server menu BMC dialog box will show the LCD status as well as server power status and LED status m NEC ESMPRO Manager On Operation Window select a desired server and start Data Viewer You can check the messages on Data Viewer 7 4 Troubleshooting Indication
327. the red LED is on and the event i indicating that MTBF is lower than the e Broken threshold is registered in the event log MTBF is lower than the threshold PCI Module Same as above Same as above Ethernet To start the module component forcibly To start the module component forcibly Adapter after replacing a module or if MTBF after replacing a module or if MTBF became lower than the threshold due to malfunction and disabled the module component Executable in the following module state this can be viewed on manager screen Broken MTBF is lower than the threshold You can clear MTBF information by unplugging and plugging the live wire of the PCI module became lower than the threshold due to malfunction and disabled the module component Executable in the following module state this can be viewed on manager screen e Only the red LED is on and the event indicating that MTBF is lower than the threshold is registered in the event log You can clear MTBF information by unplugging and plugging the live wire of the PCI module SCSI Adapter Same as above 5 50 Installing and Using Utilities Component MTBF clear Remote Local SCSI To start the module component forcibly To start the module component forcibly Enclosure after replacing a module or if MTBF after replacing a module or if MTBF became lower than the threshold due became lower than the threshold due to to malfunction and
328. the screen for setting the information on the start from the device connected to the host adapter appears Submenu item Parameter Description Selectable Enabled Specify whether the boot from SCSI device can be SCSI Boot Disabled selected or not SCSI Bus 0 Select the bus to which the started SCSI device is 1 connected SCSI Boot ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Set the SCSI ID of the started SCSI device 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SCSI Boot Lun 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select the number of the LUN to which the started 8 9 10 11 12 13 SCSI device is bound 14 15 Factory set Restore Default Settings If you put the cursor on Restore Default Settings with keyboard cursors 1 and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter the display changes to the screen for returning the setting values to the default values IMPORTANT The default values can be restored for each SCSI bus Raw Nvram Data If you put the cursor on Raw Nvram Data with keyboard cursors 4 and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter the information on NvRAM installed in the host adapter is displayed in the hexadecimal format This function is provided to solve problems The information cannot be edited 4 36 System Configuration Scan SCSI Bus If you select Scan SCSI Bus from the Fast UTIL Options menu the list of devices connected to each SCSI bus is displayed in the o
329. the system components have limited lifetime e g cooling fans built in batteries built in CD ROM drive floppy disk drive mouse For stable operation it is recommended to replace them regularly For lifetime of individual components and replacing procedures ask your sales agent 4 WARNING A Do not detach a lithium battery yourself This equipment has a lithium battery Do not detach it yourself If the battery is exposed to fire or water it could explode RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment doesn t work correctly contact your sales agent instead of disassembling replacing or recharging it yourself PCI module board Precautions for Use 1 19 IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED Before sending the equipment for repair try the following 1 2 3 4 Check if its power cord and connection cables are attached correctly See Error Messages in Chapter 7 to check if there is a relevant symptom If yes take measures as instructed Certain software programs are required for operation of NEC Express5800 ft series Check if these programs are properly installed Use a commercially available anti virus program to check the server If the problem isn t solved by the above actions stop using the server and consult with your sales agent In this case check
330. this disk is the Disk1 on Disk Management 2 Corresponds to the number of a virtual disk created by RDR setting In this example this disk is a disk which makes up the RDR Virtual Disk 2 only appears for disks with RDR setting 3 This section appears only for disks with RDR setting Right frame The properties of the disk selected in the left frame is shown In the figure above the properties of the disk inserted to the PCI module for Group1 s Slot 2 IMPORTANT The RDR Utility display is not updated automatically Therefore update it by clicking Refresh R from Action A on the menu or pressing F5 after performing operations to disk such as inserting removing a disk specifying removing the RDR setting Making disks duplex by RDR The following describes the procedure to set duplex configuration to disks by RDR In this example the disks of the Slot 2 of the PCI modules for Group and Group 2 are duplexed 1 Insert a new disk to a built in slot In this example a disk is inserted to the Slot 2 of the PCI module for Group1 2 From Start select Control Panel then Administrative Tools and start Computer Management On the tree in the left frame click Disk Management If the inserted disk is indicated as Not Initialized in the right pane right click the disk and initialize it o Computer Management m File Action View Window Help e omens Computer Management Loca
331. tion is available only when you log into the SETUP utility with the supervisor password Set User Up to 7 Press Enter to display the user password entry Password alphanumeric screen With a user password accessing the characters SETUP menus is restricted This option is available only if the Supervisor Password is specified Password on Enabled Specify whether to request a password entry at boot Disabled boot up Supervisor password setup is required beforehand When the supervisor password is specified and this option is disabled the BIOS assumes that a system boot attempt is made by a user Power Switch Unmasked Enable or disable the POWER switch on the Mask Masked server If Masked is selected power off with the POWER switch becomes unavailable after OS boot up Forced shut down also becomes unavailable Forced shut down is a feature to shut down by pressing the POWER switch for over four seconds Option ROM Unmasked Enable or disable key entries during optional Menu Mask Masked ROM expansion Factory set System Hardware System Configuration Move the cursor onto System Hardware to display the System Hardware menu Main gt Vake On Events AC LINK Waiting time for AC LINK Error Log Initialization gt Console Redirection gt fthenory fidvanced System Harduare Boot Exit Security Item Specific Help Thernal Sensor Menu Last State E 6 Enter To m
332. tion of breaker operates in simplex and UPS mode Check if the power unit is connected correctly Remount the CPU module 2 If the problem persists contact your sales agent Off Off Red Green AC power is not Wait for the OS to start After the eee the CPU OS starts check the status LEDs The CPU module gt jig and then take the appropriate performing diagnosis actions Diag If the problem persists contact Red Green Off Off AC power is not your sales agent supplied to the CPU module 2 The CPU module 1 is performing diagnosis Diag Red Off Red Off On standby AC power After turning on the power wait for is supplied through the the OS to start cord but the system When the OS starts and duplex has not been powered mode is established the on yet indications will return to normal If Red Green Red Off The CPU module 1 is not check the status LEDs and performing diagnosis then take the appropriate actions Diag If the problem persists contact Red Off Red Green The CPU module 2 is your sales agent performing diagnosis Diag Red Amber Off Amber The CPU module 1 Red Amber Off Off memory is being dumped This occurs 7 only when maintenance is being performed Off Amber Red Amber The CPU module 2 Off Off Red Amber memory is being dumped This occurs E only when maintenance is being performed Tips When the status LED 1 is off the colors of the status LED 2
333. tly O Is Adobe Acrobat Reader installed properly A part of online documentation is supplied in PDF file format Install the Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4 05 or later in your operating system You can also install the Adobe Acrobat Reader using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Launch the Master Control Menu and select Setup Adobe Acrobat Reader Image of online documentation is not clear O Is your display unit set to display 256 colors or more Set the display unit to display 256 colors or more The master control menu fails to appear O Is your system Windows NT 4 0 or later or Windows 95 or later The CD ROM Autorun feature is supported by Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 95 The older versions do not automatically start from the CD ROM O Is Shift pressed Setting the CD ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature O_Is the system in the proper state The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD ROM In such a case start the Internet Explorer and run MC IST EXE in the CD ROM 7 38 Troubleshooting Problems with NEC ESMPRO NEC ESMPRO Manager See Chapter 5 See also online document in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM for troubleshooting and other supplementary information NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot receive trap from NEC ESMPRO Agent To change the community name of traps to be received from the default public in the NEC ESMPRO Ma
334. ubject to direct sunlight or high temperatures e g due to a heater If the CD ROM gets dirty with dust or fingerprints wipe it gently from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth When you clean the CD ROM use a CD cleaner Do not use a record cleaner spray benzine or thinner Store the CD ROM in a protective case when not in use 2 40 General Description This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 3 Windows Setup and Operation This chapter describes setup procedures to make NEC Express5800 ft series ready for use 3 2 Windows Setup and Operation DISK OPERATIONS NEC Express5800 ft series duplicates disks to secure data by using Disk Management or the Rapid Disk Resync RDR function This section describes operations such as configuration of dual settings to disks and replacement of disks IMPORTANT On the disks containing the OS it is recommended to create only the system partition To create a partition other than a system partition on the disk with the OS note the following If you reinstall the OS the entire disk will be cleared If there is any data partition other than the system partition the data must be backed up before reinstalling the OS Operations differ depending on the model of NEC Express5800 ft series Choose the suitable procedure Models that do not support the RDR Rapid Disk Resync function Go to Disks Operations Using Disk Management page 3 3
335. uctID Disk Harddisk2 ProductRevisionLeve Slot 3 i El PCI module 2 El SCSI Enclosure E Slot 1 Disk HarddiskO LUN1 f SerialNumber ObjectName ConfigState MTBF Current TT xi Deactivate RDR operation was successful MTBF ThresholdSta esl S E Logical Disk Inl RDR Virtue RDR Virtue Deactivate RDR Virtual Disk lt lt Clea a Resynchronize This Disk IMPORTANT A partition on the disk where the RDR setting is removed is not assigned a drive letter To use the partition assign a drive letter using Disk Management Other functions of RDR Utility Clearing MTBF value When a failure occurs to a disk the mean time between failures MTBF is counted and the value is saved In RDR Utility the value is displayed at MTBF Current and MtbfThresholdStatus These MTBF values can be cleared by the Clear MTBF command 1 Start RDR Utility and right click a target disk on the tree in the left frame and click Clear MTBF 2 In the Success dialog box click OK Performing resynchronization If disk synchronization by RDR is broken due to causes including a failure resynchronize disks by following either of the procedures below Resynchronization by specifying a disk Resynchronize the disk where a command is executed from the disk of the paired slot 1 Start RDR Utility and right click a target disk in the left frame and click
336. uide Setup IMPORTANT m You can also select Load Balancing in step 3 in Setting Dual LAN Configuration In this case Team 1 Adaptive Load Balancing Mode is added to Network Component Tree m Moreover select NEC 8490XT Copper Gigabit Adapter instead of Stratus emb 82559 10 100 Enet Adapter in Steps 4 and 5 PCI Board Status LED Indications ane Sioh Description Action Green Duplex is specified Specify duplex AFT ALB however the server works Specify an appropriate driver in simplex mode Off PCI board is properly In non duplex mode no special problem installed and operates in occurs non duplex mode AFT ALB Does not depend on simplex or duplex PCI board is installed to The system is operating normally in duplex operate in the duplex mode mode The PCI board is not Mount the PCI board correctly installed yet the PCI board If the PCI board was not mounted there is no is installed incorrectly or the problem power is not supplied Check the condition of power unit Remount the PCI module Red In the process of configuring Wait for a while until the indication changes If or canceling the duplex the indication unchanged check the PCI mode board slot status using NEC ESMPRO Manager Although the PCI board is Make the slot of the board installed from NEC mounted it may be offline ESMPRO Manager online or not be working Mount the PCI board correctly
337. ularly as described below If an error is found on your NEC Express5800 ft series consult your sales agent Checking Alert Monitor the failure occurrence by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation Always check whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window Data Viewer or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager Viewers of NEC ESMPRO jao z3 Ro a a Data Viewer Checking STATUS LEDs and LCD Display Check the LED indication on the front of the NEC Express5800 ft series on hard disks installed in 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay or on LCD display when the server is powered on or powered off by the shut down operation The functions and indications of LEDs are described in Chapter 2 If any indication that shows an error contact your sales agent Maintenance 6 3 Making Backup Copies NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server on a regular basis For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools consult with your sales agent When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration select System Information Management and then Save of the Off line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information Cleaning Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape A WARNING Observe the following inst
338. ulated on internal fans and confirm that the fan cables are connected firmly If the message does not disappear contact your sales agent Detected a voltage error to Contact your sales agent be warned Detected a device defect Detected a fan alarm If LCD displays some error message refer to the error message list see Chapter 7 Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans and confirm that the fan cables are connected firmly If the message does not disappear contact your sales agent Red Off BMC is being dumped Wait for a while it will go off soon PCI module may be Check if PCI module is connected connected incorrectly correctly Look for loose screws BMC may be out of order BMC firmware may need reprogramming Contact your sales agent ANY Red BMC is being dumped Wait for a while After a while the BMC status LED on the secondary will blink PCI module may be Check if PCI module is connected connected incorrectly correctly Look for loose screws BMC may be out of order BMC firmware may need to be rewritten Contact your sales agent ANY Red Transfers data being Do not remove either of the PCI blinking synchronized after a PCI modules or control the AC DC power every 0 5 module is replaced this is until the LED stops blinking second not an error ANY Red The revision of BMC Contact your sales agent blinking firmware does not match every 1 second General Description 2
339. umeA VolumeB disk0 disk1 disk2 ACT AR AE METRE LR Aa disk4 disk5 Windows Setup and Operation 3 5 Configuring and Breaking Mirror This section describes the procedures to configure and break the mirror of hard disk volumes using Disk Management Configuring mirror Follow the procedures below to configure a volume mirror IMPORTANT Set mirror to the disks whose Target IDs are identical For details see Hard Disk Configurations that can be built on the NEC Express5800 ft series page 3 3 1 Click Start Administrative Tools then Computer Management The Computer Management dialog box will appear 2 Click Disk Management under Storage in the console tree The Disk Management window will appear on the right panel 3 Insert anew disk The disk will appear on the Disk Management window computer Management ee O x E File Action view Window Help 21 x e amem Computer Management Local a A System Tools E E Event Viewer ni Shared Folders ic Pa Local Users and Groups E A Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager Sj Storage i Removable Storage Volume Layout Type File System status Capacity Free 5 OEM C Simple Dynamic NTFS Healthy System 6 01GB 3 64 GB raha Disk Defragmenter haicme l2s 17 Healthy System Unallocated fa Services and Applications 34 18 GB Unallocated CD ROM D No Medi
340. urer Standard disk drives Manufacturer Standard disk drives Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 1 LUN 0 Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 2 LUN O Device status Device status This device is working properly This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter start the troubleshooter ied Device usage Device usage Use this device enable bd Use this device enable ee Windows Setup and Operation 3 29 Disk 4 General Policies Volumes Driver SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI Disk Device lt Device type Disk drives Manufacturer Standard disk drives Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 1 LUN 0 Device status This device is working properly IF you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter zd Device usage Use this device enable z Disk 5 zix SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI Disk Device Properties 2 xi General Policies Volumes Driver SEAGATE ST336607LC SCSI Disk Device lt Device type Disk drives Manufacturer Standard disk drives Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 2 LUN 0 Device status This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter izi Device usage
341. us Synchronous No No transfer is enabled or disabled Tagged Queuing Yes Yes Do not change the factory setting No No Sync Offset 00 02 04 06 08 00 02 04 06 08 Select the proper offset value in 10 12 14 16 18 10 12 14 16 18 synchronous transfer 20 22 24 20 22 24 Sync Period Transfer Rate Transfer Rate Select the proper speed in Mbytes sec Mbytes sec synchronous transfer 9 160 Ultra3 9 160 Ultra3 SCSI La 10 80 Ultra2 10 80 Ultra2 SCSI SCSI 12 40 Ultra 12 40 Ultra SCSI SCSI 25 20 Fast 25 20 Fast SCSI SCSI 40 12 5 40 12 5 Exec Throttle 1 4 8 16 32 1 4 8 16 32 64 Do not change the factory setting 64 128 255 128 255 Factory set 4 34 System Configuration SCSI Bus Settings If you put the cursor on SCSI Bus Settings with keyboard cursors and 7 in the Configuration Settings menu and press Enter the screen for setting the information on the SCSI bus of the host adapter appears The table below shows the parameters of the setting items and their factory settings IMPORTANT The settings can be made for each SCSI bus Submenu item Parameter Description SCSI BusO SCSI Bus1 SCSI Bus SCSI ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select the SCSI ID given to SCSI 7 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 bus 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 SCSI Bus Reset Enabled Enabled Make
342. use the disks with the same number Do not mirror disks using the disk number shown in Disk Management m When the disk to be inserted into a slot for duplexed configuration of disk has been used as a disk which contains the boot volume disk storing the OS the disk cannot be used for duplexed configuration Initialize the disk to use the disk This section describes an example of determining failures of the disk in the Slot 2 of the PCI module for Group and the disk in the Slot 3 of the PCI module for Group2 using How to Locate Failed Disks 1 Click Start gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management The Computer 3 oe Ts Tae se Management window appears 7 Gla Computer Management Local GB System Tools Ez fa Event Viewer H E Shared Folders i ra Local Users and Groups Ej gi Performance Logs and Alerts a Device Manager B amp Storage H E Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Pa EDisk Management fe Services and Applications Layout Type GaNew volume E Mirror Dynamic GaNew Volume F Mirror Dynamic EOM c Mirror Dynamic 2 Click Disk Management under Storage in the console tree An example in this figure shows that one of the mirrored disks in which Drives E and F are included is broken Some disks are indicated as Unknown disk However they may be indicated differently depending on the error amp Sdisk 0 Dynamic 0EM C type
343. ver utility in the following procedure The system cannot be configured using the NEC ESMPRO Manager 1 Select General in the FTServer tree 2 Check the property of carrying out the modification with System Settings or cancel the check 3 Click the Apply button Sample screen of ft server utility J General ft server utility ol x File view Window Help r System Settings are Change system settings that affect the system E CPU Module I Enable quick dump that is harvested at the same time SmGBee m PCI Module 4G SCSI Enclosure IV Enable automatic firmware update Ea BMC M Enable automatic module start B Firmware Installing and Using Utilities 5 67 BMC Firmware Update The firmware of the BMC on the PCI module can be updated The base management controller BMC is the processor exclusively used for monitoring the system s operating environment faults and controlling of the system The BMC firmware can be updated by using the BMC firmware update utility Both NEC ESMPRO Manager and the ft server utility can start the BMC firmware update utility To update the BMC firmware the firmware image file must be updated on the managed server in advance On the BMC firmware update screen specify the path of the image file of the firmware to be updated The table below shows the potential cases in which the BMC firmware is to be updated IMPORTANT Contact your maintenance personnel for t
344. w in the Windows Explorer format the data viewer indicates their states on the right side of the screen You can manage the status on a Web browser using Web component functions of NEC ESMPRO Manager For details see Help on Web Component This section describes the tree structure and displayed screens in the data viewer To make the data viewer indicate the state of each module and those of the components on it select the server to be monitored from NEC ESMPRO Manager to start the data viewer in the following description the start procedure of the data viewer is omitted 5 28 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring CPU Module To monitor the CPU modules and the components on the CPU module see the CPU Module tree To see the information on the CPU Module tree select the target CPU module from CPU Module in the FTServer tree You can see the following information on the modules and the components on the CPU modules in the CPU Module tree General Allows the configuration and other information on the CPU modules to be viewed Vernon Pheoeree ServeBiOS Vernon 2 00 FB Adinen ioman NEC BROS Vernon 011 0 Earner 5 ECE irtomation Thepshokt Eaceeded Within the tends of theechokd Enos m Maintenance Allows the start stop MTBF information clear dump acquisition and diagnosis of the CPU modules to be provided See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for the start stop and MTBF info
345. with appropriate one 8610 MAC Address update failed Corel O 01 0 1 0OMbit Ethernet Controller FRB2 timeout occurred when setting MAC address and rewrite was unsuccessful e Replace the back panel board e Replace the PCI module board 1 Troubleshooting 7 19 On screen error message Cause Action 8611 MAC Address update failed Corel O 0 Gbit Ethernet Controller FRB2 timeout occurred when setting MAC address and rewrite was unsuccessful Replace the back panel board Replace the PCI module board 1 8612 MAC Address update failed Corel O 110 100 Mbit Ethernet Controller FRB2 timeout occurred when setting MAC address and rewrite was unsuccessful Replace the back panel board Replace the PCI module board 2 8613 MAC Address update failed Corel O 1 Gbit Ethernet Controller FRB2 timeout occurred when setting MAC address and rewrite was unsuccessful Replace the back panel board Replace the PCI module board 2 7 20 Troubleshooting Error Notification by BEEP An error message may not be displayed on the display unit even though the POST detected an error In such a case the beep sounds notifies you an error The error contents are indicated by the combination of beep sound patterns For example beep sounds once consecutively three times once and then once beep code 1 3 1 1 indicates DRAM refresh test error Th
346. y menu which is used to format or verify the connected SCSI devices appears System Configuration 4 37 Exit Fast UTIL Termination and Storage of Fast UTIL After changing the settings press Esc several times to display the Fast UTIL Options menu If you select Exit Fast UTIL from the menu the screen for terminating Fast UTIL appears However if the settings are different from those before the start the screen prompting you to save the settings appears before the display of the termination screen Configuration settings modified Save Changes Do not save changes Select either Save changes or Do not save changes by using keyboard cursors and and press Enter Pressing Enter causes the screen for terminating Fast UTIL to appear Exit Fast UTIL Reboot System Return to Fast UTIL Select either Reboot System or Return to Fast UTIL and press Enter Setting List for Optional SCSI Device If you add an optional SCSI device do not change the factory settings of built in SCSI controller For information on optimal SCSI devices for NEC Express5800 ft series contact your sales agent 4 38 System Configuration FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR Read this section if your server does not operate as expected or if you want to return all setup values to those made at shipment Forced Shutdown Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server the POWER switch does not turn off the serve
347. you can restart the server by unplug and plugging the power cord LED indications Primary Secondary Green Off BMC operates normally and CPU and PCI modules are in duplex mode Description Action Green Off CPU or PCI modules are Remount components whose status blinking not in duplex mode during LED is red If the problem persists every 1 operation replace that module second Off Off AC power is all off Turn on the AC power Performing POST Wait for a while it will illuminate in green shortly after POST CPU module error After turning off the power turn it on to occurred restart the system If some error PCI module error occurred Message appears on the POST screen write it down and contact your sales agent 2 18 General Description LED indications Primary Secondary Description Action Amber Off Detected a fatal If LCD displays some error message temperature error refer to the error message list see Chapter 7 Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans and confirm that the fan cables are connected firmly If the message does not disappear contact your sales agent Detected a fatal voltage Contact your sales agent error Amber Off Detected a temperature If LCD displays some error message blinking error to be warned refer to the error message list see every 1 Chapter 7 second Check if dust is accum
348. your body before handling the CPU Do not touch the CPU terminals or on board parts with a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m Do not use the system before checking to see it works correctly m Make sure to use the CPU authorized by NEC Installing a third party CPU may cause a failure of the CPU as well as the server Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from installing such a board will be charged m Before adding or removing CPU power off the server and detach the CPU module m Make sure to read Anti static Measures and Preparing Your System for Upgrade before starting installing or removing options CPU 2 additional CPU 1 standard 8 22 System Upgrade Installation Follow the steps below to mount a CPU 1 Shut down OS The server will be powered off automatically Unplug the power cord Remove the CPU module Detach the CPU air duct Check to be sure of the location of the CPU socket Remove the anti dust sheet from the socket IMPORTANT Carefully keep the removed sheet Lift the socket lever IMPORTANT Open the lever fully It can be opened 120 or more System Upgrade 8 23 10 11 12 Place the CPU carefully on the socket TIPS Pay attention to the orientation of the CPU Pin marks The CPU and socket have pin marks to prevent misin
349. your sales agent Cord offline Green Blink PCI module 1 PCI module logically isolated Start the PCI module by ft sever utility or dismount and remount that module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent Cor0 removed Green Blink PCI module 1 PCI module detached Dismount and remount the PCI module If not solved by the above contact your sales agent CorQ Temp Alm Amber Blink PCI module 1 Temperature alarm lower Check to see if dust is 00 limit accumulated on the Cord Temp Alm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal temperature alarm internal fans Check also if 02 lower limit the fan cables are Cord Temp Alm Amber Blink PCI module 1 Temperature alarm upper Connected securely If not 07 limit solved by the above Cord Temp Alm Amber Lit PCI module 1 Fatal temperature alarm contactyour sales agent 09 upper limit 7 6 Troubleshooting Indication _ ED a et Explanation Procedure Corl 12vAl m00 Amber Blink PCI module 2 12 V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent lower limit Corl 12vAl m02 Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm lower limit Corl 12vAl m07 Amber Blink PCI module 2 12 V power voltage alarm upper limit Corl 12vAlm09 Amber Lit PCI module 2 Fatal 12 V power voltage alarm upper limit Corl 2 5vAlm Amber Blink PCl module 2 2
350. ystem there is no real problem on operation In the description X represents a number Source iANSMiniport EventID 35 Description Initializing Team X missing adapters Check the configuration to verify that all the adapters are present and functioning The logs of the source iANSMiniport are the logs about the duplex of the network The following logs may be recorded in the system event log when starting the system In the description X represents a number Source iANSMiniport Event ID 11 Description Adapter link down Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 7 34 Troubleshooting Source iANSMiniport EventID 11 Description Adapter link down Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 2 Source iANSMiniport EventID 13 Description Secondary Adapter is deactivated from the Team Stratus emb 82544GC Copper Gigabit Adapter 2 Source iANSMiniport EventID 16 Description Team X The last adapter has lost link Network connection has been lost Source iANSMiniport EventID 35 Description Initializing Team X missing adapters Check the configuration to verify that all the adapters are present and functioning If the following logs are recorded after the above logs are recorded there is no real problem on operation by the above errors or warnings When the following logs are not recorded if the log of the source sragbe is not recor

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Fujitsu fi-4340C  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file